2012年高考英语二轮复习课件（36份打包下载）

(共29张PPT)
倒装的两种考法：
1. 放在单项选择题中，考查考生的倒装语法知识是否熟练掌握；
2. 放在完形填空和阅读理解中，设置理解障碍。
倒装的两种形式：
1. 完全倒装： 将整个谓语动词提到主语前。
2. 部分倒装：即半倒装，将谓语的一部分即助动词提到主语前。
一、完全倒装
【翻译句子】
(1)车来了。
Here comes the bus.
(2)铃响了。
There goes the bell.
(3)孩子们冲出来了。
Out rushed the children.
(4)那个男孩离开了。
Away went the boy.
【结论1】表方位的副词here, there 或out, in, up, down, away, off等标志词放在句首，句子用完全倒装。
【疑难】
----May I use your pen
----Yes,of course.Here it is.
In she came.
Away he went.
【疑难剖析】当主语是人称代词时，主谓语序不变。
【完成例句】
(5)河的南面有一家小工厂。
South of the river lies a small factory.
(6)山谷里传来一声喊叫。
From the valley came a cry.
【结论2】地点状语放在句首且谓语动词为
come, live, lie, stand, go等时用完全倒装。
【翻译句子】
(7)Such are the facts.
情况就是如此。
(8)生活就是这样。
Such is life.
(9)The following is the answer to the question.
这个问题的答案如下。
【结论3】 such, the following等放句首时， 句子要完全倒装。
【翻译句子】
(10)山顶上有一座高楼。
There is / stand a tall building on the top of the mountain.
(11)山脚下有条小河。
There lies a river at the foot of the mountain.
【结论4】There lie / exist / stand / live ＋主语＋…是there be 句型的变式。
【例句观察】
Present at the party ______ Mr Green and many other guests.
出席晚会的有格林先生，还有一些别的宾客。
Seated on the ground are a group of young men.
坐在地上的是一群年轻人。
【结论5】“表语＋系动词＋主语”的结构。
【注意】此时，主语较长，可还原为正常语序即：主＋系动词＋表语。
were
二、部分倒装
将情态动词、助动词、be提到主语前。 (通常可以还原为正常的语序，并以此检验倒装句是否正确。)
【翻译句子】
(12)Little does he know about the news.
他对这消息知之甚少。
(13)By no means ______________ in such a short time.
他根本不可能在这么短的时间里赶上来。
can he catch up
例3:Little about her own safety, though she was in great danger herself.(2009 陕西)
A. did Rose care B. Rose did care
C. Rose does care D. does Rose care
解析:选A。little是具有否定意义的副词，位于句首时句子用部分倒装且根据从句时态可知用一般过去时，所以选A项。
【结论1】含有否定意义的副词或短语如：few, little, never, not, not until, nowhere, rarely, seldom, hardly / scarcely…when…， no sooner…(than)…， not only…(but also), at no time, by no means等放在句首时，需用部分倒装。
【疑难1】
He is active in personality, and he seldom stays indoors. (无助动词)
He is active in personality, and seldom does he stay indoors. (添加does)
【疑难剖析1】若原句中没有助动词，必须根据谓语动词的具体时态来确定相应的助动词do, does 或did。
【疑难2】
Not only children but also adults are interested in the film Harry Potter.
【疑难2】Not not only…but also连接两个并列主语时不可倒装。只有在连接两个句子且将not only所连接的句子提到句首时，才可用倒装，but also后面的句子不倒装。
例1:The computer was used in teaching. As a result, not only , but students became more interested in the lessons.(2009 全国Ⅰ)
A. saved was teachers; energy
B. was teachers;energy saved
C. teachers;energy was saved
D. was saved teachers;energy
解析:选B。考查倒装句。否定副词not only, little, never 等位于句首时，它后面的句子用部分倒装。
【疑难3】
I had hardly got to the airport when the plane took off.
→Hardly had I got to the airport when the plane took off. (注意谓语动词形式)
【疑难剖析3】在“hardly / scarcely…when / no sooner”位于句首时，要用部分倒装。
【疑难4】
The villagers did not realize how serious the pollution was until all the fish died in the river.
→Not until all the fish died in the river did the villagers realize how serious the pollution was.
(将until后面的全部内容提前)
【疑难剖析4】not until提前时，要用倒装，且必须将not until后面的全部内容提前，而不仅仅是not until这两个词。
【疑难5】
I neither wanted to see the film nor bought the ticket.
→Neither did I want to see the film nor did I buy the ticket.
【疑难剖析5】neither… nor 句型中两个句子都需要部分倒装。
【完成例句】
(14)— 我有大量的工作要做。
— I've got an enormous amount of work to do.
— 我也是。
—So have I.
(15)他，和他全家人一样，相信你是无辜的。
He believed, as did all his family, that you were innocent.
(16)如果她不同意这个计划，Tom也不会同意。
If she doesn‘t agree to the plan, neither will Tom.
【结论2】so / as / neither / nor 为标志词放在句首时，句子用倒装。
①表示前面所说的肯定情况，也适合于另一人或物时，句式如下：
so / as ＋ be (助动词或情态动词)＋ 主语。
②表示前面所说的否定情况也适合于另一人或物时，句式如下：
neither (nor)＋ be (助动词或情态动词)＋ 主语。
例6:Bill wasn‘t happy about the delay of the report by Jason, and .（2008 辽宁）
A. I was neither B. neither was I
C. I was either D. either was I
解析:选B。考查倒装句。表示一种情况同时适合两者的“……也不”，否定句式用“neither/nor+助动词+主语”。either用于否定句句末，如果A项为“I was not， either”也正确。
【特别提醒】
① “so ＋主语＋助动词(或be动词)”表示对上文肯定的内容加以肯定或赞同，意为“的确如此”；例如：
— It's raining hard. 天下着大雨。
— So it is. 是的。
② “主语＋did ＋so”表示：“主语”这样做了。 例如：
Tom asked me to go to play football with him and I did so.
Tom要我去踢足球，我去了。
【完成例句】
(17)你只有用这种方法才能学好英语。
Only in this way can you learn English well.
(18)只有他有时间的话他才会来。
Only if he has time will he come here.
(19)他被请了3次才来开会。
Only after being asked three times did he come to the meeting.
(20)Only that boy can work out the problem.
只有那个男孩才能解答出这个问题。
(21)Only socialism can save China.
只有社会主义才能救中国。
【结论3】
①“only ＋ 状语(或状语从句)”放在句首时，句子用部分倒装。
②only之后跟的不是状语时不可倒装。
【翻译句子】
(22)如果我是你，我就不会那样做。
Were I you, I wouldn't do that.
【结论4】在虚拟语气条件句中，从句谓语有助动词were, had, should时，可将if 省略，而把 were, had, should 移到句首。
【特别提醒】
①若从句是否定句，则必须将 not放在主语后。
② had必须是助动词。
【完成例句】
(23)暴风雨如此厉害，整个屋顶都被吹掉了。
So terrible was the storm that the whole roof was blown off.
(24)杰克是如此聪明的孩子，他能解答所有这些难题。
Such a clever boy was Jack that he was able to work out all these difficult problems.
【结论5】在 “so…that” 和 “ such…that”结构中，将“so＋adj. ”和“such＋n. ”提到句首时，句子用部分倒装。
例4:So sudden that the enemy had no time to escape. (2009 山东)
A. did the attack B. the attack did
C. was the attack D. the attack was
解析:选C。考查句子倒装。在so ...that ..., such ...that...的句子结构中，若so, such 和与其所修饰的词置于句首时，用部分倒装，又因为sudden是形容词，作表语，所以选项C正确。
【疑难】how和what引起的感叹句
①How ＋形容词 / 副词＋主语＋谓语。
②What ＋形容词＋名词＋主语＋谓语。
What a clever boy he is!
How blue the sky looks!
How fast time flies!(共23张PPT)
专题二　代词和介词
1．(2011年高考大纲全国卷)I got this bicycle for ________：My friend gave it tome when she bought a new one.
A．everything　　　　　　 　B．something
C．anything D．nothing
解析：句意：我这辆自行车一分钱也没花：我的朋友买了一辆新的，就把她这辆给了我。for nothing不花钱，免费。
答案：D
2．(2011年高考山东卷)The two girls are so alike that strangers find________difficult to tell one from the other.
A．it B．them
C．her D．that
解析：句意：这两个女孩长得如此相像，以至于陌生人觉得很难把她们区分开。本句中 it 用在 find 后作形式宾语，真正的宾语是后面的动词不定式短语 to tell one from the other。them，her，that等词均不能作形式宾语或形式主语。
答案：A
3．(2011年高考天津卷)We feel________our duty to make our country a better place.
A．it B．this
C．that D．one
解析：句意：我们觉得使我们国家成为一个更好的地方是我们的责任。四个选项均为代词。it在此处作形式宾语，指代后面的动词不定式短语to make our country a better place，语法结构正确；this 指代下文将要涉及的内容，而 that 往往指代上文提到的内容；one 作代词，指代同类不同物。this，that 和one 均不能作形式宾语。
答案：A
4．(2011年高考湖北卷)When asked about their opinions about the schoolmaster, many teachers would prefer to see him step aside________younger men.
A．in terms of B．in need of
C．in favor of D．in praise of
解析：句意：当被问及他们对校长的意见时，许多老师都希望看到他让位给年轻人。in terms of谈及，就……而言；in need of需要；in favor of支持，赞同；in praise of歌颂。根据句意可知应选C项。
答案：C
5．(2011年高考重庆卷)Shirley, a real book lover, often brings home many books to read________the library.
A．in B．for
C．by D．from
解析：句意：雪莉是一个真正爱好读书的人，她经常从图书馆带很多书回家读。根据句意知此处用介词from。
答案：D
[代词]
代词种类很多，功能不同。区分各种代词的不同功能是考生掌握的难点。高考题对代词的考查重点是不定代词some，any；none，no one，nothing；another，other，the other；neither，either等的区别以及指示代词it，this，that，these，those等的不同替代作用。预计2012年的高考对代词的考查会以不定代词、指示代词等内容为主。
一、不定代词
不定代词是代词的核心内容，也是极不容易掌握的语法知识，其中有些不定代词极易混淆。高考主要考查不定代词的辨析，着重考查以下内容：
1．some，any的区别
some一般用于肯定句，表示“一些”，也可用于疑问句，表示请求、邀请、建议等，往往期望对方给予肯定的答复；any一般用于疑问句和否定句，此时仅仅起加强语气的作用，本身没有实际意义，但也可用于肯定句，当“任何，任何一个”讲。
2．something，anything，nothing的区别
something一般用于肯定句，表示“某事，某物”，也可以用于疑问句，表示请求、邀请、征询意见等；anything表示“任何东西，任何事物”，一般用于否定句、疑问句或条件句，也可用于肯定句，当“任何事情”讲；nothing表示“没有什么，没有一件东西”，常用于陈述句，表示否定意义。
3．none，no one，nothing的区别
none既可指人，也可指物，侧重数量，通常指三者或三者以上的人或物，后可接of短语，作主语时谓语动词可用单数，也可用复数，常用来回答由how many/much引导的疑问句；no one只能指人，是泛指概念，常用来回答由who引导疑问句，不与of短语连用，作主语时，谓语动词用单数；nothing常用来回答由what引导的疑问句。
4．another，other的区别
another泛指同类事物中的三者或三者以上的“另一个”，只能代替或修饰单数可数名词。other表示“其他的，另外的”，泛指其余的人或物，通常与复数名词或不可数名词连用。
5．each，every，either，neither的区别
each指两个或两个以上的人或物中的“每一个”，侧重个体，后面可接of短语；either指两个人或事物中的任意一个，表选择；neither用于两者之间的否定，表示“两者都不”；every侧重三个或三个以上中的“每一个”，强调“无一例外”的含义。
[典例1]　(2011年高考四川卷)There is________in his words.We should have a try.
A．something B．anything
C．nothing D．everything
[解析]　句意：他话里有话。我们应该试试。something“某物，某事”，符合句意。anything“任何(事物)”；nothing“没有任何(事物)”；everything“一切(事物)”，三者均不符合句意。
[答案]　A
二、it的用法
英语中，运用it的场合较多。从它在句中的作用和意义来看，其用法可分为以下几类：
1．指代事物或前面提到过的事物。
2．用来代替指示代词this或that。
3．指不明确的人。
4．指时间、距离、天气、环境等。
5．指代整个句子的内容。
6．可指动物或婴儿(未知性别的婴儿和孩子)。
7．作形式主语和形式宾语。
当动词不定式、动名词或从句作主语时，为了使句子保持平衡，通常把主语放在谓语动词之后，而用it作句子的形式主语。在复合宾语中，当宾语是不定式、动名词、宾语从句时，往往把宾语放在它的补足语后面，而用it作形式宾语，放在宾语补足语之前。
[典例2]　________worries me that he keeps changing his mind.
A．This B．That
C．What D．It
[解析]　句意：他不断改变主意使我担心。it作形式主语，后面的that从句是真正的主语。
[答案]　D
[典例3]　He didn't make ________clear when and where the meeting would be held.
A．this B．that
C．it D．these
[解析]　it作形式宾语，后面when and where引导的从句才是真正的宾语。
[答案]　C
8．用于以下句型。
(1)强调句型：It is/was＋被强调部分(通常是主语、宾语、状语)＋that(who)＋句子的其余成分。强调句型只是把句子中某些词(被强调部分)的位置改变，如果把强调结构(it is/was...that/who)去掉之后，句子还应是完整的。
[典例4]　I don't mind her criticizing me，but________is how she does it that I object to.
A．it B．that
C．this D．which
[解析]　从句子结构分析，此处考查的是强调句型，因此用it。
[答案]　A
(2)It is＋一段时间＋since从句
(3)It was/will be＋一段时间＋before从句
[典例5]　He was told that it would be at least three more months ________he could recover and return to work.
A．when B．before
C．since D．that
[解析]　此处表示“多长时间以后才会……”，用“it will be＋一段时间＋before从句”。
[答案]　B
三、替代词one，ones，that和those的用法区别
1．one用来替代前面出现的单数名词，是泛指概念，相当于a/an＋单数名词。
2．ones用来替代前面出现的复数名词，也是泛指概念。
3．that用来替代前面出现的同类的名词，是同类替代，但并非同一个，可以是可数名词，也可以是不可数名词。
4．those用来替代前面出现的复数名词，是特指概念，相当于the＋复数名词，但多用于两者间的另外一方(一批)。
[典例6]　(2011年高考重庆卷)—Silly me! I forget what my luggage looks like.
—What do you think of________over there
A．the one B．this
C．it D．that
[解析]　句意：“我真傻！我忘了我的行李什么样了。”“你觉得那边的那个是你的吗？”根据句中的over there可知此处指远处，故用that; the one特指“同类中的一个”，用于指代可数名词，而luggage不可数；this常指近处；it指代“同一物”，均不符题意。
[答案]　D
[介词]
一、常用介词的用法
1．though，across，over，past的区别
through＋地点，表示从某地穿过
across＋地点，表示横穿某地，或从某地内部的一边到另一边，强调在表面运动
over＋地点，表示跨越某地，强调经过一段距离，或不接触表面从上空越过
past＋地点，表示从……旁边经过
2．besides，except，but的区别
besides意为“除……之外，还有……”，后面接名词、代词、动名词作宾语，也可单独使用，意为“此外”。
except意为“除……之外”，后面接名词、代词、动名词、介词短语、从句等作宾语。except for强调整体中的细节，意思是“只是”，前后的事物不属于同类。
but意为“除……之外”时，后面接名词、代词、动名词、动词不定式作宾语，常可与except互换使用。
二、介词短语
介词短语是指由“介词＋名词、代词、动名词及副词”所构成的短语。考生要对常见的介词短语做到熟能生巧，运用自如。如at home，on a visit，in surprise，by the way，in question等。
[典例1]　Nowadays some hospitals refer to patients ________ name，not case number.
A．of B．as
C．by D．with
[解析]　此处by表示方式，by name意为“凭名字”。
[答案]　C
[典例2]　Everything was perfect for the picnic ____the weather.
A．in place of B．as well
C．except for D．in case of
[解析]　考查介词短语的辨析。根据题意可知，此处表示除了天气之外，一切都很好。强调整体中的细节，用except for。in place of“替代，取代”；as well“也”；in case of“如果，假使”，均不符合题意。
[答案]　C
[典例3]　I agree to his suggestion ________the condition that he drops all charges.
A．by B．in
C．on D．to
[解析]　on the condition that与if同义，引导条件状语从句。根据题意可知答案为C。
[答案]　C
by用法小结
1．by the year/hour/day按年/小时/天。如：He rent a house by the year(day，hour)．但to the pound按磅算，to the ton按吨计例外。
2．表泛指方式、手段。如：by post/mail，by telephone(radio)，by electricity，by machinery，learn sth.by heart。
3．交通工具类。如：by bus/train/car/taxi(road)/bike/plane/air/ship/boat/sea/water...另外：by means of，by way of。
4．表方式、手段的其他介词。如：
He beat the dog with a whip.(with＋工具)
One smells with his nose.(with＋人体器官，但by hand例外)
He stood up with pride.(with＋情绪、情感、态度的名词)
使用语言、材料、文字使用in。如：in English(ink，pencil)。另外还有一些固定搭配也要用介词in，如：in high(good，low)spirits，in anger，in joy，in comfort，in sorrow，in safety，in danger，in need，in debt，in love，in fun，in pain，in tears，in surprise。
本小节结束
请按ESC键返回(共17张PPT)
第 2 讲 名词
1. Anyway, I can't cheat him－it's against all my ______. (2011浙江卷)
A. emotions B. principles
C. regulations D. opinions　
【答案及解析】1. B　考查名词的辨析。句意为“不管怎样，我不能欺骗他——这违反我的原则。”emotion情绪；principle原则，准则；regulation规定，规则；opinion意见。
2. The school advisers help you talk through your problems but they don't give you any direct ______. (2010浙江卷)
A. solution B. target
C. measure D. function
【答案及解析】2. A　分析四个选项：solution解决方法；target目标；measure措施；function功能。根据句意：学校的建议者们帮助你分析问题，但是他们不会给你直接的解决方法。
3. The system has been designed to give students quick and easy ______ to the digital resources of the library. (2009浙江卷)
A. access B. passage
C. way D. approach　　
【答案及解析】3. A　句意为“设计这个系统的目的是给同学们提供快速且容易使用图书馆电子资源的机会。”give sb. access to sth. 或have access to sth. 是固定词组，表示“有接近或使用某物的机会或权利”。
名词分为可数(有单、复数形式)和不可数名词(只有单数形式)。
【熟记】
1. 可数名词单数变复数的规则；
名词的数
1.1 名词复数的规则变化 一般情况 加 -s 清辅音后读/s/ map-maps 浊辅音和元音后读 /z/ bag-bags /car-cars 以s, sh, ch, x等结尾 加 -es 读 /iz/ bus-buses/ watch-watches 以ce, se, ze,等结尾 加 -s 读 /iz/ license-licenses 以辅音字母+y结尾 变y 为i再加es 读 /z/ baby---babies 1.2 其它名词复数的规则变化 1） 以y结尾的专有名词，或元音字母+y 结尾的名词变复数时，直接加s变复数。例如： two Marys-- the Henrys monkey---monkeys holiday---holidays
2） 以o 结尾的名词，变复数时： a. 加s，如： photo---photos piano---pianos radio---radios zoo---zoos； b. 加es，如：potato--potatoes tomato--tomatoes 3） 以f或fe 结尾的名词变复数时： a. 加s，如： belief---beliefs roof---roofs safe---safes gulf---gulfs； b. 去f,fe 加ves，如：half---halves knife---knives leaf---leaves wolf---wolves wife---wives life---lives thief---thieves； c. 上述a和b两种方法均可，如handkerchief: handkerchiefs / handkerchieves
1.3 名词复数的不规则变化
1） child---children foot---feet tooth---teeth mouse---mice man---men woman---women 注意：由一个词加 man 或 woman构成的合成词，其复数形式也是 -men 和-women，如an Englishman，two Englishmen。但German不是合成词，故复数形式为Germans；Bowman是姓，其复数是the Bowmans。 2）集体名词，以单数形式出现，但实为复数。
例如： people, police, cattle 等本身就是复数，不能说 a people，a police，a cattle，但可以说a person，a policeman，a head of cattle, the English，the British，the French，the Chinese，the Japanese，the Swiss 等名词，表示国民总称时，作复数用，如The Chinese are industries and brave. 中国人民是勤劳勇敢的。
3） 以s结尾，仍为单数的名词，如： a. maths，politics，physics等学科名词，一般是不可数名词，为单数。 b. news 为不可数名词。 c. the United States，the United Nations 应视为单数。 The United Nations was organized in 1945. 联合国是1945年组建起来的。 d. 以复数形式出现的书名，剧名，报纸，杂志名，也可视为单数。例如： "The Arabian Nights" is a very interesting story-book. 《一千零一夜》是一本非常有趣的故事书。 4） 表示由两部分构成的东西，如：glasses （眼镜）trousers, clothes等，若表达具体数目，要借助数量词 pair（对，双）; suit（套）; a pair of glasses; two pairs of trousers等。 5） 另外还有一些名词，其复数形式有时可表示特别意思，如：goods货物，waters水域，fishes（各种）鱼。
注意：
不规则变化：
man →men, woman →women, goose →geese, foot →feet, tooth →teeth, child →children, mouse →mice, ox →oxen
German →Germans。
复合名词的复数形式：
editor in chief→editors in chief,
daughter in law→daughters in law,
grown up→grown ups,
woman teacher→women teachers,
man driver →men drivers
名词的数
名词的所有格在句中表示所有关系，作定语用。
1.有生命名词的所有格一般在词尾加上“‘”或“’s”。如：Tom’s bike, Engles’s (Engles’) works, Women’s Day, the editor in chief’s office。　　
2. 如果一个事物为两个人共有，只在后一个名词的词尾加“'s”，如果不是共有，就要在两个名词的词尾都加上“'s”。如：Tom and Mike's room (共有)，Tom's and Mike's rooms (不共有)。
名词的所有格
3. 表示时间、距离、国家、城市的无生命名词，可以在词尾加“'s”或“'”表示所有格，如：today's papers, ten minutes' walk。
4. 表示店铺或某人的家时，常在名词所有格之后省去shop, house, home。如：the tailor's, the chemist’s,
the doctor’s, the aunt’s
5. 无生命名词的所有格通常用of短语来表示。如：the window of the room, the cover of the book
名词的所有格
6. 表示有生命的名词有时也可用of短语来表示所有关系，尤其当该名词带有较长的定语时。如：the teachers of the No. 1 Middle School。
7. 双重所有格结构前的被修饰名词通常指整体中的部分或一个，双重所有格只能用于有生命的名词，这个名词是确定的。被修饰名词前有不定冠词、指示代词、疑问代词、不定代词或数词等限定词时，一般只能用双重所有格。如：an old friend of my uncle's, a daughter of Mrs. Green's, the house of one of my friends’。
名词的所有格
表材料、地点、用途、性质，泛指时间、整体等普通名词可以作定语，一般用单数形式。
stone figures(石像)，paper money(纸币)，country music(乡村音乐)，river bank(河岸)，school gate(校门口)，traffic lights(交通灯)，summer holidays(暑假)，evening dress(晚礼服)。
但在个别情况下，也有需用复数的。
sports meet(运动会)，the United States government(美国政府)，students reading room(学生阅览室)，goods train(货车)，two men doctors(两个男医生)。
名词的普通格作定语
注意以下几组名词单复数问题：
1. 物质名词一般不用复数形式，但有些物质名词要用复数形式来表示不同的类别，如：
fishes(各种鱼)，fruits(各种水果)，steels(各种钢材)。　
　2. 物质名词表示数量时，一般用表示数量的短语来表示。如：
a cup of tea, three bags of apples, four pieces of bread。
易错易混点
3. 有些抽象名词的复数形式表示不同的含义。如：
work(工作)→ works(著作)
arm(手臂)→arms(军火)
glass(玻璃)→glasses(眼镜)
cloth(布)→clothes(衣服)
4. 定冠词加上姓氏的复数形式，表示全家人或夫妇二人；姓氏的复数形式前不加冠词，则表示若干个姓××的人。如：the Smiths史密斯夫妇或史密斯一家， three Wangs 3个姓王的。
易错易混点
5. 只用作单数的复数形式的名词。如：physics, mathematics, news, the United States。
6. 有些名词形似单数，但实为复数。如：police, people, cattle。
7. 有些名词如被看作整体时就作单数用，如被看作组成该集体的各个成员时就作复数用。如：class, family, couple, audience, government, public。
易错易混点(共66张PPT)
五、注意标点符号、连词的使用及句子的平衡结构。
单项填空题解题指导
一、认真分析语境，准确理解和把握信息词。
二、注意英汉表达习惯，克服思维定势。
三、注意分析句子结构，避免主观性和随意性。
四、注意语境中的省略现象，完整理解句义。
一、认真分析语境，准确理解和把握信息词。
解题时，首先要读懂题义，然后结合信息词，认真分析语境内容，揣摩命题人的设题意图，找准突破口，结合相关知识，选出最佳答案。
1. Now that she is out of a job, Lucy ___ going back to school, but she hasn't decided yet.
A. had considered
B. has been considering
C. considered
D. is going to consider
2. ---Isn't that Ann's husband over there
---No, it ___ be him --- I'm sure he doesn't wear glasses.
A. can't B. must not
C. won't D. may not
1. Now that she is out of a job, Lucy ___ going back to school, but she hasn't decided yet.
2. ---Isn't that Ann's husband over there
---No, it ___ be him --- I'm sure he doesn't wear glasses.
二、注意英汉表达习惯，克服思维定势。
英汉两种语言在表达上存在很大的差异，平时应注意对二者进行分析、比较，而不是用汉语的习惯思维方式去认识和解决英语中的一些问题。要求我们不仅要具备牢固的基础知识，更要有应变能力。
1. Dr. Black comes from either Oxford or Cambridge. I can't remember_____. [NMET 98]
A. where B. there C. which D. that
2. ---Good morning, Grand Hotel.
---Hello, I'd like to book a room for the nights of the 18th and 19th.
---_______.
A. What can I do for you
B. Just a minute, please.
C. What's the matter
D. At your service.
三、注意分析句子结构，避免主观性和随意性。
经常会遇到这类题：原句结构或动词短语等被某些成分分隔，或处于语法上的需要使其从原结构中分离出来，从而增强了试题中选项的干扰性，加大了试题的难度。这就要求我们不仅要掌握常用句型而且要学会熟练、灵活地运用，这样才能看清试题的本来面目，不会被表面现象所迷惑。
1. The film brought the hours back to me ____ I was taken good care of in that far-away village.
A. until B. that C. when D. where
2. The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see ____ the next year.
A. carried out B. carrying out
C. carry out D. to carry out
1. The film brought the hours back to me ____ I was taken good care of in that far-away village.
2. The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see ____ the next year
see sb. / sth.
do
doing
done
四、注意分析语境中的省略现象，完整理解句义。
在语境试题中，往往根据上下文的含义故意省略一些成分，增加试题难度。在解题时，一定要弄清题意，仔细地分析句子结构，补全出省略部分，这样才能保证选出正确答案。
1. If you are planning to spend your money having fun this week, better ___ it ----you've got some big bills coming.
A. forget B. forgot
C. forgetting D. to forget
2. I don't think I'll need any money but I'll bring some ___.
A. at last B. in case
C. once again D. in time
better
Better: had better do sth.
in case: in case I need it.
五、注意标点符号、连词的使用。
此外，还要注意句子的平衡结构。
____ is reported in the newspapers, talks between the two countries are making progress.
____is reported in the newspaper that talks between the two countries are making progress.
___is reported in the newspaper is that talks between the two countries are making progress.
A. It B. As C. That D. What
B
A
D
4. He set out soon after dark __ home an hour later.
A. arriving B. to arrive
C. having arrived D. and arrived
5. The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier, ____ it more difficult.
A. not make B. not to make
C. not making D. don't make
1. ---How are the team playing
---They're playing well, but one of them __ hurt.
A. got B. gets C. are D. were
2. She can’t help_____ the house because she’s busy making a cake.
A. to clean B. cleaning C.cleaned D.being cleaned
3. ---Do you mind if I open the window
---____ I feel a bit cold.
A. Of course not. B. I'd rather you didn't.
C. Go ahead D. Why not
4.I don’t think Jim saw me; he ______ into space.
A. just stared B. was staring C.has just stared D. had just stared
5. ---I’ll travel to France this winter.
----________
A.Have a good trip B. I know
C. It’s beautiful D.You’re so lucky.
6. Luckily, we'd brought a road map without ____ we would have lost our way.
A. it B. that C. this D. which
7. He looked around and caught a man ___ his hand into the pocket of a passenger.
A. put B. to be putting C. to put D. putting
8. The shop doesn't open until 11 a.m. , ___ it loses a lot of business.
A. for B. or C. but D. so
重 基 础
Conclusion
细 分 析
巧 运 用
高中英语教学的目的：
巩固、扩大学生的基础知识，发展听、说、读、写的基本技能。培养在口头上和书面上初步运用英语进行交际的能力，侧重培养阅读理解能力。
1、能以每分钟70—80个词的速度，读懂生词率不超过3%的有关人物传记，故事，记叙文，科普小品等不同题材的文章。
高中英语对“读”的要求：
2、能读懂简单的应用文，如信件，请柬，通知，便条和标志等。
3、能运用一般的阅读技巧基本把握所读材料的中心思想，主要事实，主要逻辑线索，时间和空间顺序
4、能根据上下文理解作者的态度和观点
5、能根据已知的事实推断语篇未直接写出的意思
6、除教材内容外，课外阅读应达到20万字
影响阅读理解的几个因素：
一、词汇
⑴词汇量贫乏
⑵词义理解不准确
⑶不重视构词法
二、理解能力
⑴阅读不分文体
⑵阅读忽视关联词
⑶阅读不分主次
⑷指代、替代理解不明确
三、语法基础差
四、心理素质的问题
误区1.以为读得越慢，对文章的信息了解越多，理解程度也越高。
心理学与心理语言学表明：阅读速度与理解率几乎没有关系。即使有，正好相反：速度越快，理解率越高。
阅读速度快，有助于把握文章的主旨大意。
措施：
1.经常进行限时阅读。不仅注意准确率，更要注重速度，逐渐养成习惯。
2.强制把手或笔等物体离开读物。让大脑活动、眼睛转动和手指翻书。
3、进行意群阅读，扩大视幅。逐词阅读还会割断词与词的联系。
误区2.阅读时将文字读出声来，或在心里清晰地发出单词的音。
实验证明，默读是朗读的2倍。
过分依赖声音而非语意，将影响阅读的广度和深度。
1.阅读时紧闭双唇。
2.有意识地将阅读速度加快到超过讲话的最快速度。
措施：
误区3.对已读过的内容感到不放心或因没看懂，再次倒回去读。
倒读次数太多会影响阅读速度。
对一篇文章的理解一般情况是相对的，并不要求记住每个细节。
1.建立只读一遍就能懂的自信心。
2、首先理解文章大意。
3、阅读中目光始终从左到右移动。（除根据题目要求，有必要重读有些内容外）
措施：
误区4.平时阅读中不适当地、非常频繁地使用英汉词典。
一篇文章变得支离破碎，不利于整体把握文章的主旨大意。
阅读效率低下。
1.阅读训练时，选择在词汇和语法深度上与自己相当的材料。（生词＜＝10）
2.采用上下文分析或根据词根、前、后缀等方法猜词。
3.完成阅读训练任务后,有必要重读该文章，查生词的准确含义，并记忆。
措施：
方法一：先读短文后答题
方法二、先看问题后读短文
阅读技巧及建议
阅读的技巧
略读
跳读
标记法
猜词义
阅读理解题型设计：
A.细节理解题
B.主旨大意题
C.推理判断题
D.猜测词义题
E. 计算,识图题
F.常识题
A.细节理解题
此类题型的问题以what、who、which、when、where、how或者why等词引导，就文中某句、某段或某一具体细节进行提问并要求考生回答。
做题要领：
1.明确题意，顺藤摸瓜。
2.按照要求,寻找答案源。
3.找准关键词,明白其暗
示作用。
4.多读课文，正确使用排
除法。
B.主旨大意题
此类题型用以考查考生对文章主题或中心思想的领会和理解能力。
一类题型为主题问题。如：
What is the main idea of
this passage？
What does the passage
mainly talk about？
What does the writer want
to tell us？
另一类为标题问题。如：
Which is the best title of
this article/passage？
1.研究文章的题目及副标题 .
2.浏览全文各个段落,了解每一段大意.
3.逐段阅读文章,集中理解关键词,抓住每段的主题句,对阐述主题的句子可跳过.
4.抓住每一段的大意后,综合概括全文的中心.
5.阅读该小题的所有选项,对比分析其异同,并尝试用所选项带到文章中印证各段内容是否支持文章主题.
C.推理判断题
既要求学生透过文章表面文字信息推测文章隐含意思，又要求学生对作者的态度、意图及文章细节的发展作正确的推理判断，力求从作者的角度去考虑，不要固守自己的看法或观点。
这类试题常以如下句式发问：
1.What can you conclude from this passage？
2.What's the author's attitude towards...？
3.We can infer from the passage that…….
4.Which statement is(not) true
做题要领：
1.严格按照材料中所提供信息进行推理,千万不能掺杂自己的主观想法和观念
2.如果某选项内容是阅读材料的简单重复,那它就不是推论.
3.如果某选项所表达的内容与经验相吻合,文中没有涉及,那它属于主观臆断的结论.
4.文章中的虚拟语气和情态动词往往流露出作者的弦外之音,有住助于我们确定答案.
5.某些过渡词(however,but,on the contrary,what’s more)后面的内容往往能够反映作者的观点和态度.
D.猜测词义题
此类题型要求学生通过阅读,根据已知的信息或常识推测不熟悉的词或词组的含义,其中包含“旧词新意”和“超纲词”两种情况。
做题要领：
1.仔细阅读该词出现的上下句,作者往往对这样的词进行解释或概括归纳.
2.结合正确的方法快速而准确地猜测出生词 。
1、同义词猜义
[例1] He replied quickly. But after he considered the problem more carefully, he regretted having made such a hasty decision.
句中hasty 是生词，根据上文所提供的信息所知，hasty是形容词，与quick 同义。
[例2] The old woman had a strange habit. She kept over 100 cats in her house. Her neighbors all called her eccentric lady.
句中eccentric 是生词，根据句中所提供的信息，我们可以断定该词是形容词，与strange是同义。
2、反义词猜义
[例4] Unlike his brother, who is truly handsome man, John is quite homely.
句中unlike 是关键词。它提示了John与他的兄弟情况相反。由此可知handsome 与homely 是反义词。故homely 应是ordinary-looking的意思。
3、定义猜词
文中常用解释性词语引出生词含义，如that is, mean, stand for, namely, in other words, to be等，有时用破折号，括弧来表示，或者用同位语、定语从句的形式出现。
〔例〕 Have you ever wondered what a degree might be worth to you in your job or career
这儿or 表示job 与career 同义，所以career译为职业较妥。
〔例〕The herdsman, who looks after sheep, earns about 650 yuan a year.
句中herdsman 是生词，但后面的定语从句已对该词作了解释，考生马上就能理解它 的词义。
4、由对比关系猜词
句中常有两个意义相对比的词，只要把握其中一词，就不难推出另一词的含义，这时句中会有 unlike, although, but, while 等信息词。考生可以凭借信息词进行推测词义。
〔例〕One idea about business is that it can be treated as a game of perfect information. Quite the reverse, business, politics, life itself are games which we must normally play with very imperfect information.
由前句中perfect information 到后面imperfect information 这一组对比关系的词，我们不难推断“Quite the reverse”应表示“对比、相反”的意思。
5、由因果关系猜词义
上下文中有连词because, as, since, so, therefore, so…that, such…that 连接，由已知的“原因”推出“结果”，反之亦然。
〔例〕The biggest power failure happened yesterday. All of our ice cream and frozen foods melted.
考生可以从停电的原因上猜出冰淇淋、冷冻食品化冰的必然结果，因此“melted”是“溶化”之意。
6、由上下文情景关系猜词义
试题中，还有一些要求考生用上下文提供的情景和线索猜测词义的题目。
〔例〕What did Cory Luxmoore mean when he said “I’m on high”
A. I’m rich. B. I’m famous. C. I’m excited. D. Lucky
此题要求考生根据语篇情境猜测词语的意义。考生从文中可以看出 Cory Luxmoore 丢失日记后，深感难过，后来日记失而复得，他对记者说“It’s wonderful, I’m on high.”。
由此可以推断出“I’m on high”应是“快乐，激动”的意思。
7、由构词法来猜测词义
在阅读过程中，考生还会碰到一些熟词的派生词和合成词，这就要看考生词汇功底是否扎实。如果考生平时注意词缀的用法，有意识地进行归纳记忆，考试时就会驾轻就熟，排除拦路虎，顺利抓住文章大意。
高考英语阅读E篇，仅recycle一词，下文就出现了4个派生词：recyclables, unrecyclables, nonrecyclables, recycled。分别译为“可回收利用的材料”，“不可回收利用的材料”，“无法回收利用的材料”，“被回收利用的材料”。
利用构词法知识猜测词义，关键应在理解词根的基础上，掌握前后缀规律，如re-,non-,un-, im-, in-, dis- 等前缀和-able, -an, -ive,-ist, -ise, -ty, -ness, -less 等，要懂得这些词缀与词干结合起来可组成新的单词，即派生词。
8、利用熟词的新词性来抽象词义
When men and women lived by hunting 50,000 years ago, how could they even begin to picture modern life
When men and women lived by hunting 50,000 years ago, how could they even begin to picture modern life
9.通过同类关系推测词义
I like many musical instruments such as piano, violin and guitar.
同类关系常由such as, like, for example, for instance等词列举同类词汇。
猜词是应用英语的重要能力， 它不但需要运用前面提到的一些技巧准确无误地理解上下文，而且要有较大的阅读量， 掌握或认识比较多的课外词汇。 这就需要平时长期不懈的努力，仅靠考前突击是不能解决问题的， 应养成良好的阅读习惯，尽可能扩大词汇量， 注意积累，这样才能在考试中应付自如，考出水平。
E.计算、识图题
此类题型用以考查考生计算、识图能力。要求学生利用已知的数字信息运算得出相应数据。根据文中叙述对所提供图表进行理解并选择。解图形辨认题时必须弄清图表中各部分之间的关系，然后对照短文中所描述的细节有针对性的进行选择。
〔例〕Santa Fe was founded in 1609 by the Spanish（西班牙人）in an old Indian village。 In 1680， the Indians seized the place but only held it for twelve years before the Spanish retook it。The city remained under Spanish rule until Mexico won its independence in 1821。From then on it was a Mexico city until 1864when it was taken over by U.S.troops.
1.Santa Fe was under the rule of the Mexican in_______.
A.1675 B.1695 C.1816 D.1833
2.The people who held Santa Fe for the longest period in history were the _____.
A.Spanish B.Indian C.Mexicans
D.Americans
Spanish Indians Mexico USA
1609---1680
1692---1821 1680---1692 1821--1846 1846---now
71+129=200years 12years 25years About 150years
F.经验常识题
此类题主要是考查中学生应有的多项综合知识，包括：社会知识、天文知识、史地知识、科普知识及对生活常识的主观掌握程度。
此类题往往与文章没有直接关系，学生只能凭自己的常识进行判断，然后做出正确、符合这些规律的选择。
做题要领：
阅读理解“四要”
Ⅰ
Ⅱ
一、要扩大词汇量,促进阅读.
二、要严格训练阅读速度
⑴克服不良的阅读习惯
⑵限时阅读训练
⑶寻找主题句 ，理解重点把握全文。
题
型
三、要培养词义推断能力
四、要把握好长难句
1.结构分析理解法
第一步,判断句子是简单句、并列句还是复合句
第二步，找出句子的核心或成分即主语和谓语，然后再分清句子的一些附属成分
When a rather dirty 、poorly dressed person kneels at your feet and puts out his hands to beg for a few coins ，do you hurry on，not knowing what to do， or do you feel sad and hurriedly hand over some money？
2.意群阅读法
When two cars traveling at 30kmph hit each other(1), an unbelted driver (2)would meet the windscreen(3),with a force equal to diving head first into the ground from a height of 10 meters(4).
总之，阅读理解既是平常学习的重点，也是考试的难点，要应试好这类题型，必须靠长期不懈的努力，仅靠一朝一夕的学习是不能解决问题的。因此，考生在平常的学习中必须树立长远的训练目标，养成良好的阅读习惯，尽可能地扩大自己的词汇量，如：常看英文书报，翻阅字典，广泛阅读，加强英语知识和背景知识的积累，同时注意努力提高对短文的整篇理解感悟能力，只有这样才能在高考中应付自如，考出高分，考出水平。(共16张PPT)
冠词
1. Experts think that ______ recently discovered painting may be ______ Picasso. (2011浙江卷)
A. the; 不填 B. a; the
C. a; 不填 D. the; a　
【答案及解析】1. D　考查冠词在语境中的用法。句意为“专家认为，最近发现的油画可能是毕加索的作品。”the painting特指最近发现的油画；a Picasso意为a Picasso's painting，泛指毕加索的一件作品，有one的含义。
2. Many lifestyle patterns do such ______ great harm to health that they actually speed up ______ weakening of the human body. (2010浙江卷)
A. a; / B. /; the
C. a; the D. /; /
【答案及解析】2. B　句意：许多生活方式对人类的健康有害，他们加速了人类身体的衰退。“对……有害”是固定短语“do harm to”，名词前无冠词；之后的weakening是动词加 ing形式，是一个抽象名词，当表达一种概念、状况时需要加上the。
3. I don't understand what the engineer means, but I've got ______ rough idea of ______ project plan. (2009浙江卷)
A. the; a B. 不填； the
C. the; 不填 D. a; the
【答案及解析】3. D　句意：我不明白那个工程师的意思，但我已大致了解了这个项目的计划。have a rough idea是固定词组，意为“大致了解”，而plan在本句中表示特指，故用定冠词the。
1. 表示上文提到过的人或事物。如：
I have bought a book. The book is very useful.
2. 用于说话人与听话人心中都有数的人或事物。如：
Close the window, please. 　　
3. 用于表示世界上独一无二的事物之前。如：
the sun, the moon, the earth, the world等。
4. 用于表示方位的名词之前。如：
the east, the right
5. 用于序数词或形容词的最高级之前。如：
the first, the tallest
定冠词的基本用法
6. 用于形容词之前，使其名词化。如：
the sick, the wounded
7. 用于由普通名词构成的专有名词之前。如：
the United States, the United Nations
8. 用于江河、海洋、海峡、山脉、群岛、建筑物等名词之前。如：
the Changjiang River, the East Lake
9. 用于复数姓氏之前，表示“夫妇”或“全家”。如：
the Smiths
定冠词的基本用法
10. 用于西洋乐器名词前。如：
play the piano, play the violin
11. 用于发明物前。如：
The compass was invented in China.
12. 用于年代名词前。如：
He lived in the countryside in the 1970s.
13. 用于固定词组中。如：
in the morning (afternoon, evening), on the other hand, at the same time
定冠词的基本用法
1. 泛指一个。如：
There is a book on the table.
2. 指人或事物的某一种类。如：
His father is a driver.
3. 指某一个人或事物，但不具体说明。如：
My sister was saved by a PLA man in the fire.
4. 用于某一些表示重量、长度、时间等单位前，表示“每一”。如：
We have meals three times a day.
不定冠词的基本用法
5. 表示同样的。如：
They are of an age.
6. 表数量，相当于one，但语意较弱。如：
There is a pen and two books on the desk.
7. 使抽象名词具体化。如：
The little girl is a help to her mother.
8. 固定搭配。如：
as a matter of fact, in a hurry
不定冠词的基本用法
1. 表示总称的复数名词之前。如：
Children love cartoons.
2. 不含普通名词的专有名词前。如：
We are studying English.
3. 名词前有指示代词、物主代词、不定代词或名词所有格修饰时。如：
I like this picture.
I do not have any money.
As time went on, Einstein's theory proved to be correct.
不用冠词的情况：
4. 季节、月份、星期等名词前，一般不用冠词。如：
She likes spring most.
5. 称呼语前不用冠词。如：
What shall I do next, Mother
6. 三餐饭前不用冠词。如：
What did you have for lunch
7. 节假日前不用冠词。如：
People give gifts to each other on Christmas Day.
不用冠词的情况：
8. 球类和棋类运动的名称前不用冠词。如：
She is fond of playing basketball.
9. 在一些成对出现的短语中不用冠词。如：
arm in arm(手挽手); hand in hand(手牵手);
side by side(肩并肩); day and day(日日夜夜)；
young and old(老老少少);
from door to door(挨门挨户);
from beginning to end(从头到尾);
from morning till night(从早到晚)等。
不用冠词的情况：
1. 抽象名词具体化时，被具体化的名词可能会与a/an连用。如：
a heavy rain一场大雨
a surprise一件怪事
a pleasure一件乐事
a success / failure一个成功的或失败的人，一件成功的或失败的事
易错易混点
2. 形容词比较级前用the表示“两者中较……的”，而形容词比较级前用a/an则表示“再/更……”。 形容词最高级前用the表示“三者或三者以上中最……的”， 而形容词最高级前用a/an时无比较含义。如：
Which is the_larger country, Canada or Australia
If there were no exams, we should have a_much_happier_time at school.
It is a_most_useful book. ( a very useful book)
He is the_most_diligent_student in this class.
易错易混点
3. “the ＋序数词”表示排序， “a/an ＋序数词”则表示“再一、又一”之意。序数词修饰动词事实上已成为副词，这时要用零冠词。如：
Can you give me a_second_chance,_please？(another chance)
He was only 5 years old when I first saw him.
4. 表示世界上独一无二的事物时一般用the修饰，但如果此类名词已有修饰成分，也可能加a/an。如：all over the_world,_ a peaceful world。
易错易混点
5. “零冠词 ＋ 单数名词＋ as/though ＋ 主语＋谓语”， 意为“虽然/尽管……但是……”。考生易犯带上冠词的错误。如：
Hero as he is, he has some shortcomings.
Young man as he is, he has seen much of the world.
6. 牢记高考中常见的纯不可数名词，它们是：weather, fun, space, advice, word(置于句首相当于news), progress, information, news。以上这些词不能与不定冠词连用。如：
Beyond the stars, the astronaut saw nothing but space.
易错易混点(共27张PPT)
第 9 讲 情态动词与虚拟语气
1. — How's your new babysitter
— We ______ask for a better one. All our kids love her so much. (2011浙江卷)
A. should B. might
C. mustn't D. couldn't 　
【答案及解析】1. D　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“——你的新保姆怎么样？”“——找不到更好的了。我们的孩子们都很喜欢她。”should应该；might可能，可以；mustn't禁止；couldn't不可能。
2. Had I known about this computer program, a huge amount of time and energy ______.(2010浙江卷)
A. would have been saved B. had been saved
C. will be saved D. was saved　
【答案及解析】2. A　考查虚拟语气。根据句子的倒装特征判断此处是省略了if的虚拟语气，原形是：If I had known about this computer program, a huge amount of time and energy ______. 句意为：如果我早知道这个电脑程序，就可以节省大量的时间和精力了。
　3. “You ______ have a wrong number，” she said. “There's no one of that name here.”(2010浙江卷)
A. need B. can
C. must D. would
【答案及解析】3. C　考查情态动词。情态动词如果表示非常肯定的推测要用must。句意为：“你肯定打错电话了，”她说，“我们这里没有一个叫那个名字的人。”
　4. The doctor recommended that you ______ swim after eating a large meal.(2009浙江卷)
A. wouldn't B. couldn't
C. needn't D. shouldn't
【答案及解析】4. D　考查虚拟语气。根据句子中的recommended(推荐)可知，从句应用“should ＋ 动词原形” 表示虚拟，且此句为否定句。
1. 情态动词不能独立作谓语，其后接动词原形。
2. 情态动词没有人称和数的变化。
3. 情态动词一般没有时态的变化。
4. 情态动词接动词原形表描述现在或将来发生的动作或状态(modal verb＋ be / do, modal verb ＋ be doing)，情态动词接动词不定式的完成式表描述过去发生的动作或状态(modal verb ＋ have done)。
情态动词的基本用法
情态动词
1. can, could
(1)表能力(＝be able to)。
(2)表许可＝may。
(3)表客气的请求，could比can更委婉。
(4)表推测，仅用于否定句和问句。
(5)(表示可能、许可)能够……；可以……
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(6)can't / couldn't ＋v. ＋ too ＋adj. / adv. 再怎么……也不过分
can't / couldn't but＋v. 只好，不得不
can't help doing禁不住做……
can't help but do不能帮助做……
2. may, might
(1)表允许，许可＝can。
You may go home now, Susan.
苏珊，你现在可以回家了。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(2)表可能性，may比might可能性更大。
(3)may / might as well ＋ v. 还是……好
You may as well wait till Tuesday and go on a fast train.
你还是等到星期二乘快车走为好。
(4)表祝愿，祈求。
May you succeed！祝你成功！
(5)(用于让步状语从句中)即使；无论。
Whatever he may say，I don't believe him.
无论他说什么，我都不相信他的话。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
3. must
(1)(表示义务、必要性、命令)必须，得，要。
You must do as you are told.
你必须按照吩咐去做。
(2)表强烈的劝告。
(3)表把握性很大的推测。
(4)must not表禁止，不允许。
Cars mustn't be parked here.
此处禁止停车。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(5)must的一般疑问句的否定回答用needn't或don't have to。
(6)(表固执，不满等)偏偏，硬要，偏要表示与说话人愿望相反及不耐烦。
Our three year old boy must do the opposite to what we ordered.
我们3岁的儿子很固执，要他向东，他偏向西。
(7)(表必然性)必定。
Everyone must die.
每个人都必定会死。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
4. shall
(1)用于第一、三人称表征求意见，请求指示。
Shall she go to the concert with us this evening
今晚请她和我们一起去看演唱会吗？
(2)用于第二、三人称， 表示说话人的命令、强制、允诺、威胁或决心等， 多见于法律条文等文件中。
Don't worry。You shall get the answer this very afternoon. (允诺)
He shall be sorry one day. I tell you.
我告诉你，他早晚有一天会后悔的。(警告)
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
5. should
(1)(表惊讶、遗憾)竟然；居然。
It's a pity that he should resign.
可惜他竟然辞职了。
(2)(用于条件状语从句中)一旦；万一。
Should you change your mind, let us know. (＝If you should change your mind，…)
你一旦改变主意，就通知我们。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(3)(用于表示命令、建议、请求的动词后面的that从句中，且should可省略)应该；必须。
I suggested that he (should) change his mind.
我建议他改变主意。
6. will /would
(1)表请求，would用疑问句多与you连用比will更委婉，客气。
(2)表习惯性或反复性的动作，will指现在，would指过去的习惯＝used to。
(3)表意愿或固执坚持，事情作主语表固有的性质。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
1. 情态动词表推测：
对肯定情况的推测：
must be /do(现在或将来)must be doing(说话时正在进行)must have p．p. (已发生的或状态)
对否定情况的推测：
can /could not be /do(现在或将来)
can't /couldn't be doing(正在发生的动作)
can /could not have p．p. (过去的动作或状态)——把握性很大
情态动词的特殊用法
情态动词
may be/do(现在或将来)may be doing(说话时正在发生动作)
may have p．p. (已发生的动作或状态)
may not be/do(现在或将来)
may not be doing(说话时正在发生动作)
may not have p．p. (过去已发生的动作或状态)——把握性其次
might be/do(现在或将来)
might be doing(说话时正在发生动作)
情态动词的特殊用法
情态动词
might have p．p. (过去的动作或状态)
might not be/do(现在或将来)
might not be doing(说话时正在发生动作)
might not have p．p. (过去的动作或状态)—把握性不大
情态动词的特殊用法
情态动词
2. 情态动词的完成式：
(1) could have done 本来能够做而实际上未做
(2) might have done 本来可以做而实际上未做
(3) should / ought to have done 本来应该做而实际上未做
(4) ought not to have done /shouldn't have done 本来不应该做而实际上做了
(5) needn't have done 本来不必要做而实际上做了
情态动词的特殊用法
情态动词
if 虚拟条件句的形式
虚拟语气
if 虚拟条件句的形式
虚拟语气
注意：有时条件从句中的动作和主句中的动作发生的时间不一致(表示错综时间的虚拟语气)，这时动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间加以调整。如：
If you had_listened_to the doctor, you would_be_all right now.
如果你当初听了医生的话，身体现在就好了。(从句动作指过去，主句动作指现在)
1. 省略连词if，将were, had或should提至主语前。如：
Were I you (If I were you), I would not do it.
我要是你，就不做这事。
2. 用介词短语代替条件状语从句。如：
Without_air,_there would be no living things.
如果没有空气的话，就不会有生物了。
But_for_your_help，I couldn't have done it.
要是没有你的帮助，我就不可能完成这件事。
if 虚拟条件句的转化
虚拟语气
3. 假设的情况有时可以通过上下文或其他方式表现出来。如：
I was busy that day. Otherwise I would have gone there with them.
我那天很忙，否则，我就和他们一起去那儿了。(如果我那天不忙的话，我就……)
I would_have_finished the work, but I have been ill.
我本来该完成这项工作的，但我生病了。(如果我没生病的话，我就会完成……)　　
if 虚拟条件句的转化
虚拟语气
　4. 省去条件从句成主句。如：
You could have washed your clothes yourself.
你本可以自己洗衣服的。
If my grandmother were with me!
如果我的祖母与我在一起多好啊！
if 虚拟条件句的转化
虚拟语气
1. can可以作“有时候会……”解，意思是平时或大部分时间不是这样子，只是偶尔发生的事情。如：
The climates of East China can_be pretty cold in winter. 华东地区冬天的气候有时会相当冷。
2. 在“It is important (strange，natural，necessary)that…”这类句型里，that所引导的主语从句中的谓语动词常用 “should＋动词原形”结构，表示某事是“重要”、“奇怪”、“自然”、“必要”等意义。如：
It is important that every member (should)_inform himself of these rules.
重要的是每个成员知道这些规则。
易错易混点
3. 在动词wish后的宾语从句中：
(1)表示对现在情况的虚拟：从句动词用过去式或过去进行式(be动词一般用were)。如：
I wish I knew the answer to the question.
我希望知道这个问题的答案。(可惜不知道)
(2)表示对过去情况的虚拟：从句动词常用“had＋过去分词”。如：
I wish (wished) I hadn't_spent so much money.
我后悔不该花那么多钱。
易错易混点
(3)表示对将来的主观愿望：谓语动词形式为“would＋动词原形”。如：
I wish it would_stop raining.
但愿雨能停止。
4. 在suggest，demand，order，propose，insist，command，request，desire等动词后的宾语从句中，谓语动词用“should ＋ 动词原形”，表示建议、要求、命令等。如：
I demand that he (should)_answer me immediately.
我要求他立刻答复我。
易错易混点
5. 在“It is time (that)…”句型中，定语从句的谓语动词常用虚拟语气表示将来，动词形式一般用过去式，意思是“是该干某事的时候了”。如：
It's (high) time we did our homework.
是我们该做作业的时候了。
6. if only 要是……就好了。相当于I wish…(与wish 后的虚拟语气类似)，如：
If only you hadn't_told him the news.
易错易混点(共72张PPT)
第十二讲 状语从句
1．状语从句的引导词与介词的用法比较；状语从句与定语从句引导词的辨析。
2．能够辨别同类状语从句中近似连接词的用法差异。
3．whatever，whenever，wherever等引导词与no matter wh 等引导词的不同用法。
2011年高考对条件状语从句的考查稳中有升。2012年考查的重点仍然是考生容易混淆的近似连词的用法，试题的结构将越来越复杂，设问的角度将越来越多样化。
1．when, while, as的区别
这三个词都可以用作连接词，表示时间关系，但有所区别。
(1)when表示时间关系时，意思常常是“当(在)……的时候”。主句和从句中的动作或事情可以同时发生，也可以先后发生。例如：
When we were at school, we went to the library every day.
I’ll go when I have had my dinner.
The film had begun when we arrived at the cinema.
注意：when有哪些通常所在的句型？
(2)while 用作连接词表示时间关系时，意思也是“当(在)……的时候”，主句中的动作或事情在从句中的动作或事情的进展过程中发生。它有时可与when通用，但它只能指一段时间(a period of time)，而不能指一点时间的(a point of time)。如上面第一个例句中的when，可以用while代替；而第二个例句中的when，就不能用while代替。例如：
Please don’t talk so aloud while others are working.
While I am washing the floor, you can be cleaning the windows.
While也可表对比。
I like reading while he prefers listening to music.
谚语：Strike the iron while it is hot.
(3)as用作连接词表示时间关系时，意思也是“当(在)……时候”，往往可与when或while通用，但它着重指主句和从句中的动作或事情相并发生。例如：
I saw him as he was getting off the bus.
As he walked on, he felt himself getting more and more tired.
As time passes by, we grow older and learn more.
As industry develops,more and more farmland has been taken up.
2．一些表示时间的名词短语也可用来引导时间状语从句
the minute, the moment, the instant, every time, the last time, every time。如：
The first time I got to the island, I was amazed by its beauty.
The moment I entered the room, I smelled something unusual.
Every time I visit him, he is always reading.
3．directly和immediately也可作为连词，引导时间状语从句，意为“一……就……”，相当于the moment/the instant和as soon as。如：
I knew something was wrong directly I arrived.
The boys did all sorts of mischief immediately my back was turned.
4．before 和after
before 引导的从句的动作通常发生在主句动作之后，如果从句是过去时，主句一般要用过去完成时或一般过去时。after引导的从句动作通常发生在主句动作之前，如果主句要用过去时，从句则要用过去完成时或一般过去时。例如：
The plane had taken off before he arrived at the airport.
After he had lived in the south for nearly 20 years, he decided to go to seek his fortune in the north.
They arrived at the cinema after the film began.
5．no sooner...than 和hardly (scarcely)．.. when
这两个连词词组都是表示主句与从句动作随即发生，意为“一……就……”。主句动词用过去完成时。如果no sooner, hardly 或scarcely位于句首，主句要倒装。例如：
No sooner had he entered the house than it began to rain.
He had hardly gone to bed when the telephone rang.
6．till 和until
这两个词的用法十分近似，都表示“直到……”，但在句首只能用until。在肯定句中，主句要用延续性动词；在否定句中，主句要用非延续性动词，这时until和before同义。例如：
They did not go home until they had finished the work.
They stayed there…………………………………….
7. It 与before, since, when引导的时间状语从句连用时的区别：
(1)It is/has been＋时间段＋since ... 自从……以来已有多长时间了。
(2)It is/was＋时间点＋when ... when 引导的是一个时间状语从句，主句中的 it 指时间，表语由具体的时间充当。常译为“当……的时候，是……”。
(3)It be ＋时间段＋ before ... it 指时间， 主句中的时态常是一般将来时或过去时两种时态．主句中的表语多是long, not long , 3 days , 2 weeks 等表示时间段的词或短语。常译为“……之后……”。例如：
How long is it since we met last time
It was a lready midnight when I got home.
It was not long before she got married and moved to Japan.
1．(2011·福建)It was April 29, 2011________Prince William and Kate Middleton walked into the palace hall of the wedding ceremony.
A．that　　　　　　　B．when
C．since D．before
解析　 考查when引导的时间状语从句。句意“2011年4月29日，威廉王子与凯特·米德尔顿步入了婚姻的殿堂。”
答案　B
2．(2011·上海) If a lot of people say a film is not good, I won’t bother to see it, or I’ll wait________it comes out on DVD.
A. whether B. after
C. though D. until
解析　 考查时间状语从句。until与wait等延续性动词的肯定形式连用。
答案　D
3．(2011·江西)Please call my secretary to arrange a meeting this afternoon, or________it is convenient to you.
A. whenever B. however
C. whichever D. wherever
解析　 考查从句连接词。whenever无论何时，however然而 whichever任何一个，wherever 无论哪里。请打电话给我的秘书安排今天下午的会议，或者在任何你方便的时候。关系副词在后句中充当状语，根据语境可知是指时间，选A。
答案　A
4．(2011·辽宁)He had no sooner finished his speech________the students started cheering.
A. since B. as
C. when D. than
解析　 考查状语从句。no sooner...than...为固定搭配。
答案　D
5．(2011·四川)As it reported, it is 100 years________Qinghua University was founded.
A. when B. before
C. after D. since
解析　 考查固定句型。It＋ is/was＋时间段＋since＋从句，表示“自从……以来已经有多长时间了”。
答案　D
1．(2010·重庆)Today，we will begin ________we stopped yesterday so that no point will be left out.
A．when　　　　　　　　B．where
C．how D．what
解析　 考查状语从句。where在此处引导地点状语从句。
答案　B
2．(2009·江苏)________unemployment and crime are high，it can be assumed that the latter is due to the former.
A．Before B．Where
C．Unless D．Until
解析　 考查状语从句。where引导地点状语从句，表示凡是失业率与犯罪率高的地方，犯罪都是由失业引起的。
答案　B
3．(2009·山东)The little girl who got lost decided to remain________she was and wait for her mother.
A．where B．what
C．how D．who
解析　 考查状语从句。句意：这个迷路的小女孩决定待在原地等她妈妈。故应选择where来引导地点状语从句，答案为A。
答案　A
地点状语从句表示在主句中某一动作或状态发生的地点或进行的方向，这类从句通常由where, wherever或 everywhere引导，可以放在主句前，也可以放在主句后，wherever的语气比where语气更强烈。where指“在某个地方”，wherever指“在任何一个地方”，everywhere指“每一……地方”。例如：
Bamboo grows well where it has plenty of rain.
Sit wherever you like.
Make a mark where you have a question.
Where there is a will，there is a way.
1. (2011·山东) He had his camera ready________he saw something that would make a good picture.
A. even if　　　　　　　　B. if only
C. in case D. so that
解析　 考查状语从句引导词。句意“他准备好了相机以防看到可以拍摄的景物。”in case 为“以防；以免”；even if为“即使”；if only 为“如果……就好了”；so that “为了，以便”。
答案　C
2. (2010·全国卷Ⅰ)The little boy won’t go to sleep________his mother tells him a story.
A．or B．unless
C．but D．whether
解析　 考查连词。根据句意“除非妈妈给他讲一个故事，否则这小男孩是不会入睡的。”可知unless符合句意。or否则，不然的话；but但是；whether是否。
答案　B
3．(2010·山东)The school rules state that no child shall be allowed out of the school during the day，________accompanied by an adult.
A．once B．when
C．if D．unless
解析　 考查连词。句意：学校规则规定：除非有大人的陪伴，否则任何孩子白天都不允许外出学校。
答案　D
4．(2010·江西)—Our holiday cost a lot of money.
—Did it Well，that doesn’t matter________you enjoyed yourselves.
A．as long as B．unless
C．as soon as D．though
解析　 考查连词辨析。由对话语境可知，空格后的一句是空格前一句的前提条件。故A项意思相符。as long as只要。
答案　A
5．(2010·北京) ________they decide which college to go to，students should research the admission procedures.
A．As B．While
C．Until D．Once
解析　 此题考查状语从句连词。once“一旦……”。句意：学生一旦决定上哪个大学，他们就应该了解一下入学手续。
答案　D
条件状语从句表示主句中某一动作或状态是在什么情况或条件下发生的。
1．if 和unless
if 表示正面的条件，意为“如果”，unless表示反向的条件，意为“除非，如果不”。例如：
If you’ve got exams tomorrow, why aren’t you studying？
The sports meet will begin tomorrow unless it rains.
【专家提醒】　条件状语从句中常用一般时表示将要发生的动作。
2. providing, provided (that), supposing, suppose (that), as long as, so long as, on condition that 和in case
这些连词(词组)意思相近，有“如果，只要，假如，假使，在……条件下”等意思。例如：
All living things respire as long as they live.
Supposing (that) you fail a second time, don’t get disappointed, but try again.
On condition that the liquid is cooled still further, it will turn to a solid.
3．only if和if only
only if 引导的从句用陈述语气，意为“只要”； if only引导的从句要用虚拟语气，意为“但愿……”，“要是……就好了”。例如：
only if you have persistence, can you achieve great success.
If only I had wings, I would be able to travel around the world easily.
1．(2011·北京)________volleyball is her main focus, she’s also great at basketball.
A. Since　　　　　　　B. Once
C. Unless D. While
解析　 句意为：虽然排球是她的主要项目，但她还擅长篮球。while“虽然，尽管”。since“自从”；once“一旦”；unless“除非”均不合题意。
答案　D
2．(2011·四川)Frank insisted that he was not asleep________I had great difficulty in waking him up.
A. whether B. although
C. for D. so
解析　 考查从属连词。although作为连词引导让步状语从句。句意为：尽管我很难叫醒他，但弗兰克却坚持说自己没有睡觉。前后句子表达“虽然……但是……”的转折语气，故选B项。whether作为连词可接名词性从句表示“是否”的意思，接让步状语从句表示“不管， 无论”，与题意不符；for作为连词引导原因状语从句；so作为连词引导结果状语从句；均不合题意。
答案　B
3．(2011·辽宁)No matter how ________， it is not necessarily lifeless.
A. a desert may be dry B. dry a desert may be
C. may a desert be dry D. dry may a desert be
解析　 考查状语从句。No matter how引导让步状语从句，用陈述语序。
答案　B
4．(2010·安徽)The engineers are so busy that they have zero time for outdoor sports activities，________they have the interest.
A．wherever B．whenever
C．even if D．as if
解析　 考查连词的用法。根据语境可知，“他们有这种兴趣”和“他们没有时间”之间为转折关系。故用even if“即使”引导让步状语从句。
答案　C
5．(2011·重庆)To show our respect, we usually have to take our gloves off________we are to shake hands with.
A．whichever B．whenever
C．whoever D．wherever
解析　 考查状语从句的连词。whoever引导让步状语从句，相当于no matter who。
答案　C
1．让步状语从句可由although，though，as，while，even if(though)，whatever，whether...or...，no matter who (when，what...)等引导。
Although/Though she works very hard，(yet) she makes very slow progress.尽管她学习很努力，但还是进步不快。
Whenever I’m unhappy(＝No matter when I’m unhappy)，it is my friend who cheers me up.
不管什么时候我不高兴，总是我的朋友给我鼓励。
【专家提醒】
(1)however引导让步状语从句时，与它所修饰的词一起放在句首。
(2)英语不允许在though 或although从句后同时用but。如果要强调前后两个部分的对比意义，可以在主句前加上yet或still。
2．as引导的让步状语从句的常见的几种倒装方式
(1)如果从句的谓语部分为“不及物动词＋副词”时，常将从句中的副词提到从句的句首。
Hard as you may try，you will not succeed.
尽管你努力了，你可能不会成功。
(2)如果从句的谓语部分为“情态动词＋不及物动词”，常将这个不及物动词提到从句的句首。
Wait as you may，he will not see you.
尽管你等了，他可能不会见你。
(3)如果从句的谓语部分是“系动词＋单数名词”，则常将这个作表语的名词提前，但这个名词前面的不定冠词要省略。
Child as he is，he can tell right from wrong.
尽管他还是个孩子，他能明辨是非。
3．while作“尽管”讲引导让步状语从句时往往放在句首
While I understand your viewpoint，I don’t agree with you.
尽管我明白你的观点，我不赞成你。
1．(2011·湖南)Jack wasn’t saying anything, but the teacher smiled at him________he had done something very clever.
A .as if　　　　　　　　　B. in case
C. while D. though
解析　 考查状语从句的用法。根据句意，空格处需要填入“好像，仿佛”。故选A。
答案　A
2．(2009·天津)I travel to the Binhai New Area by light railway every day，________do many businessmen who live in downtown Tianjin.
A．as B．which
C．when D．though
解析　 句意：我像许多住在天津闹市区的商人一样，每天乘坐轻轨到滨海新区上班。as引导方式状语从句时意为“正如，就像……一样”。
答案　A
1．as 和just as
二者都表示“如……；犹如……，正如……”。just as 比as强调的语气更强。例如：
In the early days, people could not count as we do now.
在早期日子中，人们不和我们现在一样能计数。
Most plants need sunlight just as they need water.
大部植物像它们需要水一样，也需要阳光。
2．as if 和as though
as if 或as though从句可以用陈述语气，表示可能符合事实的情况；也可以用虚拟语气，表示不符合事实或与事实相反的情况，意为“好像，仿佛”。例如：
It looks as though it is going to rain.
天看起来要下雨。
He spoke as if he were a philosopher.
他说话就像是一位哲学家。(从句动词与主语谓语同时发生，从句谓语要用一般过去时)
He speaks as if he had been to the moon.
他谈起话来就好像是去过月球。(从句动作发生在主句谓语之前，从句谓语要用过去完成时)
He speaks as if he would fly to the moon.
他谈起话来就好像是要飞往月球。(从句动词发生在主句谓语之后，从句谓语要用would/could/might＋do)
1．“ May I go and play with Dick this afternoon, Mum？”“ No, you can’t go out________your work is being done.”
A. before B. until
C. as D. the moment
【易误分析】　容易误选B，误认为这是考查 not...until...结构。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。句中的 your work is being done 表明“你正在做作业”，选 as 表原因。
2. “I’m going to the post office.” “________you’re there, can you get me some stamps？”
A. As B. While
C. Because D. If
【易误分析】　容易误选A。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 B。尽管 as 和 while 均可用作从属连词引导时间状语从句，表示“当……的时候”，但两者有一个重要区别，就是这样用的 as 从句的谓语不能是状态动词。当然，如果 as 不是表示“当……的时候”，其谓语是完全可以用状态动词的。如：
I went to bed early, as I was exhausted. 我很累了，所以很早就上床睡了。(此句中的 as 表示原因，意为“因为”、“由于”)
3. After the war, a new school building was put up________there had once been a theatre.
A. that B. when
C. which D. where
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 D。where 在此引导地点状语从句，其意为“(在)……的地方”。
4. The visitor asked to have his picture taken________ stood the famous tower.
A. that B. at which
C. when D. where
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 D。此题与上面一题有些相似，但又有所不同：相似的是，where 均表示“在……的地方”，均用以引导地点状语从句；不同的是，此题还涉及倒装，即此句的主语是 the famous tower，谓语是 stood，正常语序为 where the famous tower stood，使用倒装是为了保持句子平衡，避免头重脚轻。
5. They kept trying________they must have known it was hopeless.
A. if B. because
C. when D. where
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。when 在此的意思不是“当……的时候”，而是“尽管”、“虽然”的意思。又如：
He walks when he might take a taxi. 尽管他可以坐出租车，但他却走路。
He stopped trying when he might have succeeded next time. 尽管他本来下次就可以成功的了，但他却停止努力了。
The boy was restless when he should have listened to the teacher carefully. 这男孩子本来应该专心听老师讲的，但他却坐立不安。
有许多同学只知道 when 表示“当……的时候”，而不知道它还有其他许多意思，除上面提到的表示“尽管”、“虽然”外，when 还可表示“既然”、“考虑到”。请做下面的试题(答案选D)：
Why do you want a new job________you’ve got such a good one already
A. that B. where
C. which D. when
6. He was about to tell me the secret________someone patted him on the shoulder.
A. as B. until
C. when D. while
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。when 意为“这时(突然)”，主要用于某一动作突然发生于另一动作正在进行或刚要发生之时。此时的 when 可以连用副词 suddenly，也可以不连用它，但值得注意的是，同学们不能单独用 suddenly 来代替 when。
7. The fire went on for quite some time________it was brought under control.
A. when B. since
C. after D. before
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 D。before 意为“在……之前”，句意是“大火在得到控制之前燃烧了相当一段时间”。
8. Mother asked me to take more money________something unexpected should happen.
A. in case B. so that
C. in order that D. when
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 A。in case 起连词作用，用以引导状语从句，主要有两种意思：一是表示条件，意为“如果”、“万一”；二是表示“目的”，意为“以防”、“免得”。
9.________your composition carefully, some spelling mistakes can be avoided.
A. Having checked B. Check
C. If you check D. To check
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选，尤其可能误选A。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。前面一个分句为条件状语从句，后面一个分句为主语。现分析几个干扰项：选项 A 和 D 均为非谓语动词，根据英语语法习惯，非谓语动词作状语时，其逻辑主语应与句子主语一致，而此句的 some spelling mistakes 显然不能用作 having checked 或 to check 的逻辑主语，故不能选为答案；若选 B，则两个句子之间缺少必要的连词，也不对。
10. “When did he leave the classroom？” “He left________you turned back to write on the blackboard.”
A. the time B. the moment
C. until D. since
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 B。the moment 用作连词，意为“一……就……”，相当于 as soon as。类似地，the minute, the instant 也可用作连词，表示“一……就……”的意思。
1．—Did you return Fred’s call
—I didn’t need to________I’ll see him tomorrow.
A. though　　　　　　　 B. unless
C. when D. because
解析　 句意是：“你给Fred回电话了没有？”“我没有回电话，因为我明天就会见到他。”所以要用 because引导原因状语从句。
答案　D
2．________well prepared you are, you still need a lot of luck in mountain climbing.
A. However B. Whatever
C. No matter D. Although
解析　 句意是：不管你准备得有多么好，你在爬山运动中仍需要很大的运气。从句与主句是转折关系，要用连接副词However引导让步状语从句，同时作状语修饰well。
答案　A
3. I used to love that film________I was a child, but I don’t feel it that way any more.
A. once B. when
C. since D. although
解析　 句意是：当我还是一个小孩子的时候，曾喜欢过那部电影，但是现在我再也没有那种感觉了。根据句意可知，此处要用when引导时间状语从句。once 一旦；一……就……；since自从……以来；既然；although虽然……但是……。
答案　B
4. Failure is never pleasurable，but it can make a positive contribution to your life________you learn to use it.
A. since B. once
C. until D. unless
解析　 句意是：失败永远不是令人愉快的事情。但是，一旦你学会利用它，它就会给你的生活带来积极的促进作用。根据题意可知，从句是主句发生的条件，故用once表示“一旦”。
答案　B
5. That was really a splendid evening. It’s years________I enjoyed myself so much.
A. when B. that
C. before D. since
解析　 句意：这真是一个美好的夜晚，有几年我没有玩得这么痛快了。该句使用的是It is＋时间阶段＋since...句式，意为“自从……以来已有某段时间了”。
答案　D
6. We’ll have a picnic in the park this Sunday________it rains or it’s very cold.
A. since B. if
C. unless D. until
解析　 句意是：我们这个星期天要去野营，除非下雨或者太冷。从句是主句的反向条件，要用unless引导。
答案　C
7．There were some chairs left over________everyone had sat down.
A. when B. until
C. that D. where
解析　 句意是：当每个人坐下以后，还剩下几把椅子。根据题干中两个动词时态的比较可知，“每个人坐下”发生在“还剩下几把椅子”之前，所以要用when引导时间状语从句，表示“在……之后”。
答案　A
8．I am sure he is up to the job________he should give his mind to it.
A. if only B. in case
C. until D. unless
解析　 句意是：我相信，如果他专心做这项工作，他会胜任的。从句是主句发生的条件，所以要用if only表示“如果”。
答案　A
9. Doing your homework is a sure way to improve your test scores，and this is especially true________it comes to classroom tests.
A．before B．since
C．when D．after
解析　 句意是：做作业当然是提高成绩的方法，当涉及到随堂测验的时候，这尤其正确。此句要用习惯句型when it comes to...表示“当谈到……的时候”。
答案　C
10．________you have passed the driving test, you can drive on your own.
A. Now that B. In case
C. If only D. Even though
解析　 句意是：既然你已通过驾驶测试了，你就可以自己开汽车了。从句是主句的原因。Now that“既然”；In case“万一”；If only“要是……就好了。”；Even though“即使”。
答案　A
11. Losing weight is no easy task. A lot of people who lost weight gain it back over time and end up back________they started.
A. where B. though
C. since D. after
解析　 句意是：减肥不是一件容易的事。许多已减了肥的人随着时间的过去又增长了体重，回到了一开始的状态。此句要用where引导地点状语从句，表示“一开始的地方”。
答案　C
12. I don’t think Maria will be disappointed at the news, but I will see her________she is.
A. as B. as if
C. in case D. even if
解析　 句意是：我认为Maria不会因为这个消息而感到失望的，但我要去看看她以防她真得会失望。此句要用in case引导目的状语从句，表示“以防”。
答案　C
13. No matter how many adults use the language，________it isn’t passed to the next generation, it cannot survive.
A. if B. even though
C. as D. as far as
解析　 句意是：不管有多少成年人使用一种语言，如果不传给下一代人，这种语言就不会存在下去。从句是主句发生的条件，故用if引导。even though“即使”；as“由于”；as far as“至于……来说”。
答案　A
14. Talking about his success, the famous scientist said, “ I’ve been lucky________there are many people who have helped me.”
A. provided that B. now that
C. so that D. in that
解析　 句意是：谈起了他的成功，这位著名科学家说，“我很幸运，有那么多的人帮助了我。”此句要用in that表示“在……方面”。
答案　D
15．________， she falls behind most of her classmates.
A. Hard she works B. She works hard
C. Hard does she work D. Hard as she works
解析　 句意是：她尽管工作努力，但还是落后于她的同学们。as引导让步状语从句，要用倒装语序，Hard提到as前面。
答案　D
16. She was so angry that she rushed out into the rain________I could stop her.
A. until B. before
C. after D. as
解析　 句意是：她是那样的生气，以至于我还没有时间拦住她，她就冲到外面的雨中了。此句要用before引导时间状语从句，before与could连用，常表示“还没有来得及……”。
答案　B
17．—Did you remember to give Jenny the video tape
—Yes.________I saw her.
A. So long as B. Any time
C. Whenever D. The moment
解析　 句意是：“你记得给Jenny录相带了没有？”“给了，我一见到她就给她了。”这是一个时间状语从句，The moment表示“一……就……”。
答案　D
18．—How are you doing all these years, Jim
—Nothing new. Everything is going on________it was years ago.
A. as B. while
C. when D. since
解析　 句意是：“Jim你这些年来还顺利吧？”“没有什么新鲜的事，一切和几年以前相同。”as引导方式状语从句，表示“像……一样”。
答案　A
19. As long as I can remember, ________I called, his wife would answer the phone.
A. however B. whenever
C. Whatever D. whichever
解析　 句意是：“就我的记忆能力来说，无论我什么时候打电话，回话的总是他的妻子。”此句要用whenever引导时间状语从句，意为“无论什么时候……”。
答案　B
20．________kind of package it is, children are curious to open it up to see what’s inside.
A. However B. No matter where
C. Whenever D. No matter what
解析　 句意是：无论是什么样的包裹，孩子们总是好奇地打开，看一看里面是什么。从句是让步状语从句，用No matter what引导，因为what为形容词，所以它修饰名词kind。However是副词，不能修饰名词。
答案　D(共23张PPT)
专题十三　定语从句
专题十三 │ 专题导读
　　定语从句是重要的英语语法知识点之一，是高考必考的知识点，通常以单项填空题的形式出现。涉及的知识点包括限定性定语从句、非限定性定语从句、介词＋关系代词型定语从句和含插入语式的定语从句。形式多样，结构复杂，极易给考生带来麻烦。题目的设置主要考查的是定语从句的一些最基本的用法。最近几年，题目的设置注重了定语从句与其他从句的混合考查，这一点值得考生高度重视。
专题导读
专题十三 │ 专题导读
　　技巧点拨：首先要判断是什么类型的定语从句，如果是非限定性定语从句不能用that，其次判断先行词在定语从句中作什么成分，如果作主语、宾语、表语则用关系代词；如果先行词在定语从句中作状语，则用where ，when, why等关系副词。
对which 引导的非限定性定语从句的考查将会是各类命题考查的重点，并且结构的多样化和利用插入语增加句子的难度应该引起我们的注意；另外which可以指句子也可以指前面的指物的某一名词。
专题十三 │ 真题典例
【解析】 C　考查定语从句关系代词的用法。本空格在定语从句中作story的定语，因此用 whose。
　 （　　）1. ［2011·课标全国卷］ The prize will go to the writer ________ story shows the most imagination.
A．that B．which C．whose D．what
真题典例
专题十三 │ 真题典例
　　 （　　）2. ［2011·全国卷］ Ted came for the weekend wearing only some shorts and a T shirt, ________ is a stupid thing to do in such weather.
A．this B．that C．what D．which
　 【解析】 D　句意：这个周末，泰德仅穿着运动短裤和T 恤，在这样的天气这真是一件愚蠢的事情。考查非限制性定语从句。which指代前面整句话的内容，而非限制性定语从句不能用that引导。this不能作引导词。what 不能引导定语从句。
专题十三 │ 真题典例
　　（　　）3. ［2011·北京卷］ Mary was much kinder to Jack than she was to the others, ________， of course, made all the others upset.
A．who B．which
C．what D．that
　 【解析】 B　句意：玛丽对杰克比她对其他人更好，这当然让其他人都不舒服。考查关系代词辨析。关系代词which指代前面一句话，引导非限制性定语从句，故选择B项。
专题十三 │ 真题典例
　　（　　）4. ［2011·上海卷］ You’ll find taxis waiting at the bus station ________ you can hire to reach your host family.
A．which B．where
C．when D．as
【解析】 A　句意：你会发现出租车等候在公交车站，你可以搭乘出租车到达你寄宿的家庭。考查关系词辨析。分析定语从句先行词在从句中作宾语，故只能选择关系代词which，B、C、D三个选项均为副词，不能作宾语。故答案为A。
专题十三 │ 真题典例
　　（　　）5. ［2011·山东卷］ The old town has narrow streets and small houses ________are built close to each other.
A．they B．where C．what D．that
　 【解析】 D　 句意：这座老镇拥有狭窄的街道和坐落在一起的矮小的房子。考查定语从句引导词的用法。分析句子结构可知，空格处及后面部分为定语从句，先行词为small houses, that代替先行词引导定语从句且在定语从句中作主语。they, what不能引导定语从句。where引导定语从句时在句中作地点状语。故选D。
专题十三 │ 真题典例
　 （　　）6. ［2011·江西卷］ She showed the visitors around the museum, the construction ________had taken more than three years.
A．for which B．with which
C．of which D．to which
　 【解析】 C　句意：她带领游客参观了博物馆，这座博物馆的建造工程花费了三年多的时间。考查“介词＋关系代词which”结构。先行词为museum，关系代词which在从句中充当后置定语，修饰the construction，用of which 作后置定语。
专题十三 │ 真题典例
【解析】 C　句意：一切剩下的东西可以放进冰箱，在那里可以保持两三个星期。考查非限制性定语从句。where代替in the refrigerator在从句中作地点状语。
　　（　　）7. ［2011·安徽卷 ］ Whatever is left over may be put into the refrigerator, ________ it will keep for two or three weeks.
　　A．when B．which C．where D．while
专题十三 │ 真题典例
【解析】 A　句意：英语是一种被多种不同文化分享的语言，每一种文化都在某种程度上使它有所不同。考查定语从句的引导词。分析句式结构可知，空格处在句中引导非限制性定语从句，所以要使用关系代词which。
（　　） 8. ［2011·浙江卷］ English is a language shared by several diverse cultures, each of ________ uses it somewhat differently.
专题十三 │ 真题典例
【解析】 C　句意：银行是晴天时借给你雨伞，下雨时收回雨伞的地方。考查定语从句的引导词。由于从句结构完整，不缺少句子成分，所以先行词为the place在从句中要充当地点状语，故使用关系副词where引导定语从句。
（　　） 9. ［2011·浙江卷］ A bank is the place ________ they lend you an umbrella in fair weather and ask for it back when it begins to rain.
A．when B．that C．where D．there
专题十三 │ 真题典例
【解析】 A　句意：她有为学生创造允许他们自由交流气氛的天赋。考查定语从句的关系词。“…allows them to communicate freely with each other”是定语从句，修饰an atmosphere，先行词为atmosphere，用关系代词which，在定语从句中作动词allow的主语，故选A。
　　（　　） 10. ［2011·福建卷］ She has a gift for creating an atmosphere for her students ________ allows them to communicate freely with each other.
　　A．which B．where C．what D．who
　　（　　）1.More wild tigers have been seen in the forest around this area，________ there used to be very few.
A．when 　B．where C．what D．which
【解析】 1. B　句意：在附近的森林中发现了更多的野生老虎，而在过去，这一地区老虎数量非常少。考查关系副词用法。先行词是the forest，代入定语从句后为：There used to be very few （wild tigers） in the forest.由此可知先行词在定语从句中作状语，且表地点，故用关系副词where。
新题预测
专题十三 │ 新题预测
专题十三 │ 新题预测
　　（　　）2.Young people who have got jobs may realize university lessons can’t be the only preparation for all of the situations ________ appear in the working world.
A．where B．when C．that D．why
【解析】 C　句意：找到工作的年轻人也许会意识到大学的课程不足以应对工作中的所有情况。考查关系代词用法。先行词是the situations，代入定语从句后为：The situations appear in the working world.由此可见先行词在定语从句中作主语，故用that/which，且不可省略。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
　 （　　）3.Mount Wu yi is such an attractive place of interest ________ everyone likes to visit.
A．that B．as C．which D．what
　 【解析】 B　句意：武夷山是一个大家都喜欢去的旅游胜地。such…as…意思是“像……一样的”，as既是定语从句的引导词又在从句中作宾语。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
　　 （　　）4.Some great people said it was their primary school teachers and their lessons ________they were fond of________ influenced their whole lives.
A．which；that B．that；which
C．which；which D．that；that
　 【解析】 D　第一空格的that是定语从句的引导词，当定语从句中人和物共同作先行词时，引导词只能用that而不能用which；第二空格的that是用来构成强调句型的。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
　　 （　　）5.This is the small house less than 15 square meters，under________ roof lives a large family of three generations.
A．which 　B．that C．its D．whose
【解析】 D　句意：这是那所不到15平米的房子，在这所房子里住着一个三代人的大家庭。whose引导定语从句修饰the small house, whose roof＝the roof of which。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
　 （　　）6.The media today can draw public attention to situations ________ help is actually needed.
　　A．why B．while C．where D．whose
【解析】 C　where＝in which，引导定语从句修饰situations。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
（　　）7.Is there a magic cutoff period ________children become responsible for their own actions
A．that B．on which
C．which D．when
　 【解析】 D　 in/during this period在这期间；先行词为period，when引导定语从句，这里相当于 during which/in which。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
（　　）8.The famous scientist, ________a dinner party will be held tonight, is to arrive soon.
A．in honour of him B．in his honour
C．in whose honour D．in which honour
【解析】 C　句意：那位著名的科学家很快就要到了，为了表示对他的敬意今晚要举行一个宴会。 in one’s honour“为了纪念……，为了向……表示敬意”，whose引导定语从句修饰scientist。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
（　　）9.Mrs.Black took the police back to________ place ________ she witnessed the robbery.
A．the same；as B．the same；where
C．the same；that D．the same；when
【解析】 B　句意：布莱克夫人把警察带回到她目击了抢劫案的那个地方。the same place后的从句为定语从句，表地点时用where来引导，且在句中作状语，as和that均为关系代词，不能作本句中的状语。
专题十三 │ 新题预测
（　　）10.________is known to us all that the old scientist, for________ life was hard in the past, still works hard in his eighties.
A．It；whom B．As；whom
C．As；whose D．What；whom
【解析】 A　句意：我们都知道，那位老科学家八十多岁的时候还在工作，对他来说过去的生活是艰辛的。it是形式主语，that从句是真正的主语；第二空格的whom引导定语从句修饰the old scientist。(共77张PPT)
第十二讲 状语从句
1．状语从句的引导词与介词的用法比较；状语从句与定语从句引导词的辨析。
2．能够辨别同类状语从句中近似连接词的用法差异。
3．whatever，whenever，wherever等引导词与no matter wh 等引导词的不同用法。
2011年高考对条件状语从句的考查稳中有升。2012年考查的重点仍然是考生容易混淆的近似连词的用法，试题的结构将越来越复杂，设问的角度将越来越多样化。
1．when, while, as的区别
这三个词都可以用作连接词，表示时间关系，但有所区别。
(1)when表示时间关系时，意思常常是“当(在)……的时候”。主句和从句中的动作或事情可以同时发生，也可以先后发生。例如：
When we were at school, we went to the library every day.
I’ll go when I have had my dinner.
The film had begun when we arrived at the cinema.
注意：when有哪些通常所在的句型？
(2)while 用作连接词表示时间关系时，意思也是“当(在)……的时候”，主句中的动作或事情在从句中的动作或事情的进展过程中发生。它有时可与when通用，但它只能指一段时间(a period of time)，而不能指一点时间的(a point of time)。如上面第一个例句中的when，可以用while代替；而第二个例句中的when，就不能用while代替。例如：
Please don’t talk so aloud while others are working.
While I am washing the floor, you can be cleaning the windows.
While也可表对比。
I like reading while he prefers listening to music.
谚语：Strike the iron while it is hot.
(3)as用作连接词表示时间关系时，意思也是“当(在)……时候”，往往可与when或while通用，但它着重指主句和从句中的动作或事情相并发生。例如：
I saw him as he was getting off the bus.
As he walked on, he felt himself getting more and more tired.
As time passes by, we grow older and learn more.
As industry develops,more and more farmland has been taken up.
2．一些表示时间的名词短语也可用来引导时间状语从句
the minute, the moment, the instant, every time, the last time, every time。如：
The first time I got to the island, I was amazed by its beauty.
The moment I entered the room, I smelled something unusual.
Every time I visit him, he is always reading.
3．directly和immediately也可作为连词，引导时间状语从句，意为“一……就……”，相当于the moment/the instant和as soon as。如：
I knew something was wrong directly I arrived.
The boys did all sorts of mischief immediately my back was turned.
4．before 和after
before 引导的从句的动作通常发生在主句动作之后，如果从句是过去时，主句一般要用过去完成时或一般过去时。after引导的从句动作通常发生在主句动作之前，如果主句要用过去时，从句则要用过去完成时或一般过去时。例如：
The plane had taken off before he arrived at the airport.
After he had lived in the south for nearly 20 years, he decided to go to seek his fortune in the north.
They arrived at the cinema after the film began.
5．no sooner...than 和hardly (scarcely)．.. when
这两个连词词组都是表示主句与从句动作随即发生，意为“一……就……”。主句动词用过去完成时。如果no sooner, hardly 或scarcely位于句首，主句要倒装。例如：
No sooner had he entered the house than it began to rain.
He had hardly gone to bed when the telephone rang.
6．till 和until
这两个词的用法十分近似，都表示“直到……”，但在句首只能用until。在肯定句中，主句要用延续性动词；在否定句中，主句要用非延续性动词，这时until和before同义。例如：
They did not go home until they had finished the work.
They stayed there…………………………………….
7. It 与before, since, when引导的时间状语从句连用时的区别：
(1)It is/has been＋时间段＋since ... 自从……以来已有多长时间了。
(2)It is/was＋时间点＋when ... when 引导的是一个时间状语从句，主句中的 it 指时间，表语由具体的时间充当。常译为“当……的时候，是……”。
(3)It be ＋时间段＋ before ... it 指时间， 主句中的时态常是一般将来时或过去时两种时态．主句中的表语多是long, not long , 3 days , 2 weeks 等表示时间段的词或短语。常译为“……之后……”。例如：
How long is it since we met last time
It was a lready midnight when I got home.
It was not long before she got married and moved to Japan.
1．(2011·福建)It was April 29, 2011________Prince William and Kate Middleton walked into the palace hall of the wedding ceremony.
A．that　　　　　　　B．when
C．since D．before
解析　 考查when引导的时间状语从句。句意“2011年4月29日，威廉王子与凯特·米德尔顿步入了婚姻的殿堂。”
答案　B
2．(2011·上海) If a lot of people say a film is not good, I won’t bother to see it, or I’ll wait________it comes out on DVD.
A. whether B. after
C. though D. until
解析　 考查时间状语从句。until与wait等延续性动词的肯定形式连用。
答案　D
3．(2011·江西)Please call my secretary to arrange a meeting this afternoon, or________it is convenient to you.
A. whenever B. however
C. whichever D. wherever
解析　 考查从句连接词。whenever无论何时，however然而 whichever任何一个，wherever 无论哪里。请打电话给我的秘书安排今天下午的会议，或者在任何你方便的时候。关系副词在后句中充当状语，根据语境可知是指时间，选A。
答案　A
4．(2011·辽宁)He had no sooner finished his speech________the students started cheering.
A. since B. as
C. when D. than
解析　 考查状语从句。no sooner...than...为固定搭配。
答案　D
5．(2011·四川)As it reported, it is 100 years________Qinghua University was founded.
A. when B. before
C. after D. since
解析　 考查固定句型。It＋ is/was＋时间段＋since＋从句，表示“自从……以来已经有多长时间了”。
答案　D
1．(2010·重庆)Today，we will begin ________we stopped yesterday so that no point will be left out.
A．when　　　　　　　　B．where
C．how D．what
解析　 考查状语从句。where在此处引导地点状语从句。
答案　B
2．(2009·江苏)________unemployment and crime are high，it can be assumed that the latter is due to the former.
A．Before B．Where
C．Unless D．Until
解析　 考查状语从句。where引导地点状语从句，表示凡是失业率与犯罪率高的地方，犯罪都是由失业引起的。
答案　B
3．(2009·山东)The little girl who got lost decided to remain________she was and wait for her mother.
A．where B．what
C．how D．who
解析　 考查状语从句。句意：这个迷路的小女孩决定待在原地等她妈妈。故应选择where来引导地点状语从句，答案为A。
答案　A
地点状语从句表示在主句中某一动作或状态发生的地点或进行的方向，这类从句通常由where, wherever或 everywhere引导，可以放在主句前，也可以放在主句后，wherever的语气比where语气更强烈。where指“在某个地方”，wherever指“在任何一个地方”，everywhere指“每一……地方”。例如：
Bamboo grows well where it has plenty of rain.
Sit wherever you like.
Make a mark where you have a question.
Where there is a will，there is a way.
1. (2011·山东) He had his camera ready________he saw something that would make a good picture.
A. even if　　　　　　　　B. if only
C. in case D. so that
解析　 考查状语从句引导词。句意“他准备好了相机以防看到可以拍摄的景物。”in case 为“以防；以免”；even if为“即使”；if only 为“如果……就好了”；so that “为了，以便”。
答案　C
2. (2010·全国卷Ⅰ)The little boy won’t go to sleep________his mother tells him a story.
A．or B．unless
C．but D．whether
解析　 考查连词。根据句意“除非妈妈给他讲一个故事，否则这小男孩是不会入睡的。”可知unless符合句意。or否则，不然的话；but但是；whether是否。
答案　B
3．(2010·山东)The school rules state that no child shall be allowed out of the school during the day，________accompanied by an adult.
A．once B．when
C．if D．unless
解析　 考查连词。句意：学校规则规定：除非有大人的陪伴，否则任何孩子白天都不允许外出学校。
答案　D
4．(2010·江西)—Our holiday cost a lot of money.
—Did it Well，that doesn’t matter________you enjoyed yourselves.
A．as long as B．unless
C．as soon as D．though
解析　 考查连词辨析。由对话语境可知，空格后的一句是空格前一句的前提条件。故A项意思相符。as long as只要。
答案　A
5．(2010·北京) ________they decide which college to go to，students should research the admission procedures.
A．As B．While
C．Until D．Once
解析　 此题考查状语从句连词。once“一旦……”。句意：学生一旦决定上哪个大学，他们就应该了解一下入学手续。
答案　D
条件状语从句表示主句中某一动作或状态是在什么情况或条件下发生的。
1．if 和unless
if 表示正面的条件，意为“如果”，unless表示反向的条件，意为“除非，如果不”。例如：
If you’ve got exams tomorrow, why aren’t you studying？
The sports meet will begin tomorrow unless it rains.
【专家提醒】　条件状语从句中常用一般时表示将要发生的动作。
2. providing, provided (that), supposing, suppose (that), as long as, so long as, on condition that 和in case
这些连词(词组)意思相近，有“如果，只要，假如，假使，在……条件下”等意思。例如：
All living things respire as long as they live.
Supposing (that) you fail a second time, don’t get disappointed, but try again.
On condition that the liquid is cooled still further, it will turn to a solid.
3．only if和if only
only if 引导的从句用陈述语气，意为“只要”； if only引导的从句要用虚拟语气，意为“但愿……”，“要是……就好了”。例如：
only if you have persistence, can you achieve great success.
If only I had wings, I would be able to travel around the world easily.
1．(2011·北京)________volleyball is her main focus, she’s also great at basketball.
A. Since　　　　　　　B. Once
C. Unless D. While
解析　 句意为：虽然排球是她的主要项目，但她还擅长篮球。while“虽然，尽管”。since“自从”；once“一旦”；unless“除非”均不合题意。
答案　D
2．(2011·四川)Frank insisted that he was not asleep________I had great difficulty in waking him up.
A. whether B. although
C. for D. so
解析　 考查从属连词。although作为连词引导让步状语从句。句意为：尽管我很难叫醒他，但弗兰克却坚持说自己没有睡觉。前后句子表达“虽然……但是……”的转折语气，故选B项。whether作为连词可接名词性从句表示“是否”的意思，接让步状语从句表示“不管， 无论”，与题意不符；for作为连词引导原因状语从句；so作为连词引导结果状语从句；均不合题意。
答案　B
3．(2011·辽宁)No matter how ________， it is not necessarily lifeless.
A. a desert may be dry B. dry a desert may be
C. may a desert be dry D. dry may a desert be
解析　 考查状语从句。No matter how引导让步状语从句，用陈述语序。
答案　B
4．(2010·安徽)The engineers are so busy that they have zero time for outdoor sports activities，________they have the interest.
A．wherever B．whenever
C．even if D．as if
解析　 考查连词的用法。根据语境可知，“他们有这种兴趣”和“他们没有时间”之间为转折关系。故用even if“即使”引导让步状语从句。
答案　C
5．(2011·重庆)To show our respect, we usually have to take our gloves off________we are to shake hands with.
A．whichever B．whenever
C．whoever D．wherever
解析　 考查状语从句的连词。whoever引导让步状语从句，相当于no matter who。
答案　C
1．让步状语从句可由although，though，as，while，even if(though)，whatever，whether...or...，no matter who (when，what...)等引导。
Although/Though she works very hard，(yet) she makes very slow progress.尽管她学习很努力，但还是进步不快。
Whenever I’m unhappy(＝No matter when I’m unhappy)，it is my friend who cheers me up.
不管什么时候我不高兴，总是我的朋友给我鼓励。
【专家提醒】
(1)however引导让步状语从句时，与它所修饰的词一起放在句首。
(2)英语不允许在though 或although从句后同时用but。如果要强调前后两个部分的对比意义，可以在主句前加上yet或still。
2．as引导的让步状语从句的常见的几种倒装方式
(1)如果从句的谓语部分为“不及物动词＋副词”时，常将从句中的副词提到从句的句首。
Hard as you may try，you will not succeed.
尽管你努力了，你可能不会成功。
(2)如果从句的谓语部分为“情态动词＋不及物动词”，常将这个不及物动词提到从句的句首。
Wait as you may，he will not see you.
尽管你等了，他可能不会见你。
(3)如果从句的谓语部分是“系动词＋单数名词”，则常将这个作表语的名词提前，但这个名词前面的不定冠词要省略。
Child as he is，he can tell right from wrong.
尽管他还是个孩子，他能明辨是非。
3．while作“尽管”讲引导让步状语从句时往往放在句首
While I understand your viewpoint，I don’t agree with you.
尽管我明白你的观点，我不赞成你。
1．(2011·湖南)Jack wasn’t saying anything, but the teacher smiled at him________he had done something very clever.
A .as if　　　　　　　　　B. in case
C. while D. though
解析　 考查状语从句的用法。根据句意，空格处需要填入“好像，仿佛”。故选A。
答案　A
2．(2009·天津)I travel to the Binhai New Area by light railway every day，________do many businessmen who live in downtown Tianjin.
A．as B．which
C．when D．though
解析　 句意：我像许多住在天津闹市区的商人一样，每天乘坐轻轨到滨海新区上班。as引导方式状语从句时意为“正如，就像……一样”。
答案　A
1．as 和just as
二者都表示“如……；犹如……，正如……”。just as 比as强调的语气更强。例如：
In the early days, people could not count as we do now.
在早期日子中，人们不和我们现在一样能计数。
Most plants need sunlight just as they need water.
大部植物像它们需要水一样，也需要阳光。
2．as if 和as though
as if 或as though从句可以用陈述语气，表示可能符合事实的情况；也可以用虚拟语气，表示不符合事实或与事实相反的情况，意为“好像，仿佛”。例如：
It looks as though it is going to rain.
天看起来要下雨。
He spoke as if he were a philosopher.
他说话就像是一位哲学家。(从句动词与主语谓语同时发生，从句谓语要用一般过去时)
He speaks as if he had been to the moon.
他谈起话来就好像是去过月球。(从句动作发生在主句谓语之前，从句谓语要用过去完成时)
He speaks as if he would fly to the moon.
他谈起话来就好像是要飞往月球。(从句动词发生在主句谓语之后，从句谓语要用would/could/might＋do)
Adverbial Clauses of Reason(原因状语从句）
because, since, as,
now that, for
I. because
1)The ship changed its course because there
was a storm.
The ship changed its course because of
the storm.
2)Because he was ill,he didn’t go to school.
He was ill ,so he didn’t go to school.
Being ill, he didn’t go to school.
II.since
1)Since you are ill,you’d better go to see
the doctor.
2)Since you do not understand ,I will
explain again.
III.as
1)As she was late for class,she had to say
sorry.
2)As Jane was the oldest in this family,
she had to look after the others.
IV. now that
1)Now that class is over,let’s go to play
football.
V.for
He must be ill, for he is absent today.
Exercises:
1.The teacher must be strict with you ____
they want you to make great progress.
2.____your father is well again,you no longer
have anything to worry about.
3.The day breaks,_____the birds are singing.
1．“ May I go and play with Dick this afternoon, Mum？”“ No, you can’t go out________your work is being done.”
A. before B. until
C. as D. the moment
【易误分析】　容易误选B，误认为这是考查 not...until...结构。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。句中的 your work is being done 表明“你正在做作业”，选 as 表原因。
2. “I’m going to the post office.” “________you’re there, can you get me some stamps？”
A. As B. While
C. Because D. If
【易误分析】　容易误选A。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 B。尽管 as 和 while 均可用作从属连词引导时间状语从句，表示“当……的时候”，但两者有一个重要区别，就是这样用的 as 从句的谓语不能是状态动词。当然，如果 as 不是表示“当……的时候”，其谓语是完全可以用状态动词的。如：
I went to bed early, as I was exhausted. 我很累了，所以很早就上床睡了。(此句中的 as 表示原因，意为“因为”、“由于”)
3. After the war, a new school building was put up________there had once been a theatre.
A. that B. when
C. which D. where
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 D。where 在此引导地点状语从句，其意为“(在)……的地方”。
4. The visitor asked to have his picture taken________ stood the famous tower.
A. that B. at which
C. when D. where
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 D。此题与上面一题有些相似，但又有所不同：相似的是，where 均表示“在……的地方”，均用以引导地点状语从句；不同的是，此题还涉及倒装，即此句的主语是 the famous tower，谓语是 stood，正常语序为 where the famous tower stood，使用倒装是为了保持句子平衡，避免头重脚轻。
5. They kept trying________they must have known it was hopeless.
A. if B. because
C. when D. where
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。when 在此的意思不是“当……的时候”，而是“尽管”、“虽然”的意思。又如：
He walks when he might take a taxi. 尽管他可以坐出租车，但他却走路。
He stopped trying when he might have succeeded next time. 尽管他本来下次就可以成功的了，但他却停止努力了。
The boy was restless when he should have listened to the teacher carefully. 这男孩子本来应该专心听老师讲的，但他却坐立不安。
有许多同学只知道 when 表示“当……的时候”，而不知道它还有其他许多意思，除上面提到的表示“尽管”、“虽然”外，when 还可表示“既然”、“考虑到”。请做下面的试题(答案选D)：
Why do you want a new job________you’ve got such a good one already
A. that B. where
C. which D. when
6. He was about to tell me the secret________someone patted him on the shoulder.
A. as B. until
C. when D. while
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。when 意为“这时(突然)”，主要用于某一动作突然发生于另一动作正在进行或刚要发生之时。此时的 when 可以连用副词 suddenly，也可以不连用它，但值得注意的是，同学们不能单独用 suddenly 来代替 when。
7. The fire went on for quite some time________it was brought under control.
A. when B. since
C. after D. before
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 D。before 意为“在……之前”，句意是“大火在得到控制之前燃烧了相当一段时间”。
8. Mother asked me to take more money________something unexpected should happen.
A. in case B. so that
C. in order that D. when
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 A。in case 起连词作用，用以引导状语从句，主要有两种意思：一是表示条件，意为“如果”、“万一”；二是表示“目的”，意为“以防”、“免得”。
9.________your composition carefully, some spelling mistakes can be avoided.
A. Having checked B. Check
C. If you check D. To check
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选，尤其可能误选A。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 C。前面一个分句为条件状语从句，后面一个分句为主语。现分析几个干扰项：选项 A 和 D 均为非谓语动词，根据英语语法习惯，非谓语动词作状语时，其逻辑主语应与句子主语一致，而此句的 some spelling mistakes 显然不能用作 having checked 或 to check 的逻辑主语，故不能选为答案；若选 B，则两个句子之间缺少必要的连词，也不对。
10. “When did he leave the classroom？” “He left________you turned back to write on the blackboard.”
A. the time B. the moment
C. until D. since
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选 B。the moment 用作连词，意为“一……就……”，相当于 as soon as。类似地，the minute, the instant 也可用作连词，表示“一……就……”的意思。
1．—Did you return Fred’s call
—I didn’t need to________I’ll see him tomorrow.
A. though　　　　　　　 B. unless
C. when D. because
解析　 句意是：“你给Fred回电话了没有？”“我没有回电话，因为我明天就会见到他。”所以要用 because引导原因状语从句。
答案　D
2．________well prepared you are, you still need a lot of luck in mountain climbing.
A. However B. Whatever
C. No matter D. Although
解析　 句意是：不管你准备得有多么好，你在爬山运动中仍需要很大的运气。从句与主句是转折关系，要用连接副词However引导让步状语从句，同时作状语修饰well。
答案　A
3. I used to love that film________I was a child, but I don’t feel it that way any more.
A. once B. when
C. since D. although
解析　 句意是：当我还是一个小孩子的时候，曾喜欢过那部电影，但是现在我再也没有那种感觉了。根据句意可知，此处要用when引导时间状语从句。once 一旦；一……就……；since自从……以来；既然；although虽然……但是……。
答案　B
4. Failure is never pleasurable，but it can make a positive contribution to your life________you learn to use it.
A. since B. once
C. until D. unless
解析　 句意是：失败永远不是令人愉快的事情。但是，一旦你学会利用它，它就会给你的生活带来积极的促进作用。根据题意可知，从句是主句发生的条件，故用once表示“一旦”。
答案　B
5. That was really a splendid evening. It’s years________I enjoyed myself so much.
A. when B. that
C. before D. since
解析　 句意：这真是一个美好的夜晚，有几年我没有玩得这么痛快了。该句使用的是It is＋时间阶段＋since...句式，意为“自从……以来已有某段时间了”。
答案　D
6. We’ll have a picnic in the park this Sunday________it rains or it’s very cold.
A. since B. if
C. unless D. until
解析　 句意是：我们这个星期天要去野营，除非下雨或者太冷。从句是主句的反向条件，要用unless引导。
答案　C
7．There were some chairs left over________everyone had sat down.
A. when B. until
C. that D. where
解析　 句意是：当每个人坐下以后，还剩下几把椅子。根据题干中两个动词时态的比较可知，“每个人坐下”发生在“还剩下几把椅子”之前，所以要用when引导时间状语从句，表示“在……之后”。
答案　A
8．I am sure he is up to the job________he should give his mind to it.
A. if only B. in case
C. until D. unless
解析　 句意是：我相信，如果他专心做这项工作，他会胜任的。从句是主句发生的条件，所以要用if only表示“如果”。
答案　A
9. Doing your homework is a sure way to improve your test scores，and this is especially true________it comes to classroom tests.
A．before B．since
C．when D．after
解析　 句意是：做作业当然是提高成绩的方法，当涉及到随堂测验的时候，这尤其正确。此句要用习惯句型when it comes to...表示“当谈到……的时候”。
答案　C
10．________you have passed the driving test, you can drive on your own.
A. Now that B. In case
C. If only D. Even though
解析　 句意是：既然你已通过驾驶测试了，你就可以自己开汽车了。从句是主句的原因。Now that“既然”；In case“万一”；If only“要是……就好了。”；Even though“即使”。
答案　A
11. Losing weight is no easy task. A lot of people who lost weight gain it back over time and end up back________they started.
A. where B. though
C. since D. after
解析　 句意是：减肥不是一件容易的事。许多已减了肥的人随着时间的过去又增长了体重，回到了一开始的状态。此句要用where引导地点状语从句，表示“一开始的地方”。
答案　C
12. I don’t think Maria will be disappointed at the news, but I will see her________she is.
A. as B. as if
C. in case D. even if
解析　 句意是：我认为Maria不会因为这个消息而感到失望的，但我要去看看她以防她真得会失望。此句要用in case引导目的状语从句，表示“以防”。
答案　C
13. No matter how many adults use the language，________it isn’t passed to the next generation, it cannot survive.
A. if B. even though
C. as D. as far as
解析　 句意是：不管有多少成年人使用一种语言，如果不传给下一代人，这种语言就不会存在下去。从句是主句发生的条件，故用if引导。even though“即使”；as“由于”；as far as“至于……来说”。
答案　A
14. Talking about his success, the famous scientist said, “ I’ve been lucky________there are many people who have helped me.”
A. provided that B. now that
C. so that D. in that
解析　 句意是：谈起了他的成功，这位著名科学家说，“我很幸运，有那么多的人帮助了我。”此句要用in that表示“在……方面”。
答案　D
15．________， she falls behind most of her classmates.
A. Hard she works B. She works hard
C. Hard does she work D. Hard as she works
解析　 句意是：她尽管工作努力，但还是落后于她的同学们。as引导让步状语从句，要用倒装语序，Hard提到as前面。
答案　D
16. She was so angry that she rushed out into the rain________I could stop her.
A. until B. before
C. after D. as
解析　 句意是：她是那样的生气，以至于我还没有时间拦住她，她就冲到外面的雨中了。此句要用before引导时间状语从句，before与could连用，常表示“还没有来得及……”。
答案　B
17．—Did you remember to give Jenny the video tape
—Yes.________I saw her.
A. So long as B. Any time
C. Whenever D. The moment
解析　 句意是：“你记得给Jenny录相带了没有？”“给了，我一见到她就给她了。”这是一个时间状语从句，The moment表示“一……就……”。
答案　D
18．—How are you doing all these years, Jim
—Nothing new. Everything is going on________it was years ago.
A. as B. while
C. when D. since
解析　 句意是：“Jim你这些年来还顺利吧？”“没有什么新鲜的事，一切和几年以前相同。”as引导方式状语从句，表示“像……一样”。
答案　A
19. As long as I can remember, ________I called, his wife would answer the phone.
A. however B. whenever
C. Whatever D. whichever
解析　 句意是：“就我的记忆能力来说，无论我什么时候打电话，回话的总是他的妻子。”此句要用whenever引导时间状语从句，意为“无论什么时候……”。
答案　B
20．________kind of package it is, children are curious to open it up to see what’s inside.
A. However B. No matter where
C. Whenever D. No matter what
解析　 句意是：无论是什么样的包裹，孩子们总是好奇地打开，看一看里面是什么。从句是让步状语从句，用No matter what引导，因为what为形容词，所以它修饰名词kind。However是副词，不能修饰名词。
答案　D(共23张PPT)
专题二　代词和介词
1．(2011年高考大纲全国卷)I got this bicycle for ________：My friend gave it tome when she bought a new one.
A．everything　　　　　　 　B．something
C．anything D．nothing
解析：句意：我这辆自行车一分钱也没花：我的朋友买了一辆新的，就把她这辆给了我。for nothing不花钱，免费。
答案：D
2．(2011年高考山东卷)The two girls are so alike that strangers find________difficult to tell one from the other.
A．it B．them
C．her D．that
解析：句意：这两个女孩长得如此相像，以至于陌生人觉得很难把她们区分开。本句中 it 用在 find 后作形式宾语，真正的宾语是后面的动词不定式短语 to tell one from the other。them，her，that等词均不能作形式宾语或形式主语。
答案：A
3．(2011年高考天津卷)We feel________our duty to make our country a better place.
A．it B．this
C．that D．one
解析：句意：我们觉得使我们国家成为一个更好的地方是我们的责任。四个选项均为代词。it在此处作形式宾语，指代后面的动词不定式短语to make our country a better place，语法结构正确；this 指代下文将要涉及的内容，而 that 往往指代上文提到的内容；one 作代词，指代同类不同物。this，that 和one 均不能作形式宾语。
答案：A
4．(2011年高考湖北卷)When asked about their opinions about the schoolmaster, many teachers would prefer to see him step aside________younger men.
A．in terms of B．in need of
C．in favor of D．in praise of
解析：句意：当被问及他们对校长的意见时，许多老师都希望看到他让位给年轻人。in terms of谈及，就……而言；in need of需要；in favor of支持，赞同；in praise of歌颂。根据句意可知应选C项。
答案：C
5．(2011年高考重庆卷)Shirley, a real book lover, often brings home many books to read________the library.
A．in B．for
C．by D．from
解析：句意：雪莉是一个真正爱好读书的人，她经常从图书馆带很多书回家读。根据句意知此处用介词from。
答案：D
[代词]
代词种类很多，功能不同。区分各种代词的不同功能是考生掌握的难点。高考题对代词的考查重点是不定代词some，any；none，no one，nothing；another，other，the other；neither，either等的区别以及指示代词it，this，that，these，those等的不同替代作用。预计2012年的高考对代词的考查会以不定代词、指示代词等内容为主。
一、不定代词
不定代词是代词的核心内容，也是极不容易掌握的语法知识，其中有些不定代词极易混淆。高考主要考查不定代词的辨析，着重考查以下内容：
1．some，any的区别
some一般用于肯定句，表示“一些”，也可用于疑问句，表示请求、邀请、建议等，往往期望对方给予肯定的答复；any一般用于疑问句和否定句，此时仅仅起加强语气的作用，本身没有实际意义，但也可用于肯定句，当“任何，任何一个”讲。
2．something，anything，nothing的区别
something一般用于肯定句，表示“某事，某物”，也可以用于疑问句，表示请求、邀请、征询意见等；anything表示“任何东西，任何事物”，一般用于否定句、疑问句或条件句，也可用于肯定句，当“任何事情”讲；nothing表示“没有什么，没有一件东西”，常用于陈述句，表示否定意义。
3．none，no one，nothing的区别
none既可指人，也可指物，侧重数量，通常指三者或三者以上的人或物，后可接of短语，作主语时谓语动词可用单数，也可用复数，常用来回答由how many/much引导的疑问句；no one只能指人，是泛指概念，常用来回答由who引导疑问句，不与of短语连用，作主语时，谓语动词用单数；nothing常用来回答由what引导的疑问句。
4．another，other的区别
another泛指同类事物中的三者或三者以上的“另一个”，只能代替或修饰单数可数名词。other表示“其他的，另外的”，泛指其余的人或物，通常与复数名词或不可数名词连用。
5．each，every，either，neither的区别
each指两个或两个以上的人或物中的“每一个”，侧重个体，后面可接of短语；either指两个人或事物中的任意一个，表选择；neither用于两者之间的否定，表示“两者都不”；every侧重三个或三个以上中的“每一个”，强调“无一例外”的含义。
[典例1]　(2011年高考四川卷)There is________in his words.We should have a try.
A．something B．anything
C．nothing D．everything
[解析]　句意：他话里有话。我们应该试试。something“某物，某事”，符合句意。anything“任何(事物)”；nothing“没有任何(事物)”；everything“一切(事物)”，三者均不符合句意。
[答案]　A
二、it的用法
英语中，运用it的场合较多。从它在句中的作用和意义来看，其用法可分为以下几类：
1．指代事物或前面提到过的事物。
2．用来代替指示代词this或that。
3．指不明确的人。
4．指时间、距离、天气、环境等。
5．指代整个句子的内容。
6．可指动物或婴儿(未知性别的婴儿和孩子)。
7．作形式主语和形式宾语。
当动词不定式、动名词或从句作主语时，为了使句子保持平衡，通常把主语放在谓语动词之后，而用it作句子的形式主语。在复合宾语中，当宾语是不定式、动名词、宾语从句时，往往把宾语放在它的补足语后面，而用it作形式宾语，放在宾语补足语之前。
[典例2]　________worries me that he keeps changing his mind.
A．This B．That
C．What D．It
[解析]　句意：他不断改变主意使我担心。it作形式主语，后面的that从句是真正的主语。
[答案]　D
[典例3]　He didn't make ________clear when and where the meeting would be held.
A．this B．that
C．it D．these
[解析]　it作形式宾语，后面when and where引导的从句才是真正的宾语。
[答案]　C
8．用于以下句型。
(1)强调句型：It is/was＋被强调部分(通常是主语、宾语、状语)＋that(who)＋句子的其余成分。强调句型只是把句子中某些词(被强调部分)的位置改变，如果把强调结构(it is/was...that/who)去掉之后，句子还应是完整的。
[典例4]　I don't mind her criticizing me，but________is how she does it that I object to.
A．it B．that
C．this D．which
[解析]　从句子结构分析，此处考查的是强调句型，因此用it。
[答案]　A
(2)It is＋一段时间＋since从句
(3)It was/will be＋一段时间＋before从句
[典例5]　He was told that it would be at least three more months ________he could recover and return to work.
A．when B．before
C．since D．that
[解析]　此处表示“多长时间以后才会……”，用“it will be＋一段时间＋before从句”。
[答案]　B
三、替代词one，ones，that和those的用法区别
1．one用来替代前面出现的单数名词，是泛指概念，相当于a/an＋单数名词。
2．ones用来替代前面出现的复数名词，也是泛指概念。
3．that用来替代前面出现的同类的名词，是同类替代，但并非同一个，可以是可数名词，也可以是不可数名词。
4．those用来替代前面出现的复数名词，是特指概念，相当于the＋复数名词，但多用于两者间的另外一方(一批)。
[典例6]　(2011年高考重庆卷)—Silly me! I forget what my luggage looks like.
—What do you think of________over there
A．the one B．this
C．it D．that
[解析]　句意：“我真傻！我忘了我的行李什么样了。”“你觉得那边的那个是你的吗？”根据句中的over there可知此处指远处，故用that; the one特指“同类中的一个”，用于指代可数名词，而luggage不可数；this常指近处；it指代“同一物”，均不符题意。
[答案]　D
[介词]
一、常用介词的用法
1．though，across，over，past的区别
through＋地点，表示从某地穿过
across＋地点，表示横穿某地，或从某地内部的一边到另一边，强调在表面运动
over＋地点，表示跨越某地，强调经过一段距离，或不接触表面从上空越过
past＋地点，表示从……旁边经过
2．besides，except，but的区别
besides意为“除……之外，还有……”，后面接名词、代词、动名词作宾语，也可单独使用，意为“此外”。
except意为“除……之外”，后面接名词、代词、动名词、介词短语、从句等作宾语。except for强调整体中的细节，意思是“只是”，前后的事物不属于同类。
but意为“除……之外”时，后面接名词、代词、动名词、动词不定式作宾语，常可与except互换使用。
二、介词短语
介词短语是指由“介词＋名词、代词、动名词及副词”所构成的短语。考生要对常见的介词短语做到熟能生巧，运用自如。如at home，on a visit，in surprise，by the way，in question等。
[典例1]　Nowadays some hospitals refer to patients ________ name，not case number.
A．of B．as
C．by D．with
[解析]　此处by表示方式，by name意为“凭名字”。
[答案]　C
[典例2]　Everything was perfect for the picnic ____the weather.
A．in place of B．as well
C．except for D．in case of
[解析]　考查介词短语的辨析。根据题意可知，此处表示除了天气之外，一切都很好。强调整体中的细节，用except for。in place of“替代，取代”；as well“也”；in case of“如果，假使”，均不符合题意。
[答案]　C
[典例3]　I agree to his suggestion ________the condition that he drops all charges.
A．by B．in
C．on D．to
[解析]　on the condition that与if同义，引导条件状语从句。根据题意可知答案为C。
[答案]　C
by用法小结
1．by the year/hour/day按年/小时/天。如：He rent a house by the year(day，hour)．但to the pound按磅算，to the ton按吨计例外。
2．表泛指方式、手段。如：by post/mail，by telephone(radio)，by electricity，by machinery，learn sth.by heart。
3．交通工具类。如：by bus/train/car/taxi(road)/bike/plane/air/ship/boat/sea/water...另外：by means of，by way of。
4．表方式、手段的其他介词。如：
He beat the dog with a whip.(with＋工具)
One smells with his nose.(with＋人体器官，但by hand例外)
He stood up with pride.(with＋情绪、情感、态度的名词)
使用语言、材料、文字使用in。如：in English(ink，pencil)。另外还有一些固定搭配也要用介词in，如：in high(good，low)spirits，in anger，in joy，in comfort，in sorrow，in safety，in danger，in need，in debt，in love，in fun，in pain，in tears，in surprise。
本小节结束
请按ESC键返回(共30张PPT)
Cherry Valley of Xixiang
1. 定义： 在句中起定语的作用、修饰句子中的名词或代词的从句。因其功能类似形容词，故又称为形容词性从句。
2. 三要素：
1)先行词
2)关系代词（who, whom, whose, which，that, as )
或关系副词（when ,where,why)
3)关系词在定语从句中充当成分
This is a picture
which
shows beautiful natural scenery.
知 识 要 点
定语从句三要素（表格）。
只能用who, that或which的情况。
Which和as的区别。
The same as和the same that的区别。
Such/so…as…和such/so…that…的区别。
“介词+关系代词”中介词的选择问题(介词短语和动词短语)。
7.定语从句的主谓一致。
8.定语从句与同位语从句、状语从句、强调句、并列句的区别。
先行词 关 系 词 在 从 句 中 充 当 成 分
主 语 宾 语
（可省） 定 语 状 语
地 点 时 间 原 因 方 式
指 人
指 物
who,
that
which ,
that ,
as
whom ,
that ,
who
which ,
that ,
as
whose ,
of whom
whose ,
( prep.
+) which
where /
prep.
+ which
when /
prep.
+ which
why /
prep.
+ which
that /
prep.
+ which
1. Those ______ are willing to attend the party, sign here please.
A. who B. that C. which D. /
2. This is the place _____ is worth visiting.
A. who B. that C. which D. where
3. _____ is known, the earth is round, not flat.
A. That B. As C. Which D. It
A
C
B
Ｉ.　关系代词（who, whom, whose, which，that, as)
先行词为指人的不定代词， 关系词只能用who。
5. In our school there is a foreign teacher; ______ parents are living in America.
A. which B. whose C. whom D. his
4. That’s the man _____ house has burned down.
B
D
6. It may rain, _____ case the match will be put off.
A. of which B. for that
C. in which D. whose
C
1. This is the book ______ I told you about. *
2. She described in her compositions the people and places ______ impressed her most.
①当先行词为指人和指物的两个并列名词词组时，先行词只能用that。
3. Who is the girl _____ drove the car
②当主句是以who或 which 开头的特殊疑问句时。
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
Ⅱ. The differences between “that” and “which” .
D
B
B
4. He’s the only boy in our city ____ enters the Beijing University.
③当先行词被 the very, the only, the next, the last等所修饰时，关系词只能用 that。
5. The third place _____ we are going to visit is Hangzhou.
6. Is that the best _____ you can do
④当先行词是序数词、形容词最高级或被序数词、形容词最高级修饰时，关系词只能用 that。
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
B
B、C
B、C
7. All ____ is needed is money and hands.
8. We heard clearly every word ______ he said.
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
⑤当先行词是指物的 all, one, a lot, (a) little, few, much, none, anything, something, everything, nothing 等词时，或先行词被 all, any, no, much, little, few, every 等限定词所修饰时，关系词只能用that。
B
B、C
9. This is the great moment to _____ I look forward.
10. He was elected our monitor,_____ made us very pleased.
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
当先行词是物，且关系词位于介词后时，或引导非限定性定语从句时，只能用which。换言之，that不能直接位于介词后，也不能引导非限定性定语从句。
A
A
http://www./ module=resource&act=viewuploadtext&ResourceID=7777700011411&NodeID=456
1. The sun heats the earth, ______ is very important to us.
2. He failed in the exam, _____ was expected.
A. that B. as C. which
D. it E. B & C
当先行词为主句时，关系词用which或as，它们的区别在于，as含有“正如”的意思。
Ⅲ.The Attributive clauses caused by “as"
C
B
3. I want to buy the same pen _____ you are using.
4. This is the same bicycle ____ I have lost.
A. that B. as C. which
D. it E. A & B
“the same…as…” 引导的定语从句表示从句所指的物品与先行词所指的物品为同一类事物，即同一个款式的，或同一个牌子等。
“the same…that…”引导的定语从句表示从句所指的物品与先行词所指的物品为同一事物。
B
E
5. This is _____ stone _____ no one can lift it.
6. This is _____ stone _____ no one can lift.
A. so heavy a, that B. so a heavy, as
C. such a heavy, as D. such heavy a, that
“so\such…that….”引导的是结果状语从句，从句的成分是完整的，也就是说that只起连接作用。
“so\such… as…”引导的是定语从句，从句的成分是不完整的，也就是说as代替先行词在从句中充当成分。
A
C
（　　）1. ［2011·课标全国卷］ The prize will go to the writer ________ story shows the most imagination.
A．that B．which C．whose D．what
真题典例
C
（　　）2. ［2011·山东卷］ The old town has narrow streets and small houses ________are built close to each other.
A．they B．where C．what D．that
D
( ) 3. (2010·陕西) The old temple________roof was damaged in storm is now under repair.
A. where B. which C. its D. whose
D
1.We visited a factory ____ makes toys for children.
2.We visited a factory _____ toys are made for children.
3. You can go ______ you want.
A. where B. to which
C. \ D. that
A
D
II.关系副词（ when, where, why）
A
地点状语从句
定从，关系词做主语
定从，关系词做地点状语
= in which
4. Is this the school ______ Tom once studied at
5. Is this school _____ Tom once studied
6. Is this the school at _____Tom once studied
7. Is this school ____ Tom once studied at
8. Is this the school _____Tom once studied
A. the one that B. where
C. the one where D. which
A
D
C
D
B
缺先行词
9.Summer is the season ______ my favorite season is.
10.Summer is the season _____ I like to travel.
11. I will visit you ______ it’s convenient for you.
A. which B. when
C. on which D. that
D
B
定从，关系词做时间状语
定从，关系词做表语，一般用“that”
B
时间状语从句
12. She doesn’t see the reason ______ he would like to join them.
13. She doesn’t see _____ he would like to join them.
14. Do you forget the reason _____ I have told you
A. why B. \ C. that D. for which
E. all above F. which
E
A
B C F
(宾语从句)
(定语从句，关系词做原因状语)
(定语从句，关系词做宾语)
15. Treat others in the way _____ you want to be treated.
16. This is the way _____ I want to tell you.
17. I don’t like the way ______ you speak to her. A. in which B. \
C. that D. all above
D
B/C
D
**Focus on agreement
He is the only one of the students _____ got very good marks in the match.
He is one of the students ____ got good marks in the match.
A. that have B. that has
C. who have D. who has
E. A & C F. B &D
B
E
the only one
the students
1. Word came ______ their army was defeated.
2. We expressed to them our wish _____ was the same as their.
3. It is the hotel _____ we stayed in last night.
4. It was in the hotel _____ we stayed last night.
A. that B. which C. who D. A&B
(同位语从句)
(定语从句)
（强调句）
A
D
D
A
**Tell the difference among the following sentences
新题预测
（　　）1. Mount Wu yi is such an attractive place of interest ________ everyone likes to visit.
A．that B．as C．which D．what
B
（　　）2. This is the small house less than 15 square meters，under________ roof lives a large family of three generations.
A．which 　B．that C．its D．whose
D
http://www./ module=resource&act=viewuploadtext&ResourceID=7777700011411&NodeID=456
Fulfill the following Grammatical blanks and explain the reasons.
The very film 1 is called Titanic is such a beautiful and sad love story 2 is popular with the public, 3 hero and heroine are Jack and Lucy. Lucy is a young beautiful woman with 4 her mother went to America. Jack, 5 won a ship ticket by playing cards, is a poor painter. They met and felt in love with each other on Titanic 6 they had a happy time. Sadly, the nice journey was destroyed by an unexpected storm, 7 Jack lost his life for saving Lucy (everyone will be moved by the selfless way in 8 most people can’t behave in real life ). Before Jack left Lucy forever, he encouraged Lucy to live well for him. 9 is known to all, love is the strongest strength. And that’s the reason 10 Lucy could live alone and told us the moving story.
that
as
whose
whom
who
where
when
which
As
why
～～～～～
～～
～～～～～～
～～
～
～～～～
～～～～～～～～
～
= on which
= during which
～～～～
= for which
正如
所属的关系
Combine the following sentences, using attributive clause and some conjunctions.
Liu Ruoying , who is a famous Chinese actress from Taipei, has acted many films, one of which is A World without Thieves .
Liu Ruoying is a Chinese.
She is an actress.
She is famous.
She is from Taipei.
She has acted many films.
A World without Thieves is one of the films.
Liu Jie is a student.
She is a girl.
She is 16.
Her dad is a teacher.
Her mother is a teacher, too.
She is our monitor.
She is very beautiful.
We all like her.
Liu Jie, a girl student of 16, whose parents are both teachers , is our monitor. She is very beautiful and we all like her.
Homework
Write a paragraph with the title “My English Teacher” in 5 sentences, using attributive clause.
The very film 1 is called Titanic is such a beautiful and sad love story 2 is popular with the public. The hero and heroine are Jack and Lucy. Lucy is a young beautiful woman ,with 3 her mother went to America. Jack, 4 won a ship ticket by playing cards, is a poor painter. They met and fell in love with each other on Titanic_5__ they had a happy time. Sadly, the nice journey was destroyed by an unexpected storm .Jack lost his life for saving Lucy, (everyone will be moved by the selfless way in 6 most people can’t behave in real life ). Before Jack left Lucy forever, he encouraged Lucy to live well for him. 7 is known to all, love has the strongest strength. And that’s the reason 8
Lucy could live alone and told us the moving story.
that
as
whom
who
where
which
As
why
～～～～～
～～
～～
～
～～～～
～
= on which
～～～～
= for which
正如
所属的关系(共23张PPT)
介 词
常见介词的意义和用法
介词和其他词类的搭配
其他注意点
常见介词的意义和用法
___ the morning of June 27, the
Team reached the top of the mountain.
A. by B. At C. in D. On
一、表示时间的介词：
1. at, on, in
at 6 o’clock/that time/noon/night/dawn黎明/ weekend, etc.
on Monday (morning)/July 1,1921/Christmas Day, /a fine morning , etc.
in the morning/ July/spring/2005/the 21st century, etc.
We need to pay this electricity bill ____ January 31st.
A. In B. by C. during D. within
2. in , during
(1).表示“一段时间”，凡是能用in 的地方，一般都可用during 。
(2).during 更强调“在……的过程中”。
因此，如果句中谓语动词表示一种
状态或习惯性的动作，或在此期间多种
事情连续发生，通常用during 。
在20世纪90年代，美国的乡村音乐变得越来越流行。
During the 1990s,American country music has become more and more popular.
3. in , within
1.两个词都可与“一段时间”连用，表“在……
之内” 但within 较正式；
2.在口语中，in + 一段时间，还表示“(从
现在开始)一段时间后”,谓语动词用一般将来时。
他过两天就会回来。
He will come back in two days.
4. in , after , since
in + 一段时间“(从现在开始)一段时间后”、“过……”，谓语动词用一般将来时；
after + 一段时间 “(从过去某时开始)一段时间后”，谓语动词用一般过去时；
He finished the work ____ 3 days.
He will finish the work ____ 3 days.
/
after
in
after + 时间点“在某时之后”，谓语动词可根据句子要求用各种时态；
他经常在6点之后去散步。
He often go for a walk after 6 o’clock.
Since“自从”，表示从过去某一时间开始一直延续到说话时间止，谓语动词一般用现在或过去完成时。
我10岁就开始学习英语了。
I have learned English since I was ten.
二、表地点的介词：
at , on, in
at 一般指比较小的地点和某种活动场所
on 某东西在一个平面上
in 指大地点或表示在某一区域或某一立体空间。
He arrived ___ school at 3 o’clock.
He arrived ___ Beijing yesterday.
at
in
三、表示方位的介词：
1.in , on ,
in 表“在内” ，
to 强调方位，常在外部，
on 表“相连” 。
e.g. London is in the southeast of England .
U.S. is to the west of China .
Mexico is on the south of U.S.
to
Japan is an island country that lies ___ the
east of China.
A. to B in C on D above
2. over , above ，on在……上方
over是“正上方”，
above只表示“在上方”但不一定在“正上方”,
on除可表示“在……上面”，还可表示“在水边或
在左/右边”
on the right 在右边
on the river 在河边
Our plane flew _____ the clouds.
There is a light _____ Li Ming.
above
over
3. under , below 在……下方
under：在……下面（正下方，over的反义词）；
在……之内
　　under the table
桌子下面
　　under the jacket
在夹克内
　　The dog is under the table.
　　这只狗在桌子下面。
below：在……下方（不一定是正下方， above的
反义词）
There are a lot of fishes below the
surface of the water.
4. before在……前面 , behind在……后面 ,
in front of在（某物外部的）前面,
in the front of在（某物内部的）前面
你的名字在我的名字的前面。
Your name comes before mine .
有一辆车停在我们的大门前面。
There is a car parked right in front of our gate.
他喜欢坐在车的前面。
He likes sitting in the front of the car.
四、表示手段的介词：
by , with , in
by表示以某种方法做某事或乘坐某种交通工具；
with后接名词，表示以某种工具或某物做某事；
in后接名词way、语言、风格等。
我们是坐火车来的。
We went there by train.
真正的友谊是不能用钱买的。
True friendship can’t be bought with money.
用红笔写信是不礼貌的。
It’s impolite to write a letter in red .
你不应该用错误的方法来对待这个问题。
You shouldn’t have treated the matter in the wrong way.
五、表示“除了”的介词：
besides, except, except for
besides”除……还有……“
except ”除……其它都……“
except for”除了“，前后是不同类的事物，常有整体与局部的关系。
There is no choice but to do sth.
I could do nothing but obey him.
六、表示“运动方向”的介词：
1.across/through/over,
across 表示从物体表面“穿过”、“通过”;
through 则表示从内部“穿过”、“通过”。
over 翻越过
He climbed over the wall.
I can’t swim across the river. I threw it through the window.
2.to/towards
这两个介词可用作表示某个动作的方向和目标，
都有“朝；向；对于”之意。to与towards表示静态
时，一般能相互转换。如：
The building looks to／towards the sea．
这座楼面朝大海。
当与表示位移的动词come，go，walk， get，
move，run，return等连用时，to习惯指位移的
终点，即有“到达”之意，而towards只指朝向，
并无“到达”之意。如：
He came to this city last week．
他是上周到这个城市的。
to表示的是有意识的“朝、向”，而towards多表示
无意识的“朝、向”。如：
He turned his face to me．
他把脸转向我。
介词和其他词类的搭配
一、介词与动词的搭配：
laugh at , look forward to , depend on ,
look for/after , worry about ,
agree with/to/on , ask for , belong to , hear of/from , listen to , care for ,
wait for , answer for , leave for ,
operate on , aim at , call at/on ,
come across , deal with , consist of ,
live on , die of/from , insist on ,
prepare for , lead to , put up with , prevent…from , send for , refer to , suffer from , stand for , etc.
二、介词与名词的搭配：
1. key, answer, visit, apology, introduction, etc. + to
2. interest, expert, satisfaction , etc. + in
3. mercy, congratulation, etc. + on
4. prize , respect , etc. + for
5. victory over , struggle with ,
三、介词与形容词的搭配：
1. afraid, angry, good, bad, surprised, etc. + at
2. sure, full, fond, proud, worthy, certain, etc. + of
3. angry, strict, careful, busy, popular,+ with
4. weak, strict, rich, interested, + in
5. next, good, polite, kind, cruel, rude, known, married, close, near, similar, due, + to
6. sorry, good, famous, fit, eager, anxious, hungry, etc. + for
7. far, different, free, safe, absent, tired , etc. + from
8. sorry, worried, certain, sure, etc. + about
返回
其他注意点
一、介词的省略：
1.表示时间的介词在next, last, this, these, yesterday, tomorrow, one, any, every, each, some, 等词之前省略；
2.在某些动词之后的介词可以省略：
spend (in), stop (from), prevent (from) , etc.
二、不要漏掉必要的介词：
1.带有介词的短语动词在变为被动语态时，不要漏掉介词。 e.g. Good care should be taken of them .
2.不及物动词作定语时，如果其与被修饰的名词在逻辑上有动宾关系，其后要加相应的介词。
e.g. Years of hard work, very little food, only a small room to live in .(共22张PPT)
专题一 记叙文型完形填空
专题二 夹叙夹议型完形填空
专题三 议论文型完形填空
专题四 说明文型完形填空
第二部分　完形填空
第二部分　完形填空
考纲解读
第二部分 │ 考纲解读
　　高考英语完形填空是英语试题第二部分英语知识运用中的第二节。该部分提供一篇280—320单词的短文，然后挖20个空，空间距在8—10个单词之间，使得完整信息出现中断，要求考生根据所提供的四个选项，选出最佳选项。显然从“最佳”这两个字我们可以看出，选项中干扰性比较大的选项是有的，我们要从上下文的角度选出符合情境的答案。命题原则：突出语篇语境、强调应用、注重实际、体现能力。难度低于阅读理
解中的材料，上下文关系较为紧凑。体裁以记叙文、夹叙夹议文章为主，最近几年也偶尔出现说明文和议论文。试题突出在语篇的基础上考查学生对短文的整体理解能力，同时兼顾对学生运用语法知识、词汇知识的能力以及对事物的逻辑推理、分析判断能力的考查。
命题分析
第二部分 │ 命题分析
从近年来的高考试题看，高考完形填空具有如下特点：
1．文章的第一句通常不挖空
短文的第一个句子是观察全文的窗口，起着让学生尽快熟悉语境、推测文章大意的作用。文章的第一句给学生一个完整的信息可以让许多对完形填空题存有畏惧心理的学生很快安定下来，增强答题的信心。如果第一句很长，前半部分已提供了一定的信息，可以考虑在后半部分挖空。但不管怎样，第一句的第一词绝对不会挖空，如果那样会使许多学生陷入茫然。除了首句一般不挖空外，文章的尾句也较少挖空。
第二部分 │ 命题分析
2．空格在短文中均衡分布
绝大多数空格之间的距离大致相当。
3．考点分布符合考查目的
完形填空题通常以名词、动词、形容词和副词等信息词汇为考查重点，淡化对介词、连词、冠词等结构词的考查，以检测学生在具体情境中灵活运用所学知识的能力。因此，所挖空格处，名词、动词、形容词和副词这几类词一般会占很大比例。
第二部分 │ 命题分析
4．尽力避免相互依存的试题
命题时通常会设法避免挖空两个关系过于密切的单词或短语，否则答错一个题即意味着两个题全错，反过来，答对一个题亦意味着两个题全对。下面两句中的画线部分就属于这种情况：
If you agree(同意)，please say “yes”．If you don’t agree，please say “no”．
题型探究
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　 近年来的完形填空试题在选项的设置上越来越淡化语法结构，重在文意的干扰，即把具体的语言知识融进具体的语言情景中去，考查考生通过上下文的前后提示或暗示，对整体文意进行把握的能力。这种考查方式所占的比例较大，且难度也大，若单纯从句子或个别段落来分析，或许所给的四个答案在语法和结构上都是正确的，若放眼全局，则不一定正确。因此，快速浏览全文，领悟文章主旨，通过上下文的语境来筛选答案是解决这类题的关键。
　探究点一　对上下文语义的考查
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　　例1 ［2011·课标全国卷Ⅰ］ In our discussion with people on how education can help them succeed in life, a woman remembered the first meeting of an introductory __1__ course about 20 years ago.
The professor __2__ the lecture hall, placed upon his desk a large jar filled with dried beans(豆), and invited the students to __3__ how many beans the jar contained…
　　(　　)1. A．art B．history
C．science D．Math
(　　)2. A. searched for B．looked at
C．got through D．marched into
(　　)3. A. count B．guess
C．report D．watch
第二部分 │ 题型探究
【解析】 分析选项我们可以知道，四个备选项词性没有任何区别，从搭配的角度，每个备选项都可以填入空中，甚至有的选项在所在句中完全讲得通，但是分析答案我们可以知道，语境对答案的选择起了决定性作用。
1．C 联系下文a large jar filled with dried beans 及…how many beans the jar contained我们知道，这是一节理科实验课。
2．D　从空格后的placed upon his desk a large jar filled with…我们可以知道，教授走进了教室。
3．B　联系空格后的how many beans the jar contained我们可以知道，教授让学生们猜一下，这个坛子能装多少豆子。
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　 完形填空往往以自身的内容提供完整的语篇信息，其间交织渗透着各类相关的文化背景知识和生活常识，考查考生灵活运用该方面知识的能力。解决这类题目，考生不仅要有广博的知识、丰富的生活经历，还要能够驾驭全文，不仅理解文章的表层意义，而且要弄清文章的深层意义。当对语言的把握不很准确时，可充分利用社会文化知识和生活常识来帮助判断。
　探究点二　对生活常识及文化背景知识逻辑推理的考查
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　 例2 ［2010·北京卷］ Mrs. Neidl’s __1__ that year was, “Try it. We can always paint over it __2__ ！”I began to take __3__.
(　　)1.A.message B．motto
C．saying D．Suggestion
(　　)2.A.again B．more
C．instead D．Later
(　　)3.A.steps B．control
C．charge D．risks
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　 【解析】 此篇三个空格的选择就要依据社会文化知识和我们的生活常识来判断。
1．B　A意为“信息”；B意为“座右铭，箴言”；C意为“谚语”；D意为“建议”。We can always paint over it …这是Mrs. Neidl 信奉的，故选B。
2．D　根据常识可知事情起先都不是一帆风顺的，最终都会成功的。
3．D　take steps意为“采取措施”；B意为“控制”；C意为“负责，掌管”；take risks意为“冒风险”。
第二部分 │ 题型探究
词的固定搭配，特别是动词的搭配在完形填空题中出现的比例也是比较大的，多数题目涉及动词的用法和各种搭配关系，这是由动词在句子中的重要性决定的。动词在搭配关系上与名词、介词、副词的用法紧密相关。解决这类题目要求考生多读、多记，对所学词语或固定搭配牢固掌握，并能灵活运用。
　探究点三　对固定搭配和习惯表达的考查
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　 例3 ［2011·北京卷］ I wasn’t the only one “new” at the game, so I decided to ______ on learning the game, do my best at each practice session, and not be too hard on myself for the things…
(　　)A. focus B．act C．rely D．try
【解析】 A　动词focus与介词on搭配意为“集中精力于……”；act on对……起作用；rely on依靠；try on试穿。
第二部分 │ 题型探究
要做好这种题目，必须尽量将词语辨析与情节推理和逻辑推理结合起来，从词汇意义入手，抓住情节线索解决问题。
　探究点四　对近义、形近词辨析的考查
第二部分 │ 题型探究
　 例4 ［2011·课标全国卷］ She was just __1__ (beginning) to understand the world. And she __2__ (believed) that her firsthand experience could be the __3__.
(　　)4. A. growth B．strength
C．faith D．truth
　 【解析】 D　小女孩认为第一手的经验就是事情的真相。 growth成长；strength力量；faith信仰；truth真理，真相。
第二部分 │ 题型探究
完形填空题中也有考查语法知识的题目。对于它们，考生不仅要理解上下文的逻辑关系，更要有针对性地对语法结构、句式特点，对短文中所设空格中需填的词在句子里作什么成分，哪类词合适，应采取什么形式等等进行必要的分析思考，从而迅速解决问题。比如，选用动词就要考虑各种时态、语态、语气、谓语形式、非谓语形式、及物、不及物、持续性质、非持续性质、主谓搭配以及其如何与其他词类配合使用等一系列问题。熟练地掌握基础语法知识并运用其进行分析解答完形填空题是一种非常有效的解题方法。
　探究点五　对句子语法结构分析的考查
第二部分 │ 题型探究
例5 ［2011·安徽卷］ One afternoon, I walked into a building to ask ______ there were any job opportunities(机会)．
(　　)A. why B．wherever
C．whether D．whenever
【解析】 C　“我”走进一栋大楼询问是否(whether)有工作机会。
应试点睛
第二部分 │ 应试点睛
完形填空题从整体上来说是综合性较强的题型，这部分的考查要求学生有较强的语感，通过对文章的阅读理解，结合所学的语言知识，特别是词法、句法和习惯用法等进行逻辑推理，从上下文语境中找到答题的依据。重点考查动词、名词、形容词、副词等实词在语篇中的运用。熟练掌握解题要点是十分必要的，如：注意全篇的关系，根据上下文的语境，瞻前顾后，找判断依据；注意同义词、近义词的辨析，从词汇、意义判断；从常识、逻辑进行推理；注意习惯用法，前后搭配。
第二部分 │ 应试点睛
第一步：跳读首尾句，判断文体，预测主题。
一般来讲，高考完形填空的首、尾句是不挖空的，先跳读这两句，便可判断体裁，猜想它要讲什么。若首句交代了when, where, who, what，即四个W，那么就是记叙文，很可能就是一个故事，为了测试语篇的理解能力，出题者特别注意选材的趣味性，其结尾往往出人意料，耐人寻味；若首句是提出或解释说明某事物，一般来说是说明文；若首句提出一个论点，那么就是议论文。
第二部分 │ 应试点睛
第二步：通读全文，把握大意。
做完形填空时要注意文章开头提示句的点题作用和短文中完整句的启示作用。首先要快速浏览全文，弄清各段落之间，各层次之间的内在联系，把握文章的完整性。只有这样才符合这种题型的解题思路。
第三步： 逐句细读，确定选项。
大致把握了全文的大意和作者的意图之后，就可以根据上下文，选取与文意最贴切的选项。此时，应遵循先易后难的原则，对有把握的选项“一锤定音”。对没有把握的选项不妨先放一放，接着往下看，往往会出现“柳暗花明”的情况。
第二部分 │ 应试点睛
第四步：再次阅读，复查答案。
复查时从意义和语法两个角度考虑，着眼于全篇。特别注意的是，我们所选的是“最佳”答案而不是“正确”答案。
上述几步可概括为：一步粗读寻思路，二步细读选答案，三步复读纠错误，若能沉着照此办，胸有成竹少失误。(共23张PPT)
第 14 讲 情景交际
1. 感谢与应答
感谢：Thank you very much. / Thanks a lot. / Many thanks. / Thanks for helping me.
应答： That's all right. / You're welcome. / That's OK. / Not at all.
It's my pleasure. / Don't mention it. / It's nothing. / Think nothing of it. / Forget it.
一、日常交际应答语
2. 道歉与应答
道歉： I'm sorry. / I'm sorry to trouble you. / I'm sorry to have kept you waiting.
应答： It doesn't matter. / It's not important. / That's/It's nothing. / Not at all.
That's all right. / Forget it. / That's OK. / No problem. / Not to worry. /Never mind.
一、日常交际应答语
3. 劝告、建议与应答
劝告和建议：
I think you ought to…我想你应该……
If I were you, I'd…如果我是你，我会……
It might be a good idea if you…如果你……这倒是个好主意。
Have you ever thought of…？ 你是否想过要……？
I recommend that…我建议……
I strongly advise you to…我极力主张你……
一、日常交际应答语
You really ought to…你的确应该……
Personally, I think you'd better…依我看，你最好……
Why not do…？ 为什么不……？
Why don't you do…？ 你为什么不……？　　I suggest that…我建议……
What about doing…？ ……怎么样？
How about doing…？ ……怎么样？
一、日常交际应答语
Shall we…？ 我们去……好吗？
Let's…， shall we 让我们去……好吗？
You need (to)…你需要……
肯定的应答： Good idea. / That's great. / Sounds great. / It sounds great. / That's fine. /Why not
否定的应答：I'd love to，but… / I'm afraid… / It's an idea，but…
一、日常交际应答语
4. 请求与应答
请求： May I…？ / Can I / Could I…？ / Do you mind if I…
肯定的应答： With pleasure. / Certainly(Of course) / Sure，go ahead. / Yes，help yourself.
Of course not，go ahead(回答Do you mind if I…的请求).
否定的应答：I'm afraid not. / Better not. / I'd rather you didn't.
一、日常交际应答语
5. 应答对方的要求
肯定的：All right. / I will.
否定的：No way. / Forget it.
— Do remember to call me up when you arrive. —I will.
— I think you should phone Jenny and say sorry to her.
—No way. It was her fault.
一、日常交际应答语
6. 邀请与应答
邀请： Would you like to…？ / Why don't we…？
肯定的应答： That would be fine. / That's very kind of you. /All right. /Yes，I'd love to.
否定的应答：I'd love to，but… / Sorry，I can't. / I'm afraid I can't.
一、日常交际应答语
7. 祝愿、祝贺与应答
祝愿、祝贺： Good luck! / Best wishes to you. /Have a nice/good time/journey. /Congratulations!
Happy New Year! / Merry Christmas! / Happy birthday to you.
应答： Thank you! / The same to you. / You，too. / Happy New Year！(Merry Christmas！)
一、日常交际应答语
8. 鼓励、赞扬与应答
鼓励、赞扬： Very good. / Well done. /Wonderful. /Excellent. /Keep trying. /You can do it.
应答： Thank you. / OK. /I'll try it again.
一、日常交际应答语
9. 提供帮助与应答
主动提供帮助时：Can I help you /What can I do for you /Would you like me to help you
Do you want me to… / Let me…
需要别人帮助时：Yes，please. / Thank you for your help/ Thanks.
不需要别人帮助时：No，thank you./ Thank you all the same. / That's very kind of you, but…
一、日常交际应答语
1. 表示惊奇：Really / How come？(何以会……？) / What a surprise! /Good heavens!
2. 表示同情： I'm sorry to hear that. / What a pity! / That's really unlucky. / Bad luck.
3. 表示安慰： Don't worry. / Don't be afraid. / Take your time. / Take it easy.
Make yourself at home. / It's quite all right. / It'll be OK.
4. 表示鼓励： Come on. / Cheer up. / You can do it. / You will make it.
二、情感态度的表达
5. 表示同意： I quite agree. / I couldn' t agree more. / Exactly. /Certainly. /Absolutely.
That's a good idea. / No problem. / I think so.
6. 表示不同意： Not really. / Not Exactly. / I don't quite agree. /I don't think so. / I'm afraid not.
7. 表示不在乎： So what / Who cares
二、情感态度的表达
解答情景交际题时要做到“四忌”
一忌上词下用
上词下用指的是答句部分沿用了题干句子的重点词、信息词，按表层意思似乎合情合理，但往往为错误的“虚像”，需经进一步分析后才能确定正确选项。如：
用“I don't”应答“Don't forget to come to my birthday party tomorrow”，
易错易混点
用“Don't be sorry”回答“I'm sorry I broke your mirror”，
用“No thanks”回答“Thank you ever so much for the book you sent me.”
避免“上词下用”的误区，一是确认题目涉及的交际功能项目，二是确认句子上下文语境，三是确认正确的话语方式。
易错易混点
【例题】 — I wonder if I could use your telephone.
— ______.
A. I wonder how B. I don't wonder
C. Sorry, it's out of order D. No wonder, here it is.
【答案及解析】 C 尽管该题中反复出现“wonder”一词，但通过仔细审题可确定其考查的功能项目为征求对方意见，问句相当于“Could I use your telephone？”综合语境和话题的分析，正确的答话方式一般为“Of course you can”(肯定)或“Sorry，you can't”(否定)，也只有C项(抱歉，它坏了)符合题意，A、B、D项均属典型的“上词下用”现象，而且D项中的“No wonder”意思为“难怪”，更是和题干内容相差甚远。
易错易混点
二忌中文思维
与上词下用比较，这一误区更具迷惑性，因为无论按题目内容或是按思维方式来考虑，都非常符合中国学生的习惯。显然，掌握英汉两种语言和文化之间的相同和相异之处，对于准确解题至关重要。考生解题失误之一是按汉语的表达方式和结构去套英语，去选答案，这属于语言知识的“负迁移”。
易错易混点
【例题】 — Do you think it's going to rain over the weekend
— ______.
A. I don't believe B. I don't believe it
C. I believe not so D. I believe not
【答案及解析】 D　以Do you think…？这样的句子来提问，用D项来回答表示否定，显然不符合中文的表达习惯，这也正是许多考生选了A、B、C项的原因。另一个更常见的失误是套用中国文化模式。违背英语国家的思维方式和文化习俗，这属于文化方面的“负迁移”。
易错易混点
三忌直接回绝
这主要是指在对方要求得到帮助，提出请求或邀请时，回答过于直接，不够委婉，尽管从语义角度分析是没毛病的，但不符合英语国家的交际习惯。“请求”方面的问话有May I…？/Can I…？/I wonder if I could…/Do you mind if I…？等，“邀请”方面的问话有Will you…？/Would you like to…？/I'd like to invite to…等。在作否定回答时，为了表示礼貌和委婉，通常要用一些委婉词，如but，I'm afraid, I'm sorry, thanks, please, had better等。
易错易混点
【例题】 — I didn't know this was a one way street, officer.
— ______
A. That's all right. B. I don't believe you.
C. How dare you say that D. Sorry, but that's no excuse.
【答案及解析】 D　许多考生有可能选B、C项，这是没有注意到西方人生活、工作中交往的必要礼节，答话时过于生硬，没有顾及他人感情，而正确答案D项正是在充分考虑到说话双方的身份，彼此之间的关系以及说话人的立场和态度的基础上做出的选择。
易错易混点
四忌答非所问
答非所问的错误比较容易察觉，如果问话与答话的内容风马牛不相及的话，考生可以迅速排除。但有时双方会话内容有所关联，仔细推敲才发现其实答语并不切题。最典型的例子是With pleasure和It's a pleasure。前者一般在事前回答，表示“非常愿意”。后者一般在事后回答，表示“不用客气”。
易错易混点
【例题】 — Sorry, I couldn't come to the party. I was sick that day.
— ______.
A. I don't know that B. That's all right
C. Yes, we'll have another party
D. No, the party wasn't held
【答案及解析】 B　 A、C和D三项均明显地答非所问，与问句无关；只有B项能够作出直接的答复。
易错易混点(共3张PPT)
英语音标发音
http://www./s wd=%D3%A2%D3%EF%D2%F4%B1%EA%B7%A2%D2%F4%B1%ED&rsp=5&oq=%D3%A2%D3%EF%D3%EF%D2%F4%B7%A2%D2%F4&f=1&tn=sitehao123&rsv_ers=xn1&rs_src=0
2.英语音标发音
1.音素和国际音标
http://www./p-386733252761.html
1.spare　A. fear　B. earn　　　C. pear　　D. beard
2.navy　 A neighbor　B. nationality C.relative D. valley
3.unit　　A. fierce　　B. nephew 　　 C. juice 　D.sure
4.gentle　A. organise　B. bargain 　C.regular D.charge
5.journey A. merchant B. courtyard C energy　D serious
6. rush A. dull B. butcher C. sugar D push
7. foot A. flood B food C wool D. blood
8. silence A. weight B. ceiling C. bargain D.height
9. occur A. ocean B. opposite C. official D. offer
练一练(共46张PPT)
一、找出以下句子的成分（主、谓、宾、表、定、状、补）
1. Mouse loves rice.
2. God is a girl.
3. I am Miss Chen, the head teacher of Class 1.
4(1) His job is important.
(2) What he does is important.
5(1) This is his job.
(2) This is what he does every day.
6(1) I don’t like his job.
(2) I don’t like what he does every day.
7(1) I don’t know the man, Mr. White.
(2) I don’t know the fact that he is a teacher.
二、名词从句(Noun Clauses)
①在句子中起____作用的句子，
相当于___________
②在复合句中能担任_____、_____、_____、 ______等
③根据它在句中不同的语法功能，可分为
__________(Subject Clause)、
__________(Predicative Clause)、
__________(Object Clause)
__________(Appositive Clause)
名词性从句
noun clause
主语从句
subject clause
宾语从句
object clause
表语从句
predicative clause
同位语从句
appositive clause
二.名词性从句的类型
引导名词从句的连接词：
1）连接代词who, whom, whose, which, what, whoever, whichever, whatever等
连接副词when, where, why, how, whenever, wherever, however
2）连接词 whether/if 若一个名词从句,表达的含义为否用whether/if
3）连接词that若一个句子表达含义和句子结构均完整，用连词that。 “that”在从句中不充当任何成分，没有任何含义。
1.Object clause( 宾语从句)
1)老师教导我们要志向崇高。
The teacher taught us that we should aim high.
2)你是否能成功将取决于你做什么和怎么做。
Your success will depend on what you do and how you do it.
3)他是否能来帮助我们，我感到怀疑。
I doubt whether / if he will come to our help.
4) Whether he will accept your offer, I don’t know.(不用if)
1. The fact is _____ she doesn’t like pop music.
2. My trouble is _____ I don’t have enough
experience.
3. The question is _______ he will be present
or not.
4. What troubled him was ________ he could get
the money.
that
that
whether
whether
/where
/how
2.Predicative clause ( 表语从)句
5. He is absent today. It’s ________ he is
seriously ill.
6. It looks ________ it’s going to rain again.
because
as if
3.Subject clause(主语从句)
1.人生最重要的并非金钱。
What is the most important in life isn’t
money.
2.凡是想看这部电影的人可免费得到一张票。
Whoever wants to see the film may get a free ticket.
3. That the earth is round is known to all.
---It is known to all that the earth is round.
4.That you missed the chance is a pity.
----It is a pity that …
that 无意义, 后接一个完整的句子.
4.Appositive clause (同位语从句):
后面跟同位语从句的名词有: fact, news,idea
thought, question, remark 等.
1. The idea ______ computers will recognize
human voices surprises many people.
2. The possibility ______ the majority of the
labour force will work at home is often discussed.
3. I have no idea ______ he has gone.
4. They are thinking about the question _______
they could succeed in the competition.
5. Please tell us the truth ______ did that for us.
that
that
where
how
who
三、名词性从句考点：
１. 语序问题
4. 连接词
that, what, which, whether, if, who, whom,whose,
whatever, whichever ,whoever, whomever, whosever, when, where, why, how …
6. it 作形式主语,形式宾语的用法
２. 时态问题
7. 同位语从句与定语从句区别
5. 名词性从句中的虚拟语气
３. 主谓一致问题
重点
合成一个句子：
1) He would be back in an hour. He said…
→He said (that) he would be back in an hour.
2) Do they speak English We want to know…
→We want to know if/whether they speak English.
3) What is her name He asks me…
→He asks me what her name is.
考点1. 语序: 连接词＋陈述句
注意：在think, believe, suppose, expect 等动词之后, 宾语从句中谓语的否定常转移到主句的谓语上，称为否定转移。
I don’t think he will see you.
We don’t expect he is coming.
I don’t believe he will go.
No one can be sure ____ in a million years.
A. what will man look like
B. what man will look like
C. man will look like what
D. what look will man like
1) When will Professor Li give us a talk We wanted to know …
→We wanted to know when Professor Li would give us a talk.
2) Jim is a good student. The teacher said …
→The teacher said (that) Jim was a good student.
3) Has Mr. Green been in Beijing for five years He asked …
→He asked if/whether Mr. Green had been in Beijing for five years.
1. 如果主句是过去的时态(包括一般过去时, 过去进行时), 那么从句的时态一定要用相对应的过去的某种时态。
2.主句的动词用过去时，从句表示客观事实，格言，谚语等，从句谓语动词用一般现在时
Our physics teacher once told us that light ______ (travel) faster than sound.
travels
3.主句的动词用一般现在时，从句谓语可根据从句谓语动词发生的时间选用各种时态
Tom says that Mary _____ (go) abroad last year and ________ (be) there for nearly 5 months.
went
has been
考点3 主谓一致问题
1) 何时开会还没有决定。
When the meeting will begin _____ (have) not been decided yet .
2) 他们何时出发和他们去哪里还没有决定。
单个的主语从句作主语时，谓语动词一般用____形式。如果是两个或两个以上的主语从句作主语，谓语动词则用____形式。由两个或多个连接词引导一个主语从句，谓语动词用____形式。
单数
复数
has
When they will start and where they will go _____ (have) not been decided yet .
3) 何时何地开会还没有决定。
When and where the meeting will begin ____ (have) not been decided yet .
has
单数
have
1. 引导词that（当名词性从句中不缺任何成分时用that)
that 可省略的情况： 单个宾语从句中的that可省略
that不可省略的情况： 1. 主语从句 2. 表语从句 3. 同位语从句 4. 用it做形式宾语的宾语从句 5. 并列的宾语从句中的后几个从句的引导词that 不能省略
考点4 名词性从句连接词的选用
that/ 省略
1)I don’t think ______ she is coming. 2)It is a pity _____ he has made such a mistake. 3)The reason is ______ he is careless . 4)The news _____ our team won the match inspired us. 5)I don’t think it necessary _____ you should read English aloud. 6)He told me _____ his father had died and ____ he had to make a living alone.
(that)
that
that
that
that
(that)
that
2. 其它连接代词和副词的选用
主要根据名词性从句中的具体意义,正确的选择who、which、when、where、why、how 等连接词，这些连接词既具有疑问含义，又起连接作用，同时在从句中充当各种成分。
1) 我们何时举行运动会还没有决定。 _____ we shall hold our sports meeting is not decided. 2) 我不知道昨天谁打破了玻璃。 I don’t know ______ broke the glass yesterday. 3) 我不知道他长的什么样子。 I have no idea _______ he looks like. 4) 这就是我忘记眼镜的地方。 This is _______ I left my glasses.
When
who
what
where
1) I think that it is unnecessary for me to speak louder.
2) His mother is satisfied with what he has done.
3) That he was able to come made us happy.
4) This is what makes us interested.
5) The reason was that Tom had never seen the million-pound note before.
所引导的从句中是否缺主语、表语或宾语 汉语意义 能否省略
what
that
3. that 和what 的选用
that 和 what 都可引导所有的名词从句。
填that 还是 what？
1) ______ he wants is a book.
2) ______ he wants to go there is obvious. 3) The result is ______ we won the game. 4) This is _____ we want to know. 5) Is _____ he told us true 6) We should pay attention to ______ the teacher is saying. 7) I have no doubt _____ he will come. 8) I have no idea _____ he did that afternoon.
What
That
that
what
what
what
that
what
1) 在主语从句中，只有用it作形式主语时, whether和if 都能引导主语从句, 否则, 也只能用whether。如:
Whether we shall attend the meeting hasn’t been decided yet.
It hasn’t been decided whether (if) we shall attend the meeting.
4. if 和whether 的选用
2) 在表语从句和同位语从句中。如：
The question is whether the film is worth seeing.
The news whether our team has won the match is unknown.
4. if 和whether 的选用
3) 在介词之后。(介词往往可以省略) 如:
It all depends (on) whether they will support us.
4) 后面直接跟动词不定式时。如：
　 He doesn’t know whether to stay or not.
5) 后面紧接or not 时。如：
　 We didn’t know whether or not she was ready.
4. if 和whether 的选用
4. if 和whether 的选用
不能使用if 的情况： 1）主语从句
2）表语从句 3）同位语从句 4）介词后的宾语从句 5）whether to do 做动词宾语不能用if to do
6）whether or not 连在一起引导宾语从句时不用if.
if / whether
1) I asked her __________ she had a bike. 2) _______ we will hold a party in the open air tomorrow depends on the weather. 3) We’re worried about ________ he is safe. 4) I don’t know ___________ he is well or not. 5) I don’t know ________ or not he is well. 6) The question is _________ he should do it. 7) The doctor can hardly answer the question ________ the old man will recover soon. 8) I don’t know _______ to go.
if / whether
Whether
whether
whether
whether
whether
whether
whether
基本句型：
It is +形容词、名词、过去分词+ that ... + (should) do
形容词: important ,necessary, natural, strange…
名词: a pity, a shame, no wonder …
过去分词: suggested, ordered, demanded, insisted …
1. It is ordered that he _____ the examination
A. takes B. has to take C. must take D. take
2. It is strange that he _____ you this.
A. would tell B. should tell
C. had told D. has told
考点5 虚拟语气 a)主语从句中的虚拟语
We suggested that the meeting ___________
A. should put off B. be put off
C. was put off D. putting off
表示建议、要求、命令、坚持等动词suggest, insist, advise, propose, demand, require, request, order, command后的从句谓语动词用_________________
注意: suggest 当表示“暗示、表明”讲时，insist 表示“坚持认为”之意时，从句不用虚拟语气
(should) + do/be done
The smile on his face suggested that he ______ (was/be/is)satisfied with our work.
was
考点5 虚拟语气
b)宾语从句中的虚拟语气
a. I wish I ______(know) the answer now.
b. I wish he __________(pass) the exam yesterday.
c. I wish I ________ (fly) to the moon in a few years.
1. 对现在虚拟时，that从句中谓语用过去时
2. 对过去虚拟时，用had＋过去分词
3. 对将来虚拟时，用would (might等)＋动词原形
knew
had passed
would fly
在suggestion, proposal, idea, plan, order, advice 等名词后面的表语从句、同位语从句中要用虚拟语气，即_______________________
His suggestion that you _____ once more sounds reasonable.
A. try B. tries C. must try D. can try
2. The order given by the commander was that they _____ until the commander allowed they to.
A. stopped B. didn’t stop C. stop D. not stop
考点5 虚拟语气
c)表语和同位语从句中的虚拟语气
(should) + do/be done
1. I think that worthwhile that we spent so much money on these books.
2. That is hard to decide when and where we will held our sports meeting.
3. It is obvious to the students whether they should get well prepared for their future.
4. It doesn’t matter that you will come or not.
it
It
that
whether
找出下列句子中的错误
当主语从句较长，而谓语较短时，常常将从句______，而用it作为形式主语置于句首。it 也可作形式宾语。
后置
考点6 it作形式主语和形式宾语
用it 作形式主语的结构
(1) It is＋名词＋从句
It is a fact that … 事实是……
It is an honor that ……非常荣幸
It is common knowledge that…是常识
(2) It is＋形容词＋从句 (多用 should)
It is natural that… 很自然……
It is strange that… 奇怪的是……
(3) It is ＋ 不及物动词＋从句
It seems that… 似乎……
It happened that… 碰巧……
It appears that… 似乎……
(4) It is ＋ 过去分词＋从句
It is reported that… 据报道……
It has been proved that… 已证实…
It is said that… 据说……
1）It is certain that he will come.
2）It is said that some American friends will visit our school next week.
3）It happened that we were out for a walk yesterday evening.
在宾语从句中, 如果宾语从句后有宾语补足语，为了保持句子平衡, 用it作形式宾语, 将从句放于句尾, 常用于此句型的动词有: make, find, see, hear, feel, think...
1）I think it necessary that we take plenty of hot water every day.
2）I think it a pity to waste the food.
考点7 同位语从句的引导和辨别
1.同位语从句的格式：n.+ 连接词 + 从句 2.能接同位语从句的名词有：fact, idea, news, information, order, belief, advice, suggestion等抽象名词
3.连接词通常是that,也可根据含义选用whether, what, when, where 等来引导同位语从句。
1) I have no idea _________ he comes from. 2) He can’t answer the question ________ he got the money. 3) He gave us many suggestions ________ we should get up earlier and take more exercise. 4) I have no doubt ________ he will win. 5) I have some doubt ________ he will win.
that/ whether / where/ how
where
how
that
that
whether
4. 同位语从句和定语从句的区别
①同位语从句说明的名词大都是抽象名词;
定语从句所修饰、限定的名词或代词有抽象的也有不抽象的。
We express the hope that they will come to visit China again.
Those who want to go please sign their names here.
1) The news that he told us made us happy.
2) The news that we won the game made us happy.
3) We will consider the suggestion that we should build a new library.
4) We will consider the suggestion that he put forward at the meeting.
同位语从句or定语从句
定语从句
同位语从句
定语从句
同位语从句
5) The news that he told me is that Mike would go abroad next year.
6) The news that Mike would go abroad next year is told by him.
7) She expressed the hope that they would come to visit Shanghai again.
8) The hope (that) she expressed is that they would come to visit Shanghai again.
定语从句
同位语从句
同位语从句
定语从句
同位语从句or定语从句
请看这两句有什么不同？
The news that Mr. Li will be our new English teacher is true.
The news that he told me yesterday is true.
定语从句 同位语从句
that
4. 同位语从句和定语从句的区别
The news that they won the match is true.
(news和从句没有逻辑关系)
The order when we should go back hasn’t reached us.
(order和从句没有逻辑关系)
The news that you told us yesterday is true.
(news是told的逻辑宾语)
The day when New China was founded will never be forgotten.
(day是founded 的逻辑状语)
②同位语从句所说明的名词与从句没有逻辑关系；
定语从句所限定的名词是从句逻辑上的主语、宾语、表语、定语、状语等。
4. 同位语从句和定语从句的区别(共49张PPT)
专题七　非谓语动词
1．(2011年高考大纲全国卷)The island，________ to the mainland by a bridge, is easy to go to.
A．joining　　　　　　　　B．to join
C．joined D．having joined
解析：句意：这个岛屿由一座桥和大陆相连，很容易到达。join与the island之间是逻辑上的动宾关系，故此处用过去分词。
答案：C
2．(2011年高考大纲全国卷)Sarah pretended to be cheerful，________ nothing about the argument.
A．says B．said
C．to say D．saying
解析：句意：萨拉假装很开心，对那次争论只字未提。Sarah和say之间是逻辑上的主谓关系，故此处用现在分词形式。
答案：D
3．(2011年高考山东卷)Look over there－there's a very long, winding path________up to the house.
A．leading B．leads
C．led D．to lead
解析：句意：看那儿——有一条很长的，蜿蜒曲折的小路通向那座房子。leads 用作谓语动词，本题的 there be 句型中已有 is，故排除B项，path与1ead之间是逻辑上的主谓关系，又由题中的动词 look可以判断 lead 这一动作不是表示将来的动作，故可以排除过去分词短语和不定式短语充当的后置定语，即排除C、D两项。在本句中leading up to the house 作后置定语，修饰path，相当于定语从句which leads up to the house。故选A。
答案：A
4．(2011年高考天津卷)Passengers are permitted________only one piece of hand luggage onto the plane.
A．to carry B．carrying
C．to be carried D．being carried
解析：句意：乘客只被允许带一件手提行李登机。该题考查permit 的固定搭配be permitted to do sth.(被允许做某事)的用法。动词不定式在permit sb.to do 中作宾语补足语，但在be permitted to do 中作主语补足语。可排除B、D选项。to carry是动词不定式一般式的主动形式，而 to be carried则是动词不定式一般式的被动形式。根据 passengers 与 carry 之间的主动关系可确定选A项。
答案：A
5．(2011年高考上海卷)Today we have chat rooms，text messaging，emailing...but we seem ________the art of communicating face to face.
A．losing B．to be losing
C．to be lost D．having lost
解析：句意：现在我们有聊天室，能传递文本信息，还可发电子邮件……但是我们似乎正在失去面对面交流的技能。考查非谓语动词作表语。seem后通常用动词不定式，排除A和D两项；此处非谓语动词后有名词the art of communicating face to face作其宾语，所以排除C项(被动形式)，故选B。
答案：B
[动词不定式]
一、动词不定式作主语
不定式短语作主语时，如果主语较长，往往在句首用it作形式主语，而将真正的主语(不定式)移到谓语动词之后，形成“it＋谓语＋(作主语的)不定式”结构，以避免头重脚轻，保持句子结构的平衡。
[典例1]　It is my honor ________here to spend some time with you.
A．to be invited B．inviting
C．being invited D．to invite
[解析]　此处表示具体的某一次动作，应用不定式结构，故排除B、C。根据逻辑关系可知，“我”是“被邀请”，因此用动词不定式的被动式。故选A。此时前面的It只是形式主语，后面的不定式才是真正的主语。
[答案]　A
二、动词不定式作表语
动词不定式可作表语，通常说明或解释主语的内容，也可表示将来的动作。
[典例2]　The purpose of new technology is to make life easier，________it more difficult.
A．not making B．not make
C．not to make D．to not make
[解析]　前面用动词不定式作表语说明新技术的目的，后面用不定式的否定式作表语，进一步说明新技术的作用。不定式的否定形式是在不定式的标志词to前加not。故答案为C。
[答案]　C
三、动词不定式作宾语
英语中有一部分动词常跟不定式作宾语。常见的这类动词有：agree同意；fail未能；promise保证；afford承担得起；forget忘记；refuse拒绝；happen碰巧；attempt试图；hesitate犹豫；seek试图；determine决定；prepare准备；pretend假装等。
[典例3]　There were many talented actors out there just waiting________.
A．to discover B．to be discovered
C．discovered D．being discovered
[解析]　discover与many talented actors之间是动宾关系，且强调将来，故用不定式的被动语态。
[答案]　B
想要干 want, wish, hope, expect, seek, attempt, aim, claim，would like / love, desire, swear
早打算 plan, prepare, mean, arrange
同意否 agree, promise, undertake, offer, choose, refuse, afford
问问看 ask, beg，(ask to do 要求做…)
决定了 decide, determine / be determined, make up one's mind
尽力干 try, manage(反义词fail), struggle, strive
别装蒜 pretend
四、动词不定式作宾补
1．有些动词(短语)后面常接带to的不定式作宾语补足语。常见的这类动词有：advise劝告；force迫使；instruct指示；ask要求；intend打算要；beg请求；expect期望；invite邀请；forbid禁止；remind提醒；urge激励；order命令；permit允许；teach劝诫；wish希望；persuade说服。动词短语有：call on，count on，rely on，depend on，long for，wait for等。
[典例4]　We can't count on a man like Jim ________us the necessary help.
A．to give B．giving
C．to be given D．given
[解析]　count on sb.to do sth.表示“依靠(指望)某人做……”。
[答案]　A
【特别提醒】hope, welcome, agree, suggest, demand不能跟sb. to do。
(╳)hope sb. to do sth.应改为→ wish / expect sb. to do sth.
(╳)welcome sb. to do sth.应改为→ sb. be welcome to do sth.
(╳)agree sb. to do sth.应改为→ allow / permit sb. to do sth.
(╳)suggest sb. to do sth.应改为→advise sb. to do sth. / suggest sb. (should)do sth.
(╳)demand sb. to do sth.应改为→require sb. to do / demand sb. (should )do sth.
2．在think，consider，believe，find，feel，know，declare，prove，suppose，imagine等词后面，常跟“to be＋形容词(也可以是名词或反身代词)”结构，但在主动语态中to be常可以省去。
[典例5]　We sometimes imagine a desert island ________a sort of paradise，where the sun always shines.
A．be B．being
C．不填 D．is
[解析]　表示“想像某人/某物……”，用imagine sb./sth.(to be)＋n./adj.结构，其中to be可省略。
[答案]　C
3．有些动词，主要是感官动词和使役动词，它们可后接不带to的不定式作宾语补足语，如：see，notice，observe，feel，hear，have，make，let等，但如果是在被动语态的句子中，就要用带to的不定式作主语补足语。
[典例6]　My parents have always made me ________about myself，even when I was twelve.
A．feeling well B．feeling good
C．feel well D．feel good
[解析]　表示“使某人做……”，用make sb.do sth.结构，后面用不带to的不定式作宾语补足语。feel good意为“感觉好”。well也可以用作形容词，但其意思是“健康的”。
[答案]　D
五、动词不定式作定语
1．不定式用在the first，the second，the last，the only等短语后面作定语。
[典例7]　His first book ________next month is based on a true story.
A．published B．to be published
C．to publish D．being published
[解析]　考查非谓语动词作后置定语。由时间状语next month可知所填非谓语动词表示将来的动作，用动词不定式，其逻辑主语与publish之间存在动宾关系，故用不定式的被动式，故选B。
[答案]　B
2．不定式常放在某些名词或代词后面作定语。不定式作定语与被修饰的中心词之间常表现为主谓关系或动宾关系。
The next train to arrive was from New York.(主谓关系)
It was a game to be remembered.(动宾关系)
[典例8]　(2011年高考湖南卷)The ability________an idea is as important as the idea itself.
A．expressing B．expressed
C．to express D．to be expressed
[解析]　句意：表达观点的能力和观点本身同等重要。ability后通常跟动词不定式(短语)作后置定语，故排除A、B两项；此处the ability与express是逻辑上的主谓关系，表示主动意义，故排除D项。
[答案]　C
六、动词不定式作状语
1．不定式作原因状语。不定式也可跟在某些形容词或动词后面作原因状语。
[典例9]　We were astonished ________the temple still in its original condition.
A．finding B．to find
C．find D．to be found
[解析]　考查非谓语动词。句意：我们吃惊地发现那座寺院仍然处于原始状态。空格处为动词不定式作状语，表示原因。
[答案]　B
2．不定式作目的状语。不定式作目的状语既可放在句首也可放在句尾。为了加强语气，也可用“so as to do”或“in order to do”结构作目的状语。in order to既可放在句首也可放在句尾，so as to较少置于句首。
[典例10]　With Father's Day around the corner，I have taken some money out of the bank ________presents for my dad.
A．buy B．to buy
C．buying D．to have bought
[解析]　句意：父亲节将要到来，为了给爸爸买礼物我已经从银行取了一些钱。动词不定式作目的状语。“买礼物”这一动作发生在“从银行取了一些钱”这一动作之后，所以可排除D项。
[答案]　B
3．不定式作结果状语。具体形式如下：
“too＋adj.＋adv.＋to do”意为“太……而不能”，“adj.＋adv.＋enough＋to do”意为“足以……”，“only/just to do”表示出乎意料的结果。
[典例11]　Do you think you are brave enough ________bungee jumping
A．trying B．in trying
C．to try D．and try
[解析]　adj./adv.＋enough后用不定式作结果状语。
[答案]　C
七、“疑问词＋动词不定式”结构
疑问词“what/how/when/where/which＋动词不定式”结构可作主语、表语、宾语等。
[典例12]　As a journalist you should first decide what events ________before you make some interviews.
A．reported B．to report
C．to be reported D．reporting
[解析]　考查“疑问词＋不定式”结构作宾语。动词report的逻辑主语是you，因此在此处应用不定式的主动语态。
[答案]　B
[动名词]
动名词主要起名词的作用，在句中作主语、宾语、表语以及定语，不能作状语，有各种形式的变化。
一、动名词作主语
动名词可直接放在句首作主语。在一些句子中，常用it作形式主语，而把能用作真正主语的动名词放在后面。it is后可接no use，no good等名词，也可接useless，nice等形容词。
[典例1]　In my mind，________that famous university will be the only way to become a world class writer.
A．attending B．attended
C．attend D．having attended
[解析]　动名词短语作主语，表示笼统的行为。又因该句没有明确的时间状语，不强调动作的完成，故排除D项。
[答案]　A
二、动名词作宾语
1．有些动词(短语)后面要求跟动名词作宾语。
常见的后跟动名词作宾语的动词有：admit承认；excuse原谅；postpone拖延；practice练习；consider考虑；delay耽搁；imagine想像；deny否认；suggest建议；enjoy喜欢；escape逃避；permit允许等。
常见的后跟动名词作宾语的动词短语有：can't help，feel like，leave off，put off，keep on，give up，look forward to，devote to，get used to，pay attention to，be fond of，be worth等。
[典例2]　The man denied ________anything in the supermarket when he was questioned by the police.
A．to have stolen B．having been stealing
C．having stolen D．to steal
[解析]　从后面的“when he was questioned”判断，动作已经发生过。此处表示这个人否认偷过东西，强调动作产生的影响；此处用deny doing sth.表示“否认做过某事”。故此处应用动名词的完成式。
[答案]　C
2．在have difficulty(trouble，problem，a hard time，fun，a good time)(in)＋动名词；be busy(in)＋动名词；waste time(in)＋动名词；lose time(in)＋动名词；there is no point(in)＋动名词等结构中，动名词作介词in的宾语，in常省去。
[典例3]　I had great difficulty ________the suitable food on the menu in that restaurant.
A．find B．found
C．to find D．finding
[解析]　have difficulty(in)doing sth.意为“做某事有困难”。
[答案]　D
[典例4]　—Robert is indeed a wise man.
—Oh，yes.How often I have regretted ________his advice!
A．to take B．taking
C．not to take D．not taking
[解析]　regret doing sth.“后悔已做某事”，动作已发生；regret to do sth.“后悔要做某事”，动作还没有发生。此处表示“后悔没有听取他的建议”，事情已发生，故用regret doing sth.，动名词的否定形式是在doing前加否定词not。
[答案]　D
三、过去分词与现在分词
现在分词在句中可用作表语、定语、状语等。
过去分词在句中作定语、状语以及表语，不能作谓语。
1．分词作表语
现在分词作表语常常表示主语所具有的特质或特征，过去分词作表语多表示主语处于某种状态。通常情况下现在分词译为“令人……的”，过去分词译为“某人感到……”。
[典例5]　In April，thousands of holidaymakers remained ____ abroad due to the volcanic ash cloud.
A．sticking B．stuck
C．to be stuck D．to have stuck
[解析]　动词stick与它的逻辑主语thousands of holidaymakers之间存在动宾关系，且该动作发生在过去，故用过去分词。
[答案]　B
2．分词作定语
(1)现在分词作定语既可放在所修饰的词之前，作前置定语，也可放在所修饰的词之后，相当于一个定语从句。过去分词作定语时，一般置于其所修饰的名词之后，其意义相当于一个定语从句。
[典例6]　I'm calling to enquire about the position ________in yesterday's China Daily.
A．advertised B．to be advertised
C．advertising D．having advertised
[解析]　我打电话来咨询一下昨天《中国日报》上刊登的职位信息。advertise和position是逻辑上的动宾关系，故用过去分词表被动，此处相当于：which was advertised。
[答案]　A
(2)分词作后置定语可分为限制性(紧跟在所修饰的中心词之后)和非限制性(用逗号将其与所修饰的中心词分开)两种，其作用分别相当于一个限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。
[典例7]　So far nobody has claimed the money ________in the library.
A．discovered B．to be discovered
C．discovering D．having discovered
[解析]　该空在句中作后置定语修饰the money，the money与discover之间存在动宾关系，故用过去分词形式。句意：到目前为止还没有人来认领在图书馆所发现的钱。
[答案]　A
3．分词作宾语补足语
常跟分词作宾语补足语的动词有：catch，have，get，keep，hear，find，feel，leave，make，notice，observe，watch等。
[典例8]　(2011年高考浙江卷)Even the best writers sometimes find themselves ______ for words.
A．lose B．lost
C．to lose D．having lost
[解析]　句意：即使是最好的作家有时候也会发现自己找不到合适的话表达自己。find 是表示心理变化的动词，其后的themselves 是宾语，空格处应作为宾语补足语使用，所以要使用lost, 表示“迷惘的，不知所措的”，lost 是形容词。
[答案]　B
4．分词作状语
分词可作时间状语、原因状语、伴随状语以及结果状语等。
[典例9]　(2011年高考天津卷)________into English, the sentence was found to have an entirely different word order.
A．Translating B．Translated
C．To translate D．Having translated
[解析]　句意：被翻译成英语时，这个句子的语序完全不同。translating 作状语，表示该动作与句子主语间的逻辑关系是主动关系，不符合本题题意；translated 作状语，表示该动作与句子主语间的逻辑关系是被动关系，符合语意及语法要求；to translate为不定式作状语，往往表示一种目的或结果，而 having translated 作状语，则强调该动作先于句子谓语动词所表示的动作发生，均不符合语境。
[答案]　B
The living room is clean and tidy，with a dining table already ________for a meal to be cooked.
A．laid B．laying
C．to lay D．being laid
[解题思路]　句意：起居室干净又整洁，为做饭准备的餐桌也已摆好。with后跟复合结构，a table与lay之间为被动关系，且有already暗示，故空白处应用过去分词表被动和完成。
[答案]　A
[考点透析]　独立主格结构和with结构在近几年的高考中都有所体现，主要考查其在句中充当时间、条件或在句尾作方式、伴随状语，今后的高考中仍会考查此结构。
The guests had left, so he began to take a short rest.
The guests having left，he began to take a short rest.
If weather permits，we'll go sightseeing.
Weather permitting，we'll go sightseeing.(独立主格结构表条件)
All things have been considered，her paper is of greater value than yours
All things considered，her paper is of greater value than yours.(独立主格结构表条件)
[误区警示]　①一种习惯用法是：在“名词/代词＋介词短语”构成的独立主格结构中，名词/代词和介词后面的名词没有任何冠词或所有格修饰，也不用with引导。
Last night I followed him here and climbed in，sword in hand.
②独立主格结构也可以由“with＋名词/代词＋不定式/形容词/副词/介词短语/分词”构成。
With the machine to do all the work，we will finish our task on time.
He stared at her，with his mouth open.
With his parents away，the boy became naughtier.
He stood at the window，with his hands in his pockets.
with复合结构
【完成例句】
1.小孩跟着他，他不得不回到公园。
With the children following him, he had to go back to the park.
2.工作完成了，他可以回家了。
With the work finished, he could go home.
3.这么多书要看，我不能外出。
With so many books to read, I could not go out.
4.天气这么热，他们入室休息了。
With the weather so hot, they went in to have a rest.
5.随着彩电价格降了50%，公司处境艰难。
With the prices of color TV down by 50%, the company has a very hard time.
6.他妻子走下楼梯，手里拿着一本书。
His wife came down the stairs, with a book in her hand / a book in her hand / a book in hand.
7.升国旗的时候学生们站成一线。
The students stood in line with the national flag being raised.
【结论】with复合结构是独立主格结构的一种，常在句中充当状语和定语，是英语中的一种常见结构。它由“with＋宾语＋补语”组成，其中，宾语和宾补之间必须有逻辑一致关系。
其结构为：
adv. / prep.
adj.
＋to do(表示将要发生的动作)
doing(主动，同时) / being done(正在被)
done(被动或完成)
with ＋
宾语＋
to do sth. 与被修饰的名词有①主谓关系；②动宾关系；名词前有序数词或最高级；③不定式修饰一些表示方向、原因、时间、机会、权利等抽象名词
名词＋doing sth. ①正在进行的动作；②经常性动作或现在(或当时)的状态；③即将发生的动作
to be done 表示将要被做
done 表示已经完成的或表被动的动作[having (been)done不可作定语]
being done 表示正在发生的被动动作
1. Mrs. White showed her students some old maps ______ from the library. (2010·全国Ⅰ)
A. to borrow B. to be borrowed C. borrowed D. borrowing
解析：选C。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：怀特夫人给学生们展示了一些从图书馆借来的旧地图。old maps与borrow之间是被动关系，borrowed表示被动或完成，符合语境。
2. With Father’s Day around the corner, I have taken some money out of the bank ______ presents for my dad. (2010·全国Ⅰ)
A. buy B. to buy C. buying D. to have bought
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：父亲节将要到来，为了给爸爸买礼物,我已经从银行取了一些钱。非谓语动词中不定式作目的状语。
3. Though ______ to see us，the professor gave us a warm welcome.(2010·全国Ⅱ)
A. surprising B. was surprised C. surprised D. being surprised
解析：选C。句意为：尽管教授看到我们很惊讶，但还是热情地欢迎了我们。though引导让步状语从句，其后省略了he was。 surprised多指“某人对某事感到惊讶”。
4. Lucy has a great sense of humor and always keeps her colleagues ______ with her stories. (2010·上海)
A. amused B. amusing C. to amuse D. to be amused
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作宾语补足语。句意为：Lucy很有幽默感，总是讲故事给她的同事们消遣。colleagues与amused 之间为逻辑上的被动关系。
5.______ the city center, we saw a stone statue of about 10 metres in height.(2010·上海)
A. Approaching B. ApproachedC. To approachD. To be approached
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：接近市中心时，我们看到了一座大约10米高的石雕。由语境可知，逗号前的部分为时间状语；approach与其逻辑主语we之间是主动关系。
6. That is the only way we can imagine______ the overuse of water in students’ bathrooms. (2010·上海)
A. reducing B. to reduce C. reduced D. reduce
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：这是我们能想到的减少学生们在浴室内过度用水的唯一办法。动词不定式作定语修饰名词短语the only way。the way to do sth.表示“做……的途径、方式”。
7. He had a wonderful childhood,______ with his mother to all corners of the world.(2010·安徽)
A. travel B. to travel C. traveled D. traveling
解析：选D。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：他有一个快乐的童年，那时他跟着他的母亲周游世界。主语he与动词travel之间为逻辑上的主动关系。
8. Lots of rescue workers were working around the clock, _______ supplies to Yushu， Qinghai Province after the earthquake.(2010·福建)
A. sending B. to send C. having sent D. to have sent
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：地震之后，许多救援工人正在夜以继日地工作，为青海玉树地区发送物资。动词send和主语workers构成主谓关系，因此用现在分词形式作伴随状语。
9. Dina, ______ for months to find a job as a waitress, finally took a position at a local advertising agency.(2010·湖南)
A. struggling B. struggled C. having struggled D. to struggle
解析：选C。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：Dina奋斗了几个月的时间想找份服务员的工作，终于在一家当地的广告公司找到了一份工作。Dina与struggle之间为逻辑上的主谓关系，且struggle发生在take之前，故用现在分词的完成时态作定语。
10. So far nobody has claimed the money_______ in the library. (2010·湖南)
Discovered B. to be discovered
C. Discovering D. having discovered
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：目前为止，没有人来认领图书馆里发现的钱。money和discover之间是逻辑上的动宾关系，故用过去分词作定语。
11. The lady walked around the shops,_______ an eye out for bargains. (2010·江西)
A. keep B. kept C. keeping D. to keep
解析：选C。考查非谓语动词作伴随状语。句意为：这位女士在商
店周围闲逛，注意看有没有特价商品。句子主语lady和keep 之间是主动关系，keeping an eye out for bargains为现在分词短语作伴随状语。
12. There were many talented actors out there just waiting _______.(2010·江西)
A. to discover B. to be discovered
C. discovered D. being discovered
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：很多有才华的演员等待被发现。动词不定式作目的状语，且actors与discover之间是被动关系。
13. We were astonished _______ the temple still in its original condition.(2010·辽宁)
A. finding B. to find C. find D. to be found
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：我们吃惊地发现那座庙仍然还是原来的状况。be astonished 后应该跟动词不定式作原因状语。
14. —It’s no use having ideas only.
—Don’t worry. Peter can show you _____ to turn an idea into an act.(2010·辽宁)
A. how B. who C. what D. where
解析：选A。考查“疑问词+不定式”的用法。句意为：——光有主意是没用的。——不用担心，彼特可以教你怎样把主意转变为行动。虽然四个词都可以和动词不定式连用，但是意义不同。how表示“怎样”，强调方式；who和what是连接代词，一般在不定式短语中作宾语，此句中动词不定式有宾语，不再需要宾语，所以排除；where强调地点，与上句不对应。由句意可知，此处表示“如何……”，故选A。
15. Alexander tried to get his work ______ in the medical circles.(2010·辽宁)
A. to recognize B. recognizing C. recognize D. recognized
解析：选D。考查非谓语动词作宾语补足语。句意为：亚历山大试图让他的工作在医学领域得到认可。宾语work和recognize之间为被动关系。
16. ______ at my classmates’ faces, I read the same excitement in their eyes.(2010·北京)
Looking B. Look C. To look D. Looked
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：看着同学们的面孔，我从他们眼中读出了同样的兴奋。looking at my classmates? faces与句子主语I之间为逻辑上的主动关系。
17. I’m calling to enquire about the position ______ in yesterday’s China Daily.(2010·北京)
A. advertised B. to be advertised
C. advertising D. having advertised
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：我打电话来咨询一下昨天《中国日报》上刊登职位的信息。the position和advertise之间是被动关系，此处的分词可以理解为一个定语从句which was advertised。
18. I have a lot of readings _______ before the end of this term.(2010·山东)
completing B. to complete
C. completed D. being completed
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：这个学期结束前，我有很多阅读练习要完成。由于时间状语before the end of this
term表达未来的时间，所以空格处使用动词不定式表示将来，充当readings的定语。
19. ______ from the top of the tower, the south foot of the mountain is a sea of trees. (2010·陕西)
A. Seen B. Seeing C. Have seen D. To see
解析：选A。考查非谓语动词作状语。句意为：从塔顶往下看，南边的山脚下是一片树的海洋。动词see与句子的主语the south foot之间为被动关系，故用过去分词。
20. His first book _____ next month is based on a true story.(2010·陕西)
A. published B. to be published C. to publish D. being published
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：他的第一本书下个月将出版，这本书是基于一个真实的故事写的。由时间状语next month可知，所填非谓语动词表示将来的动作，故用动词不定式；publish与book之间是被动关系。
21. A great number of students _______ said they were forced to practise the piano. (2010·四川)
A. to question B. to be questioned C. questioned D. questioning
解析：选C。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：许多被调查的学生说：他们是被迫练习弹钢琴的。question与students之间是被动关系，question表示的动作也已完成，故用过去分词。
22. In many people’s opinion, ______ that company, though relatively small, is pleasant .(2010·四川)
A. to deal with B. dealing with
C. to be dealt with D. dealt with
解析：选A。考查动词不定式的用法。句意为：许多人看来，尽管那家公司相对比较很小，但与之合作却令人愉快。某些形容词后经常用不定式的主动形式表被动;不定式动作和句子的主语存在动宾关系。
23. The lawyer listened with full attention, _______ to miss any point.(2010·四川)
A. not trying B. trying not C. to try not D. not to try
解析：选B。考查非谓语动词作伴随状语及非谓语动词的否定式的用法。句意为：这名律师全神贯注的听着，尽量不错过任何要点。句中listen和try not to miss为同时进行的动作，故用现在分词的一般式作伴随状语，动词不定式的否定形式要在to前加not。
24. It rained heavily in the south， _______ serious flooding in several provinces. (2010·天津)
A. caused B. having caused C. causing D. to cause
解析：选C。考查非谓语动词作结果状语。句意为：南方下了大雨，导致几个省份出现严重洪灾。空格后serious flooding是rained heavily导致的后果，且句子主语it和cause之间存在主动关系，所以此处用动词的现在分词形式作结果状语。
25. The traffic rule says young children under the age of four and _______ less than 40 pounds must be in a child safety seat. (2010·浙江)
A. being weighed B. to weigh C. weighed D. weighing
解析：选D。考查非谓语动词作定语。句意为：交通法则规定四岁以下以及体重不超过四十磅的儿童必须坐在儿童安全座椅里。动词weigh与名词children之间是逻辑上的主谓关系，所以用现在分词作定语。(共81张PPT)
第九讲 情态动词和虚拟语气
　　　　　　　　　
1．准确把握情态动词表允许、推测、判断等用法。
2．准确把握情态动词在虚拟语气句子结构中的使用。
3．wish，as if/though，if only，would rather＋从句，It’s time＋从句等句型中的虚拟语气。
4．表示“坚持、命令、建议、要求”的词语后及各类从句中的虚拟语气。
5．虚拟语气在条件状语从句中的倒装。
2012年高考将重点考查情态动词表“推测和可能性、必要性、请求、允许、允诺”，非真实条件虚拟语气和名词性从句的虚拟语气的运用。
1．(2011·全国卷Ⅱ) If you________smoke, please go outside.
A. can　　　　　　　　B. should
C. must D. may
解析　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“如果你非得要抽烟，请到外面去抽。”must (表示主张)一定要，坚持要。根据后一句please go outside的要求，选C。
答案 　C
2．(2011·上海)Some young people these days just________go out of their homes to contact the real world.
A. mustn’t B. won’t
C. mightn’t D. shouldn’t
解析　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“现在一些年轻人就是不愿意走出家门接触真正的世界。”mustn’t禁止，不允许；won’t不愿意，就是不，偏不，具有主观性；mightn’t可能不；shouldn’t不应该。根据句意选B。
答案 　B
3．(2011·福建)—Shall I inform him of the change of the schedule right now
—I am afraid you________， in case he comes late for the meeting .
A．will B．must
C．may D．can
解析　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“——需要我现在就通知他计划有变吗？——恐怕你得这样做，以防他开会迟到。”must (表示必要、命令或强制)必须，得。根据后半句，选B。
答案 　B
4．(2011·安徽)—What do you think of store shopping in the future
—Personally, I think it will exist along with home shopping but________.
A. will never replace
B. would never replace
C. will never be replaced
D. would never be replaced
解析　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“——你对将来的商店购物怎么看？——我个人认为会与在家购物并存，但商店购物不会被取代。”根据I think it will exist along with home shopping，排除虚拟的选项D，这是表示将来的时间，考虑到被动语态，选C。
答案 　C
5．(2011·四川)The police still haven’t found the lost child, but they’re doing all they ________.
A．can B．may
C．must D．should
解析　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“警方依然没有找到失踪的孩子，但他们现在正在做他们所能做的一切。”can可以，能够；may可能，许可；must必须；should应该。根据句意，选A。
答案 A
1．can 和could的用法
(1)表示惊讶，常用在否定句和疑问句中。
How could you do such a silly thing
你怎么能做那样的蠢事呢？
(2)cannot...too/enough表示“无论……也不过分”；
“越……越好”。
You can’t be too careful while driving.
开车时越小心越好。
2．may和might的用法
(1)may和might表示“许可”，“可能性”，“祝愿”等意义。
①在给予别人许可时，常用can，但有时也用may。不能用might。
—May I play basketball this afternoon
“今天下午我可以打篮球吗？”
—No，you may not.
“不，不行。”
②“may as well＋动词原形”意为“最好，满可以，倒不如”。
You may as well do it at once.
你最好马上就做这件事。
We may as well stay where we are.
我们留在现在的地方倒也不错。
(2)may作“可以”讲时，其否定式常用“mustn’t”表示“禁止”；must作“必须”讲时，其否定式是“needn’t”，表示“不必”。
—May I use your car
—No，you mustn’t.(委婉的拒绝可用：Sorry，but I am using it now.或You’d better not.等)
—Must I work out the problem tonight
—No，you needn’t.
3．must
(1)表示禁止(用于否定句)
You must not speak ill of others.
你一定不要说别人的坏话。
Smoking must not be allowed in the office.
严禁在办公室吸烟。
(2)表示“偏执”，“固执”
Must you make so much noise
你非得弄出这么大声吗？
If you must smoke，please go out.
如果你偏要吸烟，那你就出去吧。
4．shall的用法
(1)用于第一、第三人称疑问句中，表示说话人征求对方的意见和向对方请示。
Shall we begin our class
我们可以开始上课吗？
Shall the driver wait outside
司机在外边等着可以吗？
(2)用于第二、第三人称陈述句中，表示说话人给对方的命令、警告、允诺或威胁。
I promised he shall get a present for his birthday.
我许诺给他一件生日礼物。
You shall not get my support if you do such a thing.
假如你做那种事，我就不支持你。
5．will和would的用法
作情态动词的will，would与作助动词的will，would的各种形式相同。
(1)表示自愿做或主动提出做什么，如意志、愿望或决心等。would用于过去的情况。
John promised his doctor he would not smoke，and he has never smoked ever since.
约翰答应他的医生不再吸烟了，自从那时起他就再也不吸烟了。
I have told him again and again to stop smoking，but he will not listen.
我已再三告诉他戒烟，但是他就是不听。
(2)will可以表示一种习惯性的动作，有“总是”或“总要”之意。
Every morning he will have a walk along this river.
每天早晨，他总是沿着小河散步。
(3)would 可以表示过去的习惯性动作，比used to正式，但没有“现已无此习惯”的含义。
Last year our English teacher would sometimes tell us stories in English after class.
去年我们的英语老师常常课后给我们讲英语故事。
1．(2011·北京)—I don’t really like James. Why did you invite him
—Don’t worry. He________come. He said he wasn’t certain what his plans were.
A. must not　　　　　　B. need not
C. would not D. might not
解析　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“——我真不喜欢James。你为何请了他？——别担心。他可能来不了。他说他的计划还没安排好。”题干中的he wasn’t certain说明他可能不来，可能来，因此使用不完全否定might not。选D。
答案 　D
2．(2010·北京)—Good morning. I’ve got an appointment with Miss Smith in the Personnel Department.
—Ah，good morning. You________be Mrs. Peters.
A．might B．must
C．would D．can
解析　此题考查情态动词。第一句说明和史密斯女士有约定，所以秘书判断一定是……。must在此表示推测，意为“一定”，符合语境。
答案　B
3．(2010·浙江)“You________have a wrong number，” she said，“There’s no one of that name here.”
A．need B．can
C．must D．would
解析　考查情态动词。从“There’s no one of that name here”可知“你一定弄错号码了”。此处表示肯定的推测，故用must。
答案　C
4．(2009·辽宁)The traffic is heavy these days.I________arrive a bit late，so could you save me a place
A．can B．must
C．need D．might
解析　can在肯定句中意为“能够，有时会”，一般不用来表示推测；must 意为“一定，必定”；need意为“需要”；might意为“可能，或许”，表示推测。句意：这些天交通很繁忙，我可能会来晚一点，请你帮我保留个位置好吗？故答案选D。
答案　D
表示对目前或将来情况的推测往往用“情态动词＋动词原形”这种结构。
1．can用于肯定句中有时可以用来表示推测，意为“有时会”；用于疑问句中可以表示推测，意为“可能”，有时表示一种惊讶的语气；用于否定句中也可以表示推测，can’t 意为“不可能”，语气很强烈。
Mr.Bush is on time for everything.How can it be that he was late for the meeting
布什先生做什么事情都很准时，他怎么可能开会迟到呢？
The story can’t be true.
这个故事不可能是真的。
2．may用于肯定句中可以用来表示推测，意为“可能”；用于否定句中也可以表示推测，may not意为“可能不”，表示一种不太确定的语气。may在疑问句中不能表示推测。
Peter may come with us tonight，but he isn’t sure yet.
彼得今晚可能和我们一起来，但他还没确定。
3．must 表示推测时只能用于肯定句中，意为“一定，必定”，表示十分肯定的语气(在疑问句中或否定句中要用can)。
He must be ill.He looks so pale.
他准是病了，他的脸色苍白。
—It’s the office！So you must know eating is not allowed here.
“这是办公室！所以你一定知道这里不许吃东西。”
—Oh，sorry.
“噢，对不起。”
4．should 用来表示推测时意为“应该”，即含有“按道理来说应当如此”的意思。
There shouldn’t be any difficulty about passing the road test since you have practiced a lot in the driving school.
因为你在驾校训练了那么多，通过路考应该没什么困难。
5．表示对现在正在发生的事情进行推测要用“情态动词＋be＋现在分词”这种结构。这种结构在高考题中出现的次数不太多，但也提醒考生注意。
My mother must be watering the flowers in the garden now.
现在我母亲一定正在花园里浇花。
The students may be climbing the mountain at the moment.
此刻学生们有可能正在爬山。
1．(2011·全国) They________have arrived at lunchtime but their flight was delayed.
A．will　　　　　　　　B．can
C．must D．should
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“他们本该午饭时到达，但他们的航班推迟了。”will have done将来可以完成；can have done可能做过……吗？表示对过去行为的怀疑，用于疑问句；must have done一定做过某事，表示对过去事情的肯定推测；should have done本来应该做某事，而实际没做。but their flight was delayed这样的结果，说明他们本来该到达却没有到达，因此选D。
答案 　D
2．(2011·江苏)—I left my handbag on the train, but luckily someone gave it to a railway official.
—How unbelievable to get it back! I mean, someone________it.
A. will have stolen B. might have stolen
C. should have stolen D. must have stolen
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“—我把我的手提包落在火车上了。但幸运的是，有人拾到交给了铁路部门。—失而复得，简直难以置信！我是说，本来可能有人会偷了去。” will have done将来可以完成，must have done一
定做过某事，表示对过去事情的肯定推测，都与题意不符。should have done本来应该做某事，而实际没做，这就意味着希望有人偷包。might have stolen 过去可能做过，语气比较婉转或不肯定，根据句意选B。
答案 　B
3．(2010·山东)I________have watched that movie—it’ll give me horrible dreams.
A．shouldn’t B．needn’t
C．couldn’t D．mustn’t
解析　考查情态动词。句意：我本不应该看那部电影——它会令我做噩梦。shouldn’t have done sth.本不该做某事却做了。needn’t have done sth.本不需要做某事却做了。couldn’t have done sth.不可能做过某事。
答案　A
4．(2010·天津)Mark________have hurried. After driving at top speed，he arrived half an hour early.
A．needn’t B．wouldn’t
C．mustn’t D．couldn’t
解析　本题考查情态动词。从句子语境可知，Mark做了本没必要做的事，应用needn’t have done，故选A项。其他几个选项都不能表达此意。
答案　A
5．(2010·上海)—Sorry，Professor Smith.I didn’t finish the assignment yesterday.
—Oh，you________have done it as yesterday was the deadline.
A．must B．mustn’t
C．should D．shouldn’t
解析　考查情态动词。句意：“对不起，史密斯教授，昨天我没有完成作业。”“你本应该完成的，因为昨天是最后的期限。”四个选项中B项不能与have done连用，故排除；must have done意为“肯定做了……”，表推测，说明说话人对所推测的事情把握较大；should have done 本应该做……(实际上没做……)；shouldn’t have done本不应该做……(实际上做了……)。由语境可知C项正确。
答案　C
表示对过去发生的情况或存在的状态的推测常用“情态动词＋have＋过去分词”这种结构。
1．can/could have done表示“本来可以做，而实际上未做”或者“过去可能”，疑问或否定形式表示对过去发生的行为表示怀疑或不肯定，其中can’t have done多用于语气强烈的否定，意为“不可能做过”。
—Do you know where David is？I couldn’t find him anywhere.
“你知道大卫在哪里吗？我到处找不到他。
—Well.He can’t have gone far—his coat’s still here.
“大卫的上衣还在这里，因此他肯定没走远。”
The accident could have been avoided.
这场事故本来是可以避免的。
2．may/might have done表示对过去行为的推测，意为“可能做过”。might所表示的可能性比较弱，语气较委婉。此外might have done可表示“本可能做而实际上未做”。
Sorry，I’m late.I might have turned off the alarm clock and gone back to sleep again.
对不起，我迟到了。我可能把闹钟关掉后又睡着了。
3．must have done表示对过去行为的推测，意为“一定，想必”，语气十分肯定。
He must have completed his work；otherwise，he wouldn’t be enjoying himself by the seaside.
他一定是已经完成工作了，否则他不会在海边玩得那么高兴了。
4．ought to/should have done表示过去本来应该做某事而实际上却没有做；shouldn’t have done表示过去本来不应该做某事而实际上却做了。这一用法往往含有责备的意味。
I’m not feeling well in the stomach.I shouldn’t have eaten so much fried chicken just now.
我现在觉得肚子疼，我刚才真不应该吃那么多的炸鸡的。
5．needn’t have done表示本来不必做某事而实际上却做了。
—Catherine，I have cleaned the room for you.
“Catherine，我已替你打扫了房间。”
—Thanks.You needn’t have done it.I could manage it myself.
“谢谢。你本来不必做，我自己可以做的。”
1．(2011·北京)—Where are the children The dinner’s going to be completely ruined.
—I wish they________always late.
A. weren’t　　　　　　　B. hadn’t been
C. wouldn’t be D. wouldn’t have been
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“——孩子们哪儿去了？这顿饭快要吃不起来了。——我但愿他们不要老是迟到。”wish引出虚拟语气，题干中出现always，从句虚拟使用一般过去时。选A。
答案 　A
2．(2011·北京)Maybe if I________science, and not literature then, I would be able to give you more help.
A. studied B. would study
C. had studied D. was studying
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“或许当初我要是学了理科而不是文科，现在就能给你更多的帮助。”then表示过去的时间，if引导的从句是对过去的虚拟，因此使用过去完成时。选C。
答案　C
3．(2011·天津)I________sooner but I didn’t know that they were waiting for me.
A. had come B. was coming
C. would come D. would have come
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“我本来可以早点来，但我真不知道他们在等我。”but I didn’t know表示了过去时间，因此前句是对过去的虚拟，用主语＋should / would / could / might ＋ have done表达，故选D。
答案 　D
4．(2011·福建)—Pity you missed the lecture on nuclear pollution.
—I________it, but I was busy preparing for a job interview.
A．attended B．had attended
C．would attend D．would have attended
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“——真可惜你错过了那场有关核污染的讲座。——我本可以去听的，但我当时忙于工作面试。”对过去的虚拟，用主语＋should / would / could / might ＋ have done表达，故选D。
答案 　D
5．(2011·陕西)I________through that bitter period without your generous help.
A. couldn’t have gone B. didn’t go
C. wouldn’t go D. hadn’t gone
解析　考查虚拟语气的用法。句意为“没有你的慷慨帮助，我是不可能度过那段痛苦的时期的。”that bitter period表示过去的时间，对过去的虚拟语气用主语＋should / would / could / might ＋ have done表达，故选A。
答案 　A
虚拟语气考查的常常是习惯用法、特别的句型以及和情态动词的使用联系起来。有关虚拟语气要注意以下两大方面：
1．在非真实条件句中谓语动词用虚拟语气
非真实条件句有以下三类：
(1)与现在事实相反的非真实条件句，谓语动词形式如下：
从句：过去式
主句：would/should/could/might＋动词原形。
(2)与过去事实相反的非真实条件句，谓语动词形式如下：
从句：过去完成时
主句：would/should/could/might have＋过去分词。
(3)与将来事实相反的非真实条件句，谓语动词形式如下：
从句：过去式/should＋动词原形/were to＋动词原形。
主句：would/should/could/might＋动词原形。
【专家提醒】　(1)若条件句中有were，had，should，可把if省略，而把were，had，should放在主语前，形成倒装结构，这种结构主要用于书面语中。
Had you taken my advice，you wouldn’t have failed in the examination.
如果你听了我的建议，你就不会考试不及格了。
(2)有时主句和虚拟条件从句的动作发生的时间不一致，此时，主句和从句的谓语动词要根据各自所指的不同时间选择适当的动词形式。
If you had worked hard，you would be very tired now.
如果你真的努力工作了，你现在就会感到很累的。(从句指过去，主句指现在)
(3)有时虚拟条件并不通过条件从句表达出来，而是通过词、短语或上下文暗示，此时句子的时态要依具体情况而定。
Without electricity(＝If there were no electricity)，life would be quite different today. 如果没有电，今天的生活就会完全不同。
But for your help(If it hadn’t been for your help)，I couldn’t have finished it.
要是没有你的帮助，我就不可能完成这件事。
I was busy that day. Otherwise I would have gone there with them.(If I hadn’t been busy that day，I would have gone there with them.)
我那天很忙，否则，我就和他们一起去那儿了。
2．虚拟语气在某些从句中的应用
(1)用在suggest，order，demand，ask，command，propose，request，insist等动词后面的宾语从句中。
(2)用在wish后面的宾语从句中。
(3)用在以as if/as though引起的从句中。
(4)用在以in order that，so that引起的目的状语从句中。
(5)用在以it is(high)time引起的从句中。
(6)用在混合时间条件句中：主句和从句不一定用指同一时间的动词。如：
If I had learned French，I would be able to interpret for our French friends.
如果我以前学过法语，现在我就能给法国朋友当翻译了。
(7) would rather句型中的虚拟语气表示愿望，意为“宁愿，但愿”。如：
I’d rather we didn’t go to see a film this evening.
我倒希望我们今晚不去看电影。
(8)无主句条件句。如：
If only I had been more careful!
我要是再仔细一点就好了！
1．“ Mike is often absent from class.” “Tell him he________answer for it if he goes on behaving like that.”
A. shall　　　　　　　　B. will
C. would D. can
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选A。shall 用作情态动词主要有以下两个用法：
(1) 用于疑问句中征求意见。如：
Shall I help you 要不要我帮帮你？
Shall I open the window 要我把窗子打开吗？
(2) 用于陈述句中表示允诺、告诫、警告、威胁、命令、规定、必然性等(可用于各类人称)。如：
You shall suffer for this. 你会为此事吃苦头的。(表威胁)
Each competitor shall wear a number. 每个参赛者要戴一个号码。(表规定)
You shall hear everything as soon as you come. 你一来就可听到所有情况了。(表允诺)
请做以下试题(答案均选 shall)：
(1)“ I promise that she________get a nice present on her birthday.” “Will it be a great surprise to her？”
A. should B. must
C. would D. shall
2. You________pay too much attention to your reading skill, as it is so important.
A. cannot B. shouldn’t
C. mustn’t D. needn’t
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　最佳答案选A。cannot...too...是英语中一个十分有用的表达，意为“不可能太……，无论怎样……也不算过分，越……越……”。如：
You can’t be too careful. 你越仔细越好。
You can’t praise the book too much. 这本书值得大加赞扬。
We cannot work too much for the people. 我们为人民做工作是不可能做过头的。
A woman cannot have too many clothes. 女人买的衣服再多也不算多。
注：有时也可用 can never, impossible 等与too连用来表示类似意思。如：
It is impossible to get there too soon. 去那儿越早越好。
3. “Is John coming by train？”“He should, but he________not. He likes driving his car.”
A. must B. can
C. need D. may
【易误分析】　可能误选B或C。
【名师指津】　最佳答案为D。may 表推测，may not 意为“可能不(会坐火车来)”。句中的 He should 为 He should come by train 之省略，由于其后出现转折连词 but，说明语意有变化，再结合下文的 He likes driving his car，便可决定此题选D。注意，不能选B，因为can表示推测时通常不用肯定陈述句。
4. “I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter.” “It________ true because there was little snow there.”
A. may not be B. won’t be
C. couldn’t be D. mustn’t be
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　此题最佳答案为C，主要由下文的 because there was little snow there 这一语境所决定，既然“没下什么雪”，那么“滑雪”就应是“不可能”，所以选 couldn’t be，即选C。
5. You________be right, but I don’t think you are.
A. can B. could
C. must D. should
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　从语境上看，C、D不宜选，在剩下的A和B中，许多同学想当然地选了A，认为整个句子为现在时态，所以选can，而不选过去式 could，但是最佳答案却是B而不是A。按照英语语法，情态动词can 用于推测表示可能性时，通常只用于否定句或疑问句中，而不用于肯定句中；但 could 用于表推测时，却不仅可用于否定句和疑问句，也可用于肯定句，且此时的 could 并不是 can 的过去式，与 can 也没有时间上的差别，只是 could 比 can语气更委婉，所以答案选B。
注：can 在以下特殊情况下，也可用于肯定句。一是表示抽象的可能性，即从理论上或逻辑上分析是可能的，但是实际上未必会发生。如：Anyone can make mistakes. 任何人都可能会犯错误。二是后接“be (get, seem, become)＋形容词”，表示“有时会”、“时常会”等。如：My father can be very unreasonable. 我父亲有时候很不讲道理。
6. I forget where I read the article, or I________it to you now.
A. will show B. would show
C. am going to show D. am showing
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选。
【名师指津】　正确答案选B。根据上文的语境可知句中的 or 隐含有一个虚拟的条件，即 or＝if I didn’t forget where I read the article(要是我没忘记我在哪儿读过这篇文章的话——但事实上忘了)。
7. “It looks as if he were drunk.” “So it does.________.”
A. He’d better give up drinking
B. He shouldn’t have drunk so much
C. Health is more important than drink
D. I wonder why he is always doing so
【易误分析】　几个干扰项均有可能误选，主要是受句中 drunk 一词的影响。
【名师指津】　最佳答案为D。关键信息是It looks as if he were drunk 中的虚拟语气，句子既然用了虚拟语气，也就是说，“他喝醉了”不是事实，只是他的言行好像是醉了，所以此题的最佳答案是D。
8. “Mary looks hot and dry” “So ________you if you had so high a fever.”
A. do B. are
C. will D. would
【易误分析】　容易误选A或C。选A者，认为前后两句的动词性质应一致；选C者，认为其后带有if 条件状语从句，从语气上看，主句应用将来时态。
【名师指津】　此题最佳答案为D。分析如下：
(1)“so＋助动词＋主语”是一个很有用的结构，它表示“……也一样”时。如：
He likes to watch TV, and so do I. 他喜欢看电视，我也一样。
When animals and plants disappear, so will man. 当动植物消失的时候，人类也会随之消失。
(2) 由于空格后的 if 条件状语从句的谓语用的是虚拟语气(这是很重要的信息)，所以主句要用 would 而不用 will，即答案应选D。
9. “He will come tomorrow.” “But I’d rather he________the day after tomorrow.”
A. will come B. is coming
C. came D. had come
【易误分析】　容易误选A或B。根据上文的 He will come tomorrow 以及下文的时间状语 the day after tomorrow 似乎都表明空白处应填一个一般将来时态。
【名师指津】　但此题的最佳答案是 C。按照英语习惯，would rather 后接that 从句时，从句谓语通常要用虚拟语气，即用过去式表示现在或将来，用过去完成时表示过去。又如：
I’d rather you left right now. 我宁愿你现在就离开。
I would much rather it was forgotten. 我更愿这事被遗忘掉。
I’d rather he hadn’t told me about it. 我宁愿他没告诉我这事。
10．________ smoking, he would not have got cancer in the lung.
A. Was he given up B. Had he given up
C. Did he give D. If he gave up
【易误分析】　容易误选 D。
【名师指津】　正确答案应选B。之所以不能选D，是因为时态前后有矛盾。由于主句谓语是would not have got，这表明是对过去事实作出的假设，所以从句谓语应该是 had given up，而不是像D项那样用一般过去时。另外，当虚拟条件句中有 had, should, were 等词时，通常可以省略 if，并将 had, should, were 提前置于句首。又如：
Were they to cease advertising, prices would come down.＝ If they were to cease advertising, prices would come down. 如果他们停止做广告，价钱会降下来。
Had I been there, I would have filmed the occasion.＝ If I had been there, I would have filmed the occasion. 如果我在那里，我会把那场面拍摄下来了。
1. The two strangers talked as if they________friends for years.
A. should be　　　　　　　B. would be
C. have been D. had been
解析　 从句子中时态talked可知as if引导的从句是与过去事实相反的虚拟语气，另外for years也是判断此答案的重要信息。
答案　D
2．________it rain tomorrow, we have to put off the visit to Yangpu Bridge.
A. Were B. Should
C. Would D. Will
解析　 为虚拟语气的倒装句，相当于 If it should rain tomorrow 万一明天下雨。
答案　B
3. Without the air to hold some of the sun’s heat, the earth at night________， too cold for us to live.
A. would be freezing cold B. will be freezing coldly
C. would be frozen cold D. can freeze coldly
解析　 此题考查的是虚拟语气的含蓄条件句，所谓含蓄条件句就是条件从句并非是用if引导的从句来表示的，而是通过上下文或介词短语来表示的。如：Under favorable conditions, we could have finished the work ahead of time. 要是在更有利的条件下，我们就会提前完成这项工作。He could have come, but he was busy then. ＝If he had not been busy then, he could have come.
答案　A
4. If only he________quietly as the doctor instructed, he would not suffer so much now.
A. lies B. lay
C. had lain D. should lie
解析　 此题考查的是虚拟语气的错综时间条件句，从句和主句在时间上不一致，从句所表示的是与过去事实相反的虚拟，而主句表示的是与现在事实相反的虚拟。
答案　C
5. —We could have gone there by bus.
—Yes, otherwise we________late.
A. weren’t B. hadn’t been
C. couldn’t be D. couldn’t have been
解析　 We could have gone there by bus 意为“我们本来是能够坐汽车去那里”，但实际上并没有坐汽车去那里，相当于 We didn’t go there by bus。若将这一真实情况变成一个与事实相反的假设，则为If we had gone there by bus, we couldn’t have been late。
答案　D
6. The teacher demanded that the exam________before eleven.
A. must finish B. would be finished
C. be finished D. must be finished
解析　 在表示请求、命令、建议、要求的词后的从句中应使用(should)＋动词原形的虚拟语气形式。如：He suggested that we be there in time.
答案　C
7. I wouldn’t have succeeded________for his help then.
A. hadn’t it been B. were it not
C. had it been not D. had it not been
解析　 此题考查对虚拟语气倒装的掌握。if it weren’t for...和if it hadn’t been for...表示“多亏，要不是……的情况下”，也可用but for短语来表示。这两个句型倒装时仅需记住一句话：not总在“之后”。如：We wouldn’t have finished the work had it not been for his help.要不是他的帮助，我们就不能完成这项工作。
答案　D
8. If it ________for the snow, we________the mountain yesterday.
A. were not, could have climbed
B. were not, could climb
C. had not been, could have climbed
D. had not been, could climb
解析　 根据yesterday这一信息词，可判断是与过去事实相反的虚拟语气。
答案　C
9. Yesterday, Jane walked away from the discussion. Otherwise, she________something she would regret later.
A. had said B. said
C. might say D. might have said
解析　 此题考查虚拟语气的含蓄条件句，相当于 If Jane had not walked away from the discussion, she might have said something she would regret later.
答案　D
10. I’d rather he________here.
A. come B. comes
C. came D. will come
解析　 ①would rather (not)do ...接省去to的不定式。②would rather后接从句，从句应用虚拟语气，谓语常用过去式。
答案　C
11. One thing’s for sure, the fire________by some cigarette butts.
A. might cause B. could have caused
C. must have been caused D. should be caused
解析　 句意是：有一件事是肯定的：这场火灾一定是由一些香烟头引起的。由题干中的sure可知，此处要用把握性大的must have been caused。A项用于对现在或将来的情况进行推测，B项把握性不大，意为“可能……了”。should have caused不用于推测，意为“本应该做某事”。
答案　C
12. You ________finish the report tonight if you’re too tired，Tomorrow afternoon is the deadline.
A. shouldn’t B. can’t
C. mustn’t D. needn’t
解析　 句意是：如果你累了的话，就不必今天晚上写完这个报告。明天下午是期限。根据句意可知，此处应该表示必要性，故用needn’t。shouldn’t“不应该”；can’t“不能；不可能；不可以”；mustn’t“不许”。
答案　D
13．—Where is Bob I cannot find him anywhere.
—He________have been off long. I heard him make a call just now.
A. shouldn’t B. can’t
C. mustn’t D. needn’t
解析　 句意是：“鲍勃在哪里？我到处找他都没找到。”“他不可能走了。我刚才还听见他打电话了。”此句是对已发生或还没有发生的情况进行否定的推测，故用can’t have done形式。
答案　B
14. You________the chance to go abroad if you had applied for it earlier.
A. would get B. should get
C. could have got D. should have got
解析　 句意是：如果你早申请的话，就可能有机会去国外了。此句是一个与过去的事实相反的说法，故用could have got表示“本来会……；本来能够……”。要注意should have got表示“本应该……”。
答案　C
15．—Why do you ask me to do the difficult work
—Because you________do such a thing and nobody else is fit for it.
A. would B. should
C. can D. may
解析　句意是：“你为什么要我做这项艰难的工作。”“因为你能够做那样的事情，而没有任何其他的人能够。”此句要用can表示能力。
答案　C
16. You can’t imagine that a top student________have failed in the college entrance examination.
A. might B. need
C. should D. would
解析　 句意是：你想象不到，一位一流的学生竟然高考落榜了。此句要用should表示说话者出乎预料的心情，意为“竟然”。
答案　C
17. Anne, if your leg________become more painful, do not hesitate to call me.
A. may B. would
C. could D. should
解析　 句意是：Anne，如果你的腿万一疼得厉害的话，请立刻给我打电话。此句要用should表示可能性，意为“万一”，常用于条件状语从句。
答案　D
18. I tried to call on you last week but your dog simply________not let me come through the gate.
A. could B. should
C. might D. would
解析　 句意是：我上一周试图来拜访你，但你家的狗简直就是不让我进门。此句要用would not表示情愿，意为“不愿意”。
答案　D
19．—Are you going to try the media
—Well, I haven’t decided yet. I________find some other choices.
A. would B. should
C. must D. might
解析　 句意是：“你准备尝试一下媒体吗？”“唉，我还没有做好决定。我或许找另外某个方法。”此句要用might表示没有太大把握的可能性。
答案　D
20．—Morning! Is there anything special in your mind
—Yes .Here is the Lipton tea. Where can I find coffee
—OK. That________also be on this shelf, across from the tea, madam.
A. would B. could
C. might D. should
解析　 句意是：“早晨好！你有什么特别的需要吗？” “是的，利普顿茶叶在这儿了。咖啡在哪儿呢？”“夫人，它也应当在这个橱子上，在茶那边。”此句要用should表示推测，意为“应该”，在语气上没有must大，但比can, could, may, might大。
答案　D(共46张PPT)
一、找出以下句子的成分（主、谓、宾、表、定、状、补）
1. Mouse loves rice.
2. God is a girl.
3. I am Miss Chen, the head teacher of Class 1.
4(1) His job is important.
(2) What he does is important.
5(1) This is his job.
(2) This is what he does every day.
6(1) I don’t like his job.
(2) I don’t like what he does every day.
7(1) I don’t know the man, Mr. White.
(2) I don’t know the fact that he is a teacher.
二、名词从句(Noun Clauses)
①在句子中起____作用的句子，
相当于___________
②在复合句中能担任_____、_____、_____、 ______等
③根据它在句中不同的语法功能，可分为
__________(Subject Clause)、
__________(Predicative Clause)、
__________(Object Clause)
__________(Appositive Clause)
名词性从句
noun clause
主语从句
subject clause
宾语从句
object clause
表语从句
predicative clause
同位语从句
appositive clause
二.名词性从句的类型
引导名词从句的连接词：
1）连接代词who, whom, whose, which, what, whoever, whichever, whatever等
连接副词when, where, why, how, whenever, wherever, however
2）连接词 whether/if 若一个名词从句,表达的含义为否用whether/if
3）连接词that若一个句子表达含义和句子结构均完整，用连词that。 “that”在从句中不充当任何成分，没有任何含义。
1.Object clause( 宾语从句)
1)老师教导我们要志向崇高。
The teacher taught us that we should aim high.
2)你是否能成功将取决于你做什么和怎么做。
Your success will depend on what you do and how you do it.
3)他是否能来帮助我们，我感到怀疑。
I doubt whether / if he will come to our help.
4) Whether he will accept your offer, I don’t know.(不用if)
1. The fact is _____ she doesn’t like pop music.
2. My trouble is _____ I don’t have enough
experience.
3. The question is _______ he will be present
or not.
4. What troubled him was ________ he could get
the money.
that
that
whether
whether
/where
/how
2.Predicative clause ( 表语从)句
5. He is absent today. It’s ________ he is
seriously ill.
6. It looks ________ it’s going to rain again.
because
as if
3.Subject clause(主语从句)
1.人生最重要的并非金钱。
What is the most important in life isn’t
money.
2.凡是想看这部电影的人可免费得到一张票。
Whoever wants to see the film may get a free ticket.
3. That the earth is round is known to all.
---It is known to all that the earth is round.
4.That you missed the chance is a pity.
----It is a pity that …
that 无意义, 后接一个完整的句子.
4.Appositive clause (同位语从句):
后面跟同位语从句的名词有: fact, news,idea
thought, question, remark 等.
1. The idea ______ computers will recognize
human voices surprises many people.
2. The possibility ______ the majority of the
labour force will work at home is often discussed.
3. I have no idea ______ he has gone.
4. They are thinking about the question _______
they could succeed in the competition.
5. Please tell us the truth ______ did that for us.
that
that
where
how
who
三、名词性从句考点：
１. 语序问题
4. 连接词
that, what, which, whether, if, who, whom,whose,
whatever, whichever ,whoever, whomever, whosever, when, where, why, how …
6. it 作形式主语,形式宾语的用法
２. 时态问题
7. 同位语从句与定语从句区别
5. 名词性从句中的虚拟语气
３. 主谓一致问题
重点
合成一个句子：
1) He would be back in an hour. He said…
→He said (that) he would be back in an hour.
2) Do they speak English We want to know…
→We want to know if/whether they speak English.
3) What is her name He asks me…
→He asks me what her name is.
考点1. 语序: 连接词＋陈述句
注意：在think, believe, suppose, expect 等动词之后, 宾语从句中谓语的否定常转移到主句的谓语上，称为否定转移。
I don’t think he will see you.
We don’t expect he is coming.
I don’t believe he will go.
No one can be sure ____ in a million years.
A. what will man look like
B. what man will look like
C. man will look like what
D. what look will man like
1) When will Professor Li give us a talk We wanted to know …
→We wanted to know when Professor Li would give us a talk.
2) Jim is a good student. The teacher said …
→The teacher said (that) Jim was a good student.
3) Has Mr. Green been in Beijing for five years He asked …
→He asked if/whether Mr. Green had been in Beijing for five years.
1. 如果主句是过去的时态(包括一般过去时, 过去进行时), 那么从句的时态一定要用相对应的过去的某种时态。
2.主句的动词用过去时，从句表示客观事实，格言，谚语等，从句谓语动词用一般现在时
Our physics teacher once told us that light ______ (travel) faster than sound.
travels
3.主句的动词用一般现在时，从句谓语可根据从句谓语动词发生的时间选用各种时态
Tom says that Mary _____ (go) abroad last year and ________ (be) there for nearly 5 months.
went
has been
考点3 主谓一致问题
1) 何时开会还没有决定。
When the meeting will begin _____ (have) not been decided yet .
2) 他们何时出发和他们去哪里还没有决定。
单个的主语从句作主语时，谓语动词一般用____形式。如果是两个或两个以上的主语从句作主语，谓语动词则用____形式。由两个或多个连接词引导一个主语从句，谓语动词用____形式。
单数
复数
has
When they will start and where they will go _____ (have) not been decided yet .
3) 何时何地开会还没有决定。
When and where the meeting will begin ____ (have) not been decided yet .
has
单数
have
1. 引导词that（当名词性从句中不缺任何成分时用that)
that 可省略的情况： 单个宾语从句中的that可省略
that不可省略的情况： 1. 主语从句 2. 表语从句 3. 同位语从句 4. 用it做形式宾语的宾语从句 5. 并列的宾语从句中的后几个从句的引导词that 不能省略
考点4 名词性从句连接词的选用
that/ 省略
1)I don’t think ______ she is coming. 2)It is a pity _____ he has made such a mistake. 3)The reason is ______ he is careless . 4)The news _____ our team won the match inspired us. 5)I don’t think it necessary _____ you should read English aloud. 6)He told me _____ his father had died and ____ he had to make a living alone.
(that)
that
that
that
that
(that)
that
2. 其它连接代词和副词的选用
主要根据名词性从句中的具体意义,正确的选择who、which、when、where、why、how 等连接词，这些连接词既具有疑问含义，又起连接作用，同时在从句中充当各种成分。
1) 我们何时举行运动会还没有决定。 _____ we shall hold our sports meeting is not decided. 2) 我不知道昨天谁打破了玻璃。 I don’t know ______ broke the glass yesterday. 3) 我不知道他长的什么样子。 I have no idea _______ he looks like. 4) 这就是我忘记眼镜的地方。 This is _______ I left my glasses.
When
who
what
where
1) I think that it is unnecessary for me to speak louder.
2) His mother is satisfied with what he has done.
3) That he was able to come made us happy.
4) This is what makes us interested.
5) The reason was that Tom had never seen the million-pound note before.
所引导的从句中是否缺主语、表语或宾语 汉语意义 能否省略
what
that
3. that 和what 的选用
that 和 what 都可引导所有的名词从句。
填that 还是 what？
1) ______ he wants is a book.
2) ______ he wants to go there is obvious. 3) The result is ______ we won the game. 4) This is _____ we want to know. 5) Is _____ he told us true 6) We should pay attention to ______ the teacher is saying. 7) I have no doubt _____ he will come. 8) I have no idea _____ he did that afternoon.
What
That
that
what
what
what
that
what
1) 在主语从句中，只有用it作形式主语时, whether和if 都能引导主语从句, 否则, 也只能用whether。如:
Whether we shall attend the meeting hasn’t been decided yet.
It hasn’t been decided whether (if) we shall attend the meeting.
4. if 和whether 的选用
2) 在表语从句和同位语从句中。如：
The question is whether the film is worth seeing.
The news whether our team has won the match is unknown.
4. if 和whether 的选用
3) 在介词之后。(介词往往可以省略) 如:
It all depends (on) whether they will support us.
4) 后面直接跟动词不定式时。如：
　 He doesn’t know whether to stay or not.
5) 后面紧接or not 时。如：
　 We didn’t know whether or not she was ready.
4. if 和whether 的选用
4. if 和whether 的选用
不能使用if 的情况： 1）主语从句
2）表语从句 3）同位语从句 4）介词后的宾语从句 5）whether to do 做动词宾语不能用if to do
6）whether or not 连在一起引导宾语从句时不用if.
if / whether
1) I asked her __________ she had a bike. 2) _______ we will hold a party in the open air tomorrow depends on the weather. 3) We’re worried about ________ he is safe. 4) I don’t know ___________ he is well or not. 5) I don’t know ________ or not he is well. 6) The question is _________ he should do it. 7) The doctor can hardly answer the question ________ the old man will recover soon. 8) I don’t know _______ to go.
if / whether
Whether
whether
whether
whether
whether
whether
whether
基本句型：
It is +形容词、名词、过去分词+ that ... + (should) do
形容词: important ,necessary, natural, strange…
名词: a pity, a shame, no wonder …
过去分词: suggested, ordered, demanded, insisted …
1. It is ordered that he _____ the examination
A. takes B. has to take C. must take D. take
2. It is strange that he _____ you this.
A. would tell B. should tell
C. had told D. has told
考点5 虚拟语气 a)主语从句中的虚拟语
We suggested that the meeting ___________
A. should put off B. be put off
C. was put off D. putting off
表示建议、要求、命令、坚持等动词suggest, insist, advise, propose, demand, require, request, order, command后的从句谓语动词用_________________
注意: suggest 当表示“暗示、表明”讲时，insist 表示“坚持认为”之意时，从句不用虚拟语气
(should) + do/be done
The smile on his face suggested that he ______ (was/be/is)satisfied with our work.
was
考点5 虚拟语气
b)宾语从句中的虚拟语气
a. I wish I ______(know) the answer now.
b. I wish he __________(pass) the exam yesterday.
c. I wish I ________ (fly) to the moon in a few years.
1. 对现在虚拟时，that从句中谓语用过去时
2. 对过去虚拟时，用had＋过去分词
3. 对将来虚拟时，用would (might等)＋动词原形
knew
had passed
would fly
在suggestion, proposal, idea, plan, order, advice 等名词后面的表语从句、同位语从句中要用虚拟语气，即_______________________
His suggestion that you _____ once more sounds reasonable.
A. try B. tries C. must try D. can try
2. The order given by the commander was that they _____ until the commander allowed they to.
A. stopped B. didn’t stop C. stop D. not stop
考点5 虚拟语气
c)表语和同位语从句中的虚拟语气
(should) + do/be done
1. I think that worthwhile that we spent so much money on these books.
2. That is hard to decide when and where we will held our sports meeting.
3. It is obvious to the students whether they should get well prepared for their future.
4. It doesn’t matter that you will come or not.
it
It
that
whether
找出下列句子中的错误
当主语从句较长，而谓语较短时，常常将从句______，而用it作为形式主语置于句首。it 也可作形式宾语。
后置
考点6 it作形式主语和形式宾语
用it 作形式主语的结构
(1) It is＋名词＋从句
It is a fact that … 事实是……
It is an honor that ……非常荣幸
It is common knowledge that…是常识
(2) It is＋形容词＋从句 (多用 should)
It is natural that… 很自然……
It is strange that… 奇怪的是……
(3) It is ＋ 不及物动词＋从句
It seems that… 似乎……
It happened that… 碰巧……
It appears that… 似乎……
(4) It is ＋ 过去分词＋从句
It is reported that… 据报道……
It has been proved that… 已证实…
It is said that… 据说……
1）It is certain that he will come.
2）It is said that some American friends will visit our school next week.
3）It happened that we were out for a walk yesterday evening.
在宾语从句中, 如果宾语从句后有宾语补足语，为了保持句子平衡, 用it作形式宾语, 将从句放于句尾, 常用于此句型的动词有: make, find, see, hear, feel, think...
1）I think it necessary that we take plenty of hot water every day.
2）I think it a pity to waste the food.
考点7 同位语从句的引导和辨别
1.同位语从句的格式：n.+ 连接词 + 从句 2.能接同位语从句的名词有：fact, idea, news, information, order, belief, advice, suggestion等抽象名词
3.连接词通常是that,也可根据含义选用whether, what, when, where 等来引导同位语从句。
1) I have no idea _________ he comes from. 2) He can’t answer the question ________ he got the money. 3) He gave us many suggestions ________ we should get up earlier and take more exercise. 4) I have no doubt ________ he will win. 5) I have some doubt ________ he will win.
that/ whether / where/ how
where
how
that
that
whether
4. 同位语从句和定语从句的区别
①同位语从句说明的名词大都是抽象名词;
定语从句所修饰、限定的名词或代词有抽象的也有不抽象的。
We express the hope that they will come to visit China again.
Those who want to go please sign their names here.
1) The news that he told us made us happy.
2) The news that we won the game made us happy.
3) We will consider the suggestion that we should build a new library.
4) We will consider the suggestion that he put forward at the meeting.
同位语从句or定语从句
定语从句
同位语从句
定语从句
同位语从句
5) The news that he told me is that Mike would go abroad next year.
6) The news that Mike would go abroad next year is told by him.
7) She expressed the hope that they would come to visit Shanghai again.
8) The hope (that) she expressed is that they would come to visit Shanghai again.
定语从句
同位语从句
同位语从句
定语从句
同位语从句or定语从句
请看这两句有什么不同？
The news that Mr. Li will be our new English teacher is true.
The news that he told me yesterday is true.
定语从句 同位语从句
that
4. 同位语从句和定语从句的区别
The news that they won the match is true.
(news和从句没有逻辑关系)
The order when we should go back hasn’t reached us.
(order和从句没有逻辑关系)
The news that you told us yesterday is true.
(news是told的逻辑宾语)
The day when New China was founded will never be forgotten.
(day是founded 的逻辑状语)
②同位语从句所说明的名词与从句没有逻辑关系；
定语从句所限定的名词是从句逻辑上的主语、宾语、表语、定语、状语等。
4. 同位语从句和定语从句的区别(共32张PPT)
代 词
I. 代词的分类
人称代词 I , you ，she ，him
疑问代词 who whom what
物主代词 my 、your、hers
关系代词 which 、that、who
反身代词 myself、yourselves
连接代词 who、which、what
相互代词 each other、one another
不定代词 one、each、another、neither
指示代词 this、that、those、these
II. 人称代词的用法
1) 作主语，用主格。作宾语用宾格。She teaches us English.
2)在句中作表语，常用宾格。Who is it It’s me. 但有时用主格。 If I were she, I would’t go there. It was I who told him about it.
3)并列人称代词的顺序。单数：2,3.1. 复数：1,2,3
III.反身代词
1)作宾语。I teach myself mathematics.
　　　　　 She is looking at herself in the mirror.
2) 作介词的宾语。
a. 表示“对比”，“自己”
She loves me for myself, not for my money.
b.）介词＋oneself 的常见用语。
to oneself(对自己），for oneself（亲自，独自；为了自己），of oneself（自己的） ，between oneselves（秘密地）， in oneself（本来, 本身） ，by oneself（单独地，独立地）
3)作同位语，起强调作用。 You yourself told me the story.
Exercise one
1.Yours is not a bad idea ____________.
2. Laura is not quite _________ today.
3. I have the room ______________ .
4. You can call on me. I am ____________ today.
5. What I said just now is only _____________.
6. If you don’t believe me, you can go and see ________________.
7. I don’t know when the door closed ________________.
in itself
IV. 指示代词的用法
1).时空的差别 eg. There is this seat here,near me,or there is that one in the fourth row. Which will you have,this or that？
2). This 和 that 在行文叙述上的差别。Eg.
I shall say this to you: he is a poor man.
He was ill. That’s why he didn’t come.
3).that 和 those 用于表比较的结构。
The weather of Beijing is just as good as that of Tianjin.
TV sets made in Nanjing are better than those made here.
4). 打电话时this 表示我,that表示你.
一些重要的
不定代词的用法
不定代词有both, either, neither, one, the other, another, little, few, some, any, each, every, no, none等，从实际应用和理解出发，重点学习以下几个：
(一) both, either, neither
(二) one, another, the other
(三) little, a little, few, a few
(四) some / any, no / none, each / every,
many / much
不定代词 含义 数量关系 作定语时名词的数 作主语时动词的数
both 两者都 =2 复数 复数
either 两者中的任何一个 =2 单数 单数
neither 两者都不 =2 单数 单数
all 三者或三者以上都 ≥3 单数或复数 单数或复数
none 三者或三者以上都不 ≥3 ○ 单数或复数
each 每一个 ≥2 单数 单数
every 每一个 ≥3 单数 单数
both, either, neither
both为“两者都”，neither为“两者都不”，either为“两者之一”。这三个单词都用于指两个人或物，在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。
作主语：
1) Both (of them) enjoyed the rice.
2) Neither (of us) is a doctor.
3) Either (of you) will go.
注意：作主语时，both后面的谓语动词用复数。neither, either后面的谓语动词一般用单数形式。
作定语：
Both Zhang Hua's father and mother worker work in a hospital, but neither one is a doctor.
2) You may take either apple.
作宾语：
I like both of the toys very much.
2) The boy could find neither of them and went away.
both 还可作同位语，它们句中的位置是在动词be，助动词或情态动词的后面，但在实义动词前面。
1) They are both in good health.
2) They will both go there.
3) They both agreed to take part in the birthday party.
此外，either 可作副词用于否定句，表示 “也”，相当于肯定句中的 “too”。
This is not mine. That is not, either.
neither 表示“也不”的时候，常用在倒装的结构形式中：
I don't like to play football. Neither does he.
She hasn't got a bike. Neither have I.
注意：both … and… “两者都……”连接主语时谓语动词用复数。
either 和 or, neither 和 nor “不是……就是”；“或……或”，“既不……也不”；“……都不” 连接两个并列主语时谓语动词的数一般应与靠近谓语动词的主语保持一致，即，就近原则。如：
1) Both Zhang and Wang are good students.
2) Either you or he is right.
3) Neither he nor i am a scientist.
1.There is a tree on _______ side of the street.
A. every B. all C. either D. both
2.There is a desk on _______ side of the room.
A. both B. either C. all D. every
3.There is a desk on _______ sides of the room.
A. both B. either C. all D. every
4. — Which side can I sit on the boat
— If you sit still, you can sit on _______.
A. every side B. all sides C. both sides D. either side
5.It is said that _______ of his parents have gone to Beijing.
A. all B. every C. both D. either
every和each用法上的区别
1. each可作代词和形容词，而every只能用作形容词，each of these dictionaries或each one of these dictionaries,every one of these dictionaries
不能说every of these dictionaries.
2. each可指两个或两个以上中间的每一个，而every只可指三个或三个以上中间的每一个，不能指两个中每一个。如： 可以说each of my eyes, 不可说every one of my eye但可说every one of my toes(脚趾) 。
3. each通常用来指若干固定数目中的每一个，而every往往指“任何一个”如：Each girl sitting over there is my student. “坐在那里的每一女孩子”指若干固定数目中的每一个，故用each。Every man must do his best. “人人都尽最大的努力”泛指任何一个人，因而用every。
4. every和not连用，即“every…not”或“not…every”构成部分否定，表示“并非每一个”的意思，each则无此结构。
5. every+ 基数词+ 复数名词=every+ 序数词+ 单数名词，作“每(多少)”解，但each不能用于这一结构中。 如： every three days 每三天或每隔两天，相当于 every third day。
6. every two days, every second day都作“每隔一天”解，但在实际应用中人们都用every other day来表示这一意思，every two days也有人讲，而every second day则少用的。也可以说every few days, 相当于汉语的“隔些日子”。
7. each 可以与other构成固定的搭配，即each other意思为“彼此、相互、互相”的意思，而every则不能。
one, another, the other
1. one 常用来作代词，替代前文所出现的同类可数名词，表示人或物，以避免重复。例如：
I haven't got a ball pen. I'll have to buy one. (= a ball pen) 我没圆珠笔，我得去买一支。
He is one to think more of others. 他是个能多为别人着想的人。
2. the other, another 都可解释为 “另一个”。other 加上定冠词用于两者中的另一个，another 指三者以上中的另一个。例如：
He was two brothers. One is a doctor, the other is a teacher.
We've received two parcels, one from my uncle, the other from my aunt.
I don't like this one, show me another, please.
I've just bought three things. One is a walkman, another is a pocket calculator, the third is a video game.
3. another 还有 “再……” 的意思，例如：
Have another cup of coffee, please. ！
She could have to stay here for another week.
4. other 有 “另外” 的含义。例如：
Where are the other students
The boy is much cleverer than the other two.
5. others 和 the others 表示复数的泛指和特指。例如：
In the park some are playing games. Others are walking near the river.
I have five colour pencils. One is red, another is blue and the others are green.
6. the rest 也可作 “其余的” 解释。它用作主语时注意谓语动词的单复数。例如：
The rest of his life was spent in America.
He has eight books. Two are in English. The rest are in Chinese.
little, a little, few, a few
1. little 与 a little 两者都用来修饰不可数名词，little 作 “很少”，“几乎没有” 解，有否定的意思，a little 作 “少许”、“有一点” 解，有肯定的意思，例如：
In this way they can make the trip with just a little money.
There is little left, is there
2. few, a few 用来修饰可数名词，前者表示否定，后者表示肯定。
A few of us speak English well.
There were few eggs in the fridge, so he went to the supermarket and bought some.
3. few 作主语时，谓语动词仍用复数，例如：
Few men know this, do they
4. 常用词组有 quite a few (好几个)，only a few (只有一个)，a very few (极少数)。例如：
He studied Chinese for quite a few years. 他学汉语已有好几年了。
some, any, no, none, each, every, many, much
（1）some 和 any:
some (一些，某个) 句中可作主语、宾语、定语等，常用于肯定句。作定语时，它可修饰可数名词和不可数名词，可数名词是单数时，some 表示 “某个” 的意思。例如：
There are some newspapers on the table.
I am going to buy some orange juice.
Have you any questions Yes, I have some.
I have read that in some magazine.
当说活者表示提议、请求或期望得到肯定回答时，在疑问句中也可用 some。例如：
Would you like some tea
Could you lend me some money
any “一些” 用法相同于 some, 但多用于疑问句、否定句或条件从句。例如：
Is there any ink in your pen
Put up your hands if you have any questions.
注意：
1. any 用于肯定句中有 “任何一个” 解。常用于比较级句子中。
Tom runs faster than any other boy in his class.
Tom runs faster than any of the other boys in his class.
2. some, any, every, no 可以与 body, thing, one 构成合成代词，这些代词都作单数看待，表示人或物：
Something is wrong with my bike.
Something is asking to see you.
Nobody is absent.
If you want anything, call me.
2）None,no one / nobody ,nothing 的区别
none 1)可与of连用；2)谓语动词用单或复数；3)具体指什么人或物；4)一般用来回答how many +n,how much +n　.
1)None of us have/has seen him. 2)—How many students are there in the room —None. 3)—Is there any water in the thermos ——None. 4)——How much money do you have on you ——None.
nothing1)指物；2)谓语用单数；3)一般用来回答含anything的一般问句及what引起的特殊问句。请看： 1)——What is in the box ——Nothing　　
2)——Is there anything in the sky ——Nothing. 3)—Can you see anything without glasses ——Nothing
先请看下面一道题: I want some coffee, but there is _______ in the pot. A. no one B. something C. none D. nothing
现请看: 1) none 既可指人，也可指物，代指上文提到的事物，含特指概念。如: He wants me to lend him some money, but I have none at hand.（特指前面提到的钱） They asked for nine books, but there is / are none in the library at present. 。（特指前面提到的书） 2) nothing = not anything, 意为“没有任何东西;什么也没有”，强调内容，只能指物，泛指。如: He felt hungry, but he could find nothing to eat in the kitchen. （泛指所有吃的东西，不是特指某一种）
Nothing in the world is difficult if you put your heart into it.
no one= nobody 只指人,“没有人”，不能指物,语气比none强,后面不能接of构成的短语。no one作主语时,谓语动词只能用单数。如: No one / Nobody likes a person with bad manners. 没有人喜欢不讲礼貌的人。
none指的是三者或三者以上的人或物中"没有一个请比较: There are many apples in the basket, but none of them are fresh.
（3）no 和 none:
none (没有一个，全不，都不) 是名词性的不定代词，可作主语和宾语，常和 of 短语连用，不以作定语。none 作主语代替不可数名词时，谓语用单数形式。代替可数名词时，谓语用单、复数均可。例如：
None of us is / are from Beijing.
None of the money is mine.
none 与 all 相对，有 “全不” “全部” 的含义，因此 all 是全肯定，none 是 all 的全部否定，但都指三者以上的人或物。
We all made mistakes.
None of us was correct.
no 是形容词性的不定代词，只能用作定语，可修饰可数和不可数名词。no 等于 not a 或 not any 加上名词。例如：
I have no money.
I have not any money.
no one 相当于 nobody，意为没有人，谓语用单数。
（4）many 和 much ：
many 修饰可数名词的复数，谓语用复数，much 修饰不可数名词，谓语用单数，它们可用在肯定句、否定句和疑问句中，还可在肯定句中作主语或修饰主语。例如：
So much for today.
There are many buses and cars in the street.
many 已被 a lot of, a large number of, a great many 所代替。
much 已被 a lot of, plenty of, a good deal of, a great (large) quantity of 所代替。
但 a lot of / lots of 只能用于肯定句。
1. ______ of them knew about the plan because it was kept a secret.
A. Each B. Any C. No one D. None
2.We couldn’t eat in a restaurant because ______ of us had ______ money on us.
A. all ; no B. any ; no C. none ; any D. no one ; any
3.There is a tree on _______ side of the street.
A. every B. all C. either D. both
4.There is a desk on _______ side of the room.
A. both B. either C. all D. every
5. — Which side can I sit on the boat
— If you sit still, you can sit on _______.
A. every side B. all sides C. both sides D. either side
6.It is said that _______ of his parents have gone to Beijing.
A. all B. every C. both D. either
7.Some students are absent-minded, _______ of whom heard what the teacher said.
A. all B. none C. every D. not all
8. — Is _______ here
— No, Bob and Tim have asked for leave.
A. anybody B. somebody C. everybody D. nobody
9.They were all very tired, but ______ of them would stop to take a rest.
A. any B. some C. none D. neither
10. — Can you come on Monday or Tuesday
— I’m afraid _______ day is possible.
A. either B. neither C. some D. any
11. If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay _____ ﹩5.
A. another B. other C. more D. each
12. — Which of the two books do you want
— I want _____. Please show me ______.
A. none ; another B. all ; the other
C. neither ; the other D. neither ; another
13._____ side of the street is lined with different shops, ____ of which sell electronic products.
A. Both ; both B. Either ; all
C. Neither ; either D. Either ; both
14. — Do you need anything else
— Yes, we still need ______ aircrafts.
A. more two B. two more
C. other two pieces of D. two other pieces of
15.I had no idea which was better, so I took _____ of them.
A. any B. every C. none D. both
16. — The examination was easy, wasn’t it
— Yes, but I don’t think ______ could pass it.
A. somebody B. anybody C. nobody D. everybody
17.Is there anyone who can do the job . A. None B. No one C. Not one D. Not many ones
18.I wanted some water, but there was in the bottle. A. none B. no C. any D. nothing
19.Tom and Mary have arrived, but students in your class aren't here yet. A. other B. others C. the other D. the others
20.Do September and April have thirty days A. every B. neither C. each D. all
21. of us is active in English class. A. Every B. Every one C. Everyone D. Anybody
22.We have English classes day, Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays. A. each other B. every other C. this and other D. all other
23.Tom had a bad cold. is why he didn't come to school. A. It B. That C. This D. There
24.They invited the three of ,Tom, Bob, and . A. us , me B. we , I C. us , I D. we , we(共33张PPT)
新课标人教版课件系列
《高中英语》
高考系列复习72
72《二轮复习语法专题
－定语从句》
定 语 从 句
3.区别
几种句型
1.定义及术语
2.比较
关系词
教学目标
定义及相关术语
1.定语从句：
修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫定语从句。定语从句一般紧跟在它所修饰的先行词之后。
2.先行词：
被定语从句修饰的词叫先行词。
That is the teacher who teaches us
English.
Those who want to go to the park
are girls.
______
（名词）
_____
（代词）
3.关系词： 引导定语从句的词叫关系词。
Yesterday I helped an old man who had lost his way.
Football is a game which is liked by most boys.
I still remember the day when I first came to this school.
He has a friend whose father is a doctor.
关系词
关系代词
关系副词
that which who whom whose as 等
when where why等
关系词通常有下列三个作用：
A.引导定语从句； B.代替先行词； C.在定语从句中担当一个成分。
The man who is shaking hands with my father is a policeman.
1). a. The reason _______he missed the speech
is that he forgot the time.
b. The reason_____________he gave us
sounded reasonable.
2). a. I’ll never forget the day ____________we
spent together in Paris.
b. I’ll remember the day________we
stayed together at that time.
why
(which/that)
when
(which/that)
关系代词与关系副词的区别
3). a. Is this the factory______________
we visited last year
b. Is this the house _________Lincoln
once lived
c. Is this house ________ we visited
last year
(which/that)
where
解题点拨:
看引导词在定语从句中充当什么成分；
若是作状语, 就用where, when, why等关系副词；
若是作主语、宾语或定语，则用关系代词that, which, whom, whose等。　
the one
“That”
游戏
拓展
讨论与探究
奖
抢
答
大
战
奖
奖
奖
奖
1.
2.
3.
4.
“That”
游戏
拓展
讨论与探究
1).This is the reason ___ _____________ he left
his hometown.
2). I’ll never forget the day ___ ____________
we stayed together
3).This is the girl ______ _______I learned the news.
4). This is the girl _____ is taken good care ___ in the hospital.
5).I’ll show you a store___ ____________ you may buy all that you need.
6).I don’t like the way__ ___________ you laughed
at her.
for which
/why
on which
/when
from whom
of
in which
/where
in which
/that
who
介词与关系代词
( )
拓展1
Have a discussion
方法总结
1.先行词为人,关系代词用介词+whom; 先行词为物,关系代词用介词+which;
2.固定的动词短语,介词不能提前。
3.关系代词和关系副词有时可转换：
where, when, why = 介词 + which
4.先行词是the way 时,关系代词用that\in which或省略.
想一想
总结:
as 与 which的区别
1).The meeting, _______was held in the park, was a great success.
2). I will read as many books_____are required. .
3). She has married again, _______ was unexpected
４). ___is known to us all, Taiwan is a part of China.
which
which
As
as
拓展2
1. which的先行词可以是名词，也可以是句子的一部分或代替整个句子；which从句不能放句首;
2. as 一般代替整个句子, 从句则可以放句首, 句中或句尾, 表示“正如” ，“或像…一样” 。
例如：as is known, as everyone knows ,as is said, as often happens, as you can see, as it is……;当先行词前有as, so, such, the same 修饰时,关系代词常用as。
总结:
“That”
游戏
拓展
讨论与探究
1.当先行词是everything, anything, nothing , all, none, few, little, some等代词时，或当先行词受every, any, all, some, no, little, few, much等代词修饰时。
2.当先行词被序数词修饰时。
3.当先行词被形容词最高级修饰时。
4．当先行词被 the very, the only 修饰时。
5.当先行词前面有who, which 等疑问代词时。
6.当先行词为人与动物或人与物时。
我的地盘
That!!
“that”
1). a. I saw some trees, and the leaves of
_______ were black with disease.
b. I saw some trees, the leaves of ______
were black with disease.
2). a. The professor is a little man, on the
nose of ______there is a pair of glasses
b. The professor is a little man, and on the
nose of ______there is a pair of glasses
解题点拨 :
　是否有连词是区分定语从句和并列句的关键。
　　　　
them
whom
which
him
__
__
易混句型
1.定语从句与并列句
1). a. The news ________our volleyball team
won the match made us excited.
　 b. The news __________he told me yesterday
is exciting.
2). a. I made a promise ______ if anyone set me
free, I would make him very rich.
b. The mother made a promise ___________
pleased all her children.
that
(that/which)
that/which
that
解题点拨：that引导的定语从句是对其先行词的修饰或限制；在句中作成份(作宾语省略),指物时可用which代替；而同位语从句是对前面名词的说明和解释。that在从句中仅起连接作用,不充当成份，不能省略,不能用which代替。
２.定语从句与同位语从句
1) a. It is in this room ______I lived last year.
b. It is the room _______I lived last year.
2) a. It was at seven o’clock ______he went to
school this morning.
b. It was seven o’clock _______he went
to school this morning.
解题点拨：强调句型：It is/was+被强调的成份+that/who+其它部分; 去掉 It is/was….that/who… ,句子照样成立;而定语从句的引导词在句中要作成份。
that
where
that
when
３.定语从句与强调句型
Fill in the blanks with relatives:
1) He still lives in the house ______window
faces to the south.
2) He still lives in the house __ _____the
window faces to the south.
3) He still lives in the house and ___ window
faces to the north.
4) He still lives in the house ____________is
in the north of the city.
whose
of which
that/which
its
实战演习
５) Is this house _________ he visited last yea
６) Is it in this house ______ he was born
the one
that
建议：仔细审题，找到突破口。
加油
Find the mistakes and correct:
1.Einstein is such a great scientist that we must learn from.
2.This is the very place where we visited many years ago.
that
as
1）错用引导词；
常见错误
３. Hangzhou, where we spent last spring there, is one of the most beautiful cities in China.
2）定语从句中的被替换成份没有去掉。
４. She is the only one of the girls in our
class who have been to the United States.
３).定语从句中的谓语动词在人称和数上
应与先行词一致
has
____
　巩固提高:
1.These houses are sold at such a low price ____ people expected.(’00上海）
A. like B. as C. that D. which
2. ____ is reported in the newspapers, talks between the two countries are making progress. (’04北京）
A. It B. As C. That D. What
3. Helen was much kinder to her youngest son than to the others, ____ , of course , made the others envy him. (’04天津）
A. who B. that C. what D. which
４.The gentleman____ you told me yesterday proved to be a thief.(’00上海春招）
A. who B. about whom
C. whom D. with whom
５. Have you seen the film “Titanic”, ____ 　　　leading actor is world-famous (’01上海
A. its B. it’s C. whose D. which
用 思考
________
６. I don't like the way_____ you speak to her.
A.\ B. that C. in which D. All A, B, and C
７.Is this book ____you want to borrow
from the library.
A. that B. which C. the one D.\
８. It is the ability to do the job ___ matters not where you come form or what you are.(’00全国)
A. one B. that C. what D. it
Homework
Review what we have learned.
Finish the exercise in the workbook.(共87张PPT)
《高考英语考试大纲》对完形填空题型的说明：在一篇250－300词的短文中留出20个空白，要求考生从每题所给的4个选项中选出最佳选项，使补足后的短文意思通顺、前后连贯、结构完整。
完形填空是一种综合测试，涉及的知识面很广，也是区分度非常好的题型。完形填空试题实质上是阅读理解与语法结构知识的综合，目的是测试学生综合运用语言的能力。近几年高考英语完形填空题遵循了“突出语篇，强调应用，注重实际”的设题思路，遵循了“以实词为主，虚词为辅，突出词汇语境化”的命题原则。注重考查考生在阅读理解的基础上对英语语言的综合运用能力和对英语基础知识的掌握水平，注重文章内容的生活化，语言的交际性，旨在检测考生在语篇中灵活运用语言知识的能力，要求考生通读全文，掌握文章大意，运用词汇、语法等知识，选择最佳答案，使文章意思畅通，结构完整。这个题型所需用的时间约 15分钟
左右。文章难度相当于课文的难度，基本上无超纲生词。在做此类考题时，我们不应像对待单句选择那样去孤立地解决某一个问题，因为完形填空所设计的每一处空白在内容上都与上下文密切相关。一个空的失误有时会导致对通篇文章的错误理解。
高考完形填空在选材上主要以记叙文、夹叙夹议型的文章为主，伴之以说明文和议论文。所选材料源于生活，时代感强，语言地道，内容健康，情节丰富，寓意深刻，常涉及人物的心理活动描写，集知识、文化、教育和娱乐为一体，具有极强的可读性。其具体的特点有：
一、 文意新颖，贴近生活
完形填空选材一般比较新颖，并具有现代气息，趣味性强并兼有教育意义。知识内涵不超出中学生的认知水平。一般来说，短文的长度在250－300个词左右，平均挖空密度是每两空之间大约为12个单词左右。尽管文章有意挖去了一
些词或短语，使信息链中断，造成间隔性的语义空白，但仍不失为一篇表达完整的文章。如果考生不能理解文章内容，就难以将正确的词填入文中。这也就是完形填空题与以单句形式考查词汇和语法的试题的根本区别。完形填空题一般为记叙文、说明文和夹叙夹议的文章。记叙文具有很强的故事性，故事情节涉及时间、地点、人物、过程、结局等基本要素。说明文一般开篇点题，段落之间承上启下，过渡自然连贯。无论哪种体裁，都提供完整的语篇信息。此外，“词不离句，句不离文”是完形填空最突出的一个特点。
二、注重语境考查，淡化语法
近年来，完形填空越来越侧重考查学生根据上下文所提供的信息进行语言逻辑推理判断的能力，完全凭语法知识作答的题几乎没有，个别小题既要考虑语法知识，又要考虑情景意义，每小题中四个选项的语法功能基本相同，只有通过文章内容情节，即语境，才能“选出1个最佳答案”，其他均为干扰项。这要求学生不仅要捕捉上下文乃至全文的信息，而且要按照事情发展的规律、前因后果等进行综合分析判断，推断正确的答案。
三、实词为主，虚词为辅
试题在着重考查学生阅读理解能力的前提下，兼顾对语言知识、常识、逻辑推理能力的考查。所设选项符合语言规范，且选项一般为同一词类或同一范畴。实词是指那些能够独立担任句子成分的词，如名词、代词、动词、形容词、副词等；虚词则是指连词、介词、冠词等。完形填空的选项设计百分之八十左右为实词，尤其以动词、名词、形容词和副词为多。对连词、介词考查也有一定的比例。
四、融入常识背景考查
有些题目的设置无论从词汇、语法、惯用法还是语境方面都可行，这种情况下，就需要学生借助于常识或某些背景知识来解决问题。我们不仅要熟练掌握所学知识，具有一定的边缘学科知识，还要了解英语文化和风俗习惯等，养成跨文化思维意识。
命
题
角
度 　　一般来说，完形填空的四个选项在形式上完全相同，如都是动词原形、副词、形容词、名词等，所以，解题时要注意它们在意义和搭配上的细微差别，做到形义兼顾。同时，一定要把这些选项放到特定的语境里进行判别，从而选出正确答案。
1.利用褒贬语境，判断是非曲直
几乎每篇完形填空的语境都有一定的褒贬性，这种褒贬性反映了主人公的特定心理和情绪状态，及作者的写作意图，因此利用好文章的语境褒贬性就能对文章进行准确的逻辑判断，在吃透文义并准确传递文义的基础上推断出每一空的准确信息。如何利用语境的褒贬性对完形填空进行信息推断呢？其方法是认真阅读原文，找出反映语境褒贬性的标志性词汇或句子，并大胆预测下文。
　(2011·山东)However, at the last minute, one of the friends couldn’t go, so my brother__39__me the ticket. I was really__40__！
39. A. booked　　　　B. offered
C. returned D. found
40. A. relaxed B. embarrassed
C. excited D. encouraged
【解析】　第40题选C。 从上文推理出我得到票后应该很兴奋。relaxed “放松的”，embarrassed “尴尬的”，excited“兴奋的”，encouraged“受到鼓舞的”。
【答案】　39. B　40. C
　
　2.避免只重汉意，忽略习惯搭配
高考完形填空中有相当一部分试题属于此类。此类试题在题型难度系数属6至8。也是广大考生丢分最多的题型。其原因是考生只注重语义，而忽视了词汇的习惯搭配。所以同学们要准确掌握本句话的情景的同时，更要注意所要填入的名词、形容词、动词与空格前面或后面某个词汇的习惯搭配，尤其要注意与介词或副词的连用特点。
　I went to Professor Jayne, who listened to my arguments but remained__40__.
40. A. unchanged B. unpleasant
C. unfriendly D. unmoved
【解析】　此题易误选A项，这是因为同学们认为unchanged表示“不改变”。但从搭配来看，主语是Professor Jayne，如果用unchanged，是指这个人的样子没有改变。如果用unmoved则表示他不为之所动心。多么重要，用汉语的意思去直接套用理解，而不考虑英语词本身的用法性质，是不行的。
【答案】　D
3．巧妙利用平行结构，准确判断逻辑关系
“平行结构”指的是结构相同或相似，意思密切关联、语气一致的句子或词组成串排列的语言现象。平行结构的形式整齐匀称，内容联系紧密。试题命制者常从平行结构的句式相同或相似这一角度，利用其表现意义的关联或对比这一特点来设空。高考完形填空短文常常会出现这样一些平行结构，掌握这些结构极为相似的句子可大大提高我们的解题效率。
　 In the depths of my memory, many things I did with my father still live. These things come to represent, in fact, what I call__21__and love.
21．A. desire B. joy
C. anger D. worry
【解析】　and表示并列关系，根据后面的love可知，空格处也要填一个相似范畴的名词，所以首先排除C和D项。A项的意思是“愿望”，与后文情节不符，只有joy可表示与父亲在一起的快乐。
【注意】　高考完形填空选择的文章一般都来源于英文原版文章，逻辑性都很强。具体体现在文中，就是会出现一些表示上下文逻辑的连接词，抓住这些词对解题很有帮助。完形填空题给出的选项中会出现不同语义范畴的形容词、副词、动词或名词，这时需要借助于从属连词或并列连词来进行判断。
【答案】　B
命
题
角
度 　　以动词、名词和形容词为中心所构成的词组，通常为考查的重点。平时要注意积累“动词＋介词或副词”“形容词＋介词”“介词＋名词”等词组，并了解它们的含义和基本用法，同时要注意分辨相似词组的差异。
1.注意常用短语动词的辨认
短语动词在完形填空中是十分活跃的成分，在完形填空的考查中占有一定的比重。这类短语有两种考查方式。一是，四个选项中只有一个搭配是正确的，这是最简单的一种；另一种是，四个选项的搭配不止一个正确，这时考生需借助于上下文语义做出适当的判断。
【注意】　介词所构成的固定搭配是一种常见的语言形式，也是英语完形填空测试中经常涉及的考点。对于这类搭配，考生只要平时注意识记即可。
　 (2011·北京) Sometimes I’d get__45__and take a shot at the wrong direction，which made me feel really stupid.__46__， I wasn’t the only one “new” at the game, so I decided to__47__on learning the game, do my best at each practice session, and not be too hard on myself for the things I didn’t__48___“just yet”．
45. A. committed B. motivated
C. embarrassed D. confused
46. A. Interestingly B. Fortunately
C. Obviously D. Hopefully
47. A. focus B. act
C. rely D. try
48. A. want B. do
C. support D. know
【解析】　47题选A。考查动词，该动词与介词on构成词组修饰后句“学习打球”。
【答案】　45. D 46. B 47. A 48. D
2．注意常见的介词习语
这种试题考查考生根据具体的语境，准确使用习语的能力，而这种习语的构成是：形容词＋介词；介词＋名词(＋介词)；名词＋介词等等。对于这些习语的考查，有时是在形容词或名词处挖空，叫同学们根据与之连用的介词和语境进行判断；也可在介词处挖空。
　(2011·上海) In the US, Domino’s Pizza estimates that a regular customer is worth more than $5,000 over ten years. A customer who receives a poor quality product or service on their first visit and__58__never returns, is losing the company thousands of dollars in__59__profits (more if you consider how many people they are likely to tell about their bad experience)．
58. A. as a result B. on the whole
C. in conclusion D. on the contrary
59. A. huge B. potential
C. extra D. reasonable
【解析】　第58题考查介词习语，此处填as a result意为“结果”，强调顾客如果收到了质量差的产品或服务，其结果就不会再成为回头客。on the whole是“总体来说”，in conclusion是“结论”，on the contrary是“相反”的意思，都不合此处意思。
【答案】　58. A　59. B
1.同义词或近义词辨析
选项中所给的4个词词性相同，词义相同或相近。这类题主要考查考生在具体语言环境中对所学同义词或近义词的辨异和运用能力。
命
题
角
度 　　完形填空题的另一命题特点是利用词语辨析知识，按这一手段命制的题占全套题的绝大部分。词语辨析命题法涉及以下四种类型。
　
(2011·浙江)When I told the owner of the shop about my__33__； he gave me a long thoughtful__34__. “This means a lot to you, doesn’t it？” he said. “Come with me.”
33. A. job B. family
C. idea D. offer
34. A. face B. view
C. look D. sight
【解析】　34题答案为C。属于同义辨析法，此考查点多在四级考试完形填空部分中出现，在2008年高考英语浙江卷第26题也曾考查过，当年的难度系数约为0.32。此题中的B.view强调的是眺望风景，C.look强调看的眼神，D.sight强调视力，本文店主深深地看了作者，属于眼神之间的交流，故选C.look。
【答案】　33.C　34.C
2．近形词辨析
选项中所给的四个答案中的词词性相同，拼写形式(至少有两项)相近。这类题主要考查学生是否能准确掌握所学词汇的意义。
　 It is always reassuring(令人欣慰), at times like these, when employees so clearly show their__51__to their jobs. Thank you.
51. A. devotion B. donation
C. connection D. reaction
【解析】　这四个备用选项都是以 tion结尾的形近词。devotion意为：热爱，忠诚。donation：捐赠，connection：联系，reaction：反应。句意为：有时候像这样，当员工们如此明显表现出他们对工作的忠于职守时，总是令人安慰的。所以此处要用devotion表示“忠于职守”。
【答案】　A
3．常用词汇辨析
选项中所给的4个词词性相同，在词性和词形上无任何联系，或者说联系不大。此类题的特点是，脱离语境，或只看句子的一部分，可能会有两个或两个以上的正确答案，但语境分析，则只有一个是正确的。这类题主要考查学生的词汇量与词汇运用能力。
　(2011·山东)I remember the buzz (嘈杂声) of excitement inside the theatre as we all found our__41__.
41. A. seats B. entrance
C. spots D. space
【解析】　inside the theatre“在剧场里面”应是找到座位。entrance“入口”， spots“地点，现场”，space“空白，空”。
【答案】　A
4．转换词语辨析
选项中所给的4个词为表示上下文各种逻辑关系的转换词语。这类题主要是考察考生对上下文逻辑关系的理解，如转折关系、让步关系、因果关系、递进关系、增补关系、对比关系等，并考查考生对转换词语的运用能力。
　
(2011·山东)After the __53__ , I became a Black Wednesday fan too for a few years before getting into other kinds of music. Once in a while, __54__， I listen to one of their songs and __55__I’m back at that first show.
53. A. competition B. performance
C. interview D. celebration
54. A. though B. otherwise
C. instead D. besides
55. A. decide B. regret
C. conclude D. imagine
【解析】　第54题考查转换词语，上文讲到经过那次演出后，我也成了该乐队的粉丝，后来才转到其他音乐。此处有转折的意思，然而，偶尔我听到他们的歌，我就会想象着又回到了当时那个现场。故用though“然而”。
【答案】　53. B　 54. A　 55. D
命
题
角
度 　　完形填空题中也有考查语法知识的题目，考生不仅要理解上下文的逻辑关系，更要有针对性的对语法结构、句式特点，对短文中所留空格中需填的词在句子里作什么成分，哪类词合适，应采取什么形式等进行必要的分析思考。比如，选用动词就要考虑各种时态、语态、语气、谓语形式、非谓语形式、及物、不及物、非持续性质、主谓搭配以及其如何与其它词类配合使用等一系列问题。熟练地掌握基础语法知识并运用其进行分析解答是一种非常有效的解题方法。
1.根据行文关系，准确判断代词
一篇文章，为了简洁起见，在后文的内容中，对于前文出现的人或物往往用代词替代，所以完形填空中也经常会有考查这方面语法现象的试题。同学们做这类试题时，要注意到人称代词的单复数形式、替代词的特指和泛指等等。
　 (2008·陕西)When the children came back to steal her__29__， she had them stuck on the tree. They had to beg her long__30__she gave the tree permission to let__31__go.
29. A. branch B. food
C. tree D. fruit
30. A. after B. while
C. since D. before
31. A. it B. them
C. him D. her
【解析】　第31题考查的是人称代词，由于此处所替代的是the children，所以要用them。
【答案】　 29. D 　30. D　 31. B
2．根据逻辑联系，恰当使用从句
定语从句、状语从句和名词性从句是形文成篇的衔接性语句，完形填空中有很多试题是关于从句知识的，旨在考查考生的语篇行文逻辑能力。做此类试题时，同学们要注意判断挖空处在句中充当的成分，以及前后部分的逻辑联系。
　 (2011·浙江)Two years ago, I decided that I would need to have some kind of extra work to__25__my disability pension (残疾抚恤金). __26__I needed to sleep in the afternoons, I was limited in my__27__. I decided that I would consider __28__to singing in restaurants.
25. A. add up to B. make up for
C. get rid of D. take advantage of
26. A. If B. As
C. Though D. Before
27. A. movement B. condition
C. choices D. positions
28. A. reaching out B. living up
C. getting on D. going back
【解析】　第26题选B。考查状语从句的连接词。此类型多用于句子与句子之间，解决连词的问题。此题因为作者下午需要睡觉，所以受到限制。
【答案】　25. B　 26.B　 27. C　 28. D
3．根据态度情感，准确使用情态动词
　 (2007·天津) The second rich man ，seeing the__31__situation, stopped for a short time and gave__32__all his food and drink, since he__33__see that money would be of little__34__to them.
31. A. curious B. worrying
C. dangerous D. puzzling
32. A. the villagers B. his servants
C. the others D. the rest
33. A. could B. might
C. should D. must
34. A. interest B．concern
C. use D. attraction
【解析】　第33题是有关情态动词用法的试题。根据他的行为可以判断选情态动词could表“能够”。
【答案】　 31.B　 32.A　 33.A　 34.C
命
题
角
度 　　完形填空题的基本形式是独立的语篇，它以自身的内容提供完整的语篇信息，其中有时渗透着如文化科学、历史地理、风俗民情等方面的知识。考生在做题时，若能积极地调动自己所掌握的文化背景和生活常识知识，特别是注意中西文化的差异，并巧妙地加以运用，将会大大简化复杂的分析与判断过程，节省宝贵的时间，顺利地沿作者的思路阅读下去。
After swimming, I would go__32__his office and sit on the wooden chair in front of his big desk, where he let me__33__anything I found in his top desk drawer.
32．A. away from B. out of
C. by D. inside
33．A. put up B. break down
C. play with D. work out
【解析】　第33题考查词汇辨析。put up张贴，搭建，为某人提供食宿；break down机器出故障，身体垮掉，感情失去控制，分解； work out 计算出，想出；play with 与……玩。根据生活常识，小孩子从抽屉里找可以找到的东西，当然是用来玩。
【答案】　32.D　33.C
1.运用词汇复现、轻松选择判断
复现有原词复现、同义词复现、反义词复现、同根词复现、概括词复现等。完形填空中，考生可以利用上下文的复现信息，确定正确的表达方式。
命
题
角
度 　　完形填空中有些空格的四个选项从词汇搭配、语法和单句的角度考虑均行得通。但由于文章是一个完整的统一体，词、句、段三者存在着内在逻辑关系，此时，需要在上下文中寻找有关的提示或暗示，对文章的情节进行逻辑推理，抓住关键信息的词语，理顺句与句之间的关系，确定合理的答案。
(1)原词复现
为了表达的需求，在具体的上下文中同一概念重复出现。考生可以借助于上下文中这一信息选择答案。
　 (2011·山东)But in the end, after three encores (加演), the show finished. We left the__50__and walked unsteadily out onto the pavement.
50. A. party B. theatre
C. opera D. stage
【解析】　解此题的关键是根据上文的第二段开头的I remember the buzz (嘈杂声) of excitement inside the theatre as we all found our__41__.中出现了theatre。做完形应该瞻前顾后，注意某些词语在文章中的复现。
【答案】　B
(2)同义词、近义词、反义词复现
同义词，近义词和反义词是借助意思相同、相近或相反的表达方式，或解释性的语言使上下文语意得以连接起来。做完形填空时，考生应注意分析上下文中出现的解释性语言。
　 (2011·浙江)Music has always been a great love of mine and, in my 20s, when my__21__was more manageable , I__22__ten years as a professional singer in restaurants, playing and singing folk songs.
21. A. loneliness B. sadness
C. tiredness D. sickness
22. A. set B. enjoyed
C. kept D. shared
【解析】　属于同义词复现法，首句中出现ill，此选项应是ill的同义表达，故选sickness。
【答案】　21.D　22.B
　(2008·辽宁) I never felt so__55__as I did that day.
55. A. angry B. rich
C. patient D. bitter
【解析】　文章一开始作者便交待了他们家穷困(poor)。看到她的女儿花钱给需要礼物的孩子买圣诞礼物，被她的精神感动，所以作者在精神方面很富有，故选用rich与poor相对应。
【答案】　B
(3)同源词复现
对于上下文语意复现的表达，考生还借助复现信息的同源词。
　 “I have a brilliant design for our __40__container！” I said when Cassie arrived.“ We can__41__the egg with some butter cream.”
40. A. butter B. sandwich
C. cream D. egg
41. A. project B. replace
C. carry D. mix
【解析】　41. A。根据前文中的a projective container可知此处要用projective的动词形式project意为“使 ……凸出”。
【答案】　40.D　41.A
2．高屋建瓴，把握主旨
完形填空是考查英语知识综合运用能力的试题，它主要考查考生对上下文的精细理解和缜密的逻辑判断能力，而利用文章的首句，就能抓住文章的主旨大意并在主旨大意的引导下进行合乎逻辑的推理判断，从而正确推断出文章的隐匿信息。
　And I think it is not only what we “look at life once, in childhood” that determines our memories, but__40__， in that childhood, look at us.
40. A. which B. who
C. what D. whose
【解析】　作者回忆了童年时期父亲观看他游泳和在父亲办公室里可以玩一些从抽屉里找到的东西，从而给他带来了美好的回忆，至今记忆犹新。所以发出了“童年时期，谁看着我们长大的也是很重要的”感慨。所以此处要用who暗指作者的父亲。
【注意】　有的同学或是急于求成，总想“一步到位”，或是由于原文设置空格所造成的理解障碍，担心通读文章时不但抓不住大意反而浪费时间，未通览全文即边读边填，结果是就句论句，无法形成连贯的思路，或“见木不见林”，理解偏离文章的中心，欲速则不达。因此，大家首先要克服不良心理，满怀信心，全神贯注，目光越过空格，注重把握文章的整体内容，注意能体现文章大意的关键词句。开始阅读时可能会有模模糊糊，类似“钻山洞”的感觉，此时千万不可半途而废；再往下读，文意会逐渐显露 ，读完全文心里往往会有“豁然开朗”之感。
要重视文章首句的作用，一般情况下，首句不设空格，这就为大家窥视文章全貌提供了一个“窗口”。通过文章的首句大家可以对文章进行比较准确的定位。
另外，大家要给文章准确定位，不仅要重视文章的首句，有时注意一下文章的结尾，首尾联系起来，对文章的定位会更准确。
抓住文章的主旨大意后，考生围绕主旨大意去阅读、预测、推理、判断，往往会收到事半功倍的效果。抓住了主旨，一些干扰性强，容易使人犯想当然错误的选项也就起不到作用了。
【答案】　B
做“完形填空”题最忌拿到试题就开始边读边填空。从表面上看似乎是快了，但实际上由于对全文的大意心中无数，往往做了后面，忘了前面，很可能是漏洞百出，“欲速则不达”。因此，这种做题方法是不可取的。要完全做好完形填空，必须在通读全文、把握结构与大意的前提下，根据所提供的选项和句子的结构、语法、语篇等信息，通过逻辑推理、对比等手段最后确定答案。
理解全文是高分突破完形填空的基础。速读全文要一气呵成，尽管有空格、生词或不明白的地方，仍要快速读下去。读时要注意找出关键词、中心词，画出某些代表人物和情节的词，以便形成思路。考生在阅读时，要善于从文章开头的几句话中把握它的背景、主题或结构，并结合常识判断构建一定的预期。通常情况下，文章开头的一、二句话都是完整的信息，这些句子揭示文章的背景知识或主题思想，考生在阅读中一定要仔细研读，为后面的阅读扫清障碍。
先读所填词的句子，回顾上一句，兼顾下一句。如果一句中有两个空格，在初定答案时要“双管齐下”，在两处同时试填，然后通读全句，确定答案。在填每个空格时，可以从出题者的出题思路着手，初步选出每个题的答案。总的来说，有六种出题思路。A：词义与词形的辨析。B：逻辑关系。C：结构识别。D：固定搭配。E：动词的用法。F：介词的用法。或者结合上下文找答案，文章中会有一些信息的复现或重复。遇到少数没有把握的选项时，可暂时跳过空格，顺着原来的思路继续进行，等到大部分答案选出后，借助已经补全的信息，进一步加深对文章的理解，再回过头来推敲剩余的选项，就会有柳暗花明的感觉。
最后，把填好的短文通读一遍，进行核查，看看所选的答案是否能使上下文(段与段、句与句之间的衔接)连贯，是否合乎逻辑，同时还要从语法、词汇、惯用法、常识甚至是语感等方面考虑验证，特别要对第一次没有把握的选项进行推敲，以便准确敲定答案。
(2011·山东)I first went to hear a live rock concert when I was eight years old. My brother and his friends were all__1__of a heavy metal group called Black Wednesday. When they__2__that Black Wednesday were going to perform at our local theatre, they all bought__3__for performance. However, at the last minute, one of the friends couldn’t go, so my brother__4__me the ticket. I was really__5__！
I remember the buzz (嘈杂声) of excitement inside the theatre as we all found our__6__. After a few minutes, the lights went down and everybody became__7__. I could barely make out the stage in the __8__. We waited. Then there was a roar from the crowd, like an explosion, as the first members of the band__9__the stage. My brother leaned over and shouted something in my ear, but I couldn’t__10__what he was saying. The first song was already starting and the music was as__11__as a jet engine. I could__12__the drum beats and bass notes in my stomach.
I can’t recall any of the songs that the band played. I just__13__that I really enjoyed the show and didn’t want it to__14__. But in the end, after three encores (加演), the show finished. We left the__15__and walked unsteadily out onto the pavement. I felt a little dizzy, as if I had just __16__from a long sleep. My ears were still__17__with the beat of the last song.
After the__18__， I became a Black Wednesday fan too for a few years before getting into other kinds of music. Once in a while，__19__， I listen to one of their songs and __20__I’m back at that first show.
【语篇解读】　本文是记叙文，讲述了作者在八岁时第一次听现场摇滚音乐会的经历和感受，以及后来也成为那个Black Wednesday乐队的粉丝，也因此喜欢和走入其他的音乐，但是再听这个乐队的乐曲时又会回忆起那个演唱会的情境。
【评析】　此篇文章内容贴近生活，情节简单明晰。文章词汇和句式结构均不复杂，设题通过上下文推断和常识推断可以得出。可以看出高考完形填空的趋势是贴近生活的话题，记叙文体裁为主，理解和交际为目的，而词汇、句式多为高频词汇。文章短而设空密，也是考查学生语篇理解和重新构建完整语篇的能力。
1. A. members　　　　　B. friends
C. fans D. volunteers
解析　考查上下文。下文最后一段有照应“I became a Black Wednesday fan too for a few years ”有好几年我也成了Black Wednesday的粉丝。
答案　C
2. A. guessed B. discovered
C. thought D. predicted
解析　考查句意理解和词义辨析。discovered“发现”。他们发现Black Wednesday乐队要在当地的剧院演出，都买了票。guessed“猜测”，thought“认为”，predicted“预测”。
答案　B
3. A. flowers B. drinks
C. clothes D. tickets
解析　考查搭配。“ticket for...”表演的票。
答案　D
4. A. booked B. offered
C. returned D. found
解析　考查上下文。offered “主动提供”，从上文看，因为演出前最后一分钟有一个朋友不能去，我的哥哥就将票给了我。
答案　B
5. A. relaxed B. embarrassed
C. excited D. encouraged
解析　逻辑关系题。从上文推理出我得到票后应该很兴奋。relaxed “放松的”，embarrassed“尴尬的” ，excited“兴奋的”，encouraged“受到鼓舞的”。
答案　C
6. A. seats B. entrance
C. spots D. space
解析　考查逻辑推理。inside the theatre“在剧场里面”应是找到座位。entrance“入口”， spots“地点，现场”，space“空白，空”。
答案　A
7. A. comfortable B. quiet
C. serious D. nervous
解析　考查常识。和上文刚入场的嘈杂对比，要演出了应是静下来了。
答案　B
8. A. silence B. noise
C. darkness D. smoke
解析　考查语境。从上文“make out the stage”，指很难辨认出舞台，可推断因为太黑所以看不清。
答案　C
9. A. fell upon B. got through
C. broke into D. stepped onto
解析　考查词义辨析。踏上舞台用“stepped onto”。fell upon指“躺在……上” ，got through“通过；做完”，broke into “闯入”。
答案　D
10. A. forget B. hear
C. repeat D. bear
解析　根据上下文，演员走上舞台，现场一片混乱，我自然是听不到哥哥向我喊了什么。
答案　B
11. A. loud B. hard
C. sweet D. fast
解析　句意理解题。下文表明十分响，就像一架喷气式飞机。
答案　A
12. A. feel B. touch
C. enjoy D. digest
解析　考查语境。我能感觉到鼓点和贝斯的声音在我的肚子上震动。
答案　A
13. A. realize B. understand
C. believe D. remember
解析　对应上文的recall “记起；回忆起”。
答案　D
14. A. continue B. delay
C. finish D. change
解析　下文有提示finish。
答案　C
15. A. party B. theatre
C. opera D. stage
解析　考查上下文。只得离开了剧场，上文有提示“theatre”。
答案　B
16. A. escaped B. traveled
C. benefited D. woken
解析　考查对上下文的理解。我感到有些眩晕，好像刚从一场长梦中醒来。
答案　D
17. A. aching B. burning
C. ringing D. rolling
解析　考查词义辨析。耳朵鸣响用“ringing”。aching“疼痛”，burning“燃烧”。rolling“滚动”。
答案　C
18. A. competition B. performance
C. interview D. celebration
解析　考查行文逻辑。应是在演出后。
答案　B
19. A. though B. otherwise
C. instead D. besides
解析　行文逻辑题，though做副词，意为“然而”。
答案　A
20. A. decide B. regret
C. conclude D. imagine
解析　考查语境。imagine意为“想象”着又回到了当时的那个现场。
答案　D
　
　记叙文分为记事和记人两种形式。主要包括事件叙述、故事、幽默、名人传记等。通常为了叙述方便，作者会按时间先后顺序或空间顺序等方式来安排情节和内容。这类文章条理清楚，层次分明。读者也较容易理解和接受。但有时为了突出某个情节或为了增加阅读趣味，或为了其他目的，作者可能会采用插叙，甚至倒叙的写作手法。
记叙文是中学英语阅读材料中最常见的文体，其语言特点有：
1．以一般过去时为主，其他时态为辅。合理使用丰富多彩的谓语动词时态，而这种复杂的时态特征在汉语记叙文中是根本没有的。正是有了动词时态的变化，才使英语文章中所叙述的动作有了层次感和立体感。
2．广泛使用动词，特别是动态动词。由于这些动词的存在，文章就会充满“动感”，而这种让往事历历在目的“动感”正是优秀的记叙文所要追求的。
3．适当运用直接引语。直接引语的使用可以代替间接的主观叙述，简洁、生动地表达出事件发展的过程和各种人物的心理活动，充分展示人物的独特个性和人物之间的相互关系。
1．在阅读时，先浏览全文，判断出文章的叙述方式，以便抓住文章的主线，理清文章的脉络。然后依据文章信息，了解文章内容的来龙去脉，进而达到对文意的透彻理解，这样才能做出合理的选择。
2. 记叙文往往有较强的故事趣味性，有情节的跌宕起伏和情感的细腻变化等特点，信息量很大。作者在叙述过程中往往会融入人物的语言、行为、心理的描写，这在一定程度上增加了考生理解文章的难度。这时，必须理清上下文的脉络，对人物的语言、行为、心理等给出合理的想像和推理，并仔细揣摩作者的用意，从而透彻理解文意，达到对语境的准确理解，进而做出合理的选择。
3. 命题倾向于注重短文本身的教育意义或选取记叙具有特殊个性品质的人物故事，给人以启迪或鼓舞；作者有时在记叙过程中或记叙结束后发表自己的看法和感受。因此只有借助上下文乃至全文的语境才能揣摩作者的心境，及其对各个角色、各个事件的态度。在答题过程中，除了要把握关联词语，还要把握语气、动作等的描写，以期与作者达到共鸣。
4．弄清文章是以第几人称的视角展开记叙的。通常英语记叙文展开记叙的视角有两个：第一人称和第三人称。用第一人称就是从“参与者”的角度进行记叙，读者可从字里行间感受到作者的态度和情感。用第三人称就是以“观察者”的身份展开叙述，作者的语气比较客观，与读者保持着一定的距离，使读者的注意力更多集中在故事本身。了解了作者的写作角度有助于我们走进作者的思维，深入理解文章的意义。
夹叙夹议类完形填空，顾名思义就是把叙述和议论有机地结合起来，一方面叙述某一事情，另一方面又对此事加以分析与评论。一般而言，全文先提出论点，然后以事例说明论点，最后由论点得出结论。也可以是一边叙述事情经过，一边对事情加以分析、评论，在文章最后一段用一句概括性的话点明主题。这种表达方式中的叙述与议论为一个整体，不可分开，其中“叙”是“议”的基础，“议”是“叙”的渗透和延伸。记叙是“画龙”，议论是“点睛”，即通过对叙述进行议论从而达到一定的深度和广度，体现一种思想，得出一个结论。解答夹叙夹议类完形填空必须做到整体合一，“大环境”与“小环境”有机结合。要注意叙述与议论之间的相互转换，及时调整自己的思维方式。
夹叙夹议文
解答夹叙夹议类完形填空时，应着重把握以下规律：
1．认真理解开篇首句，把握文章主题。首句一般在文章中起着启示的作用，可作为我们探索短文的“窗口”，由此判断文章的体裁，推测全文大意乃至主题。
2．善于抓住文章中心句、中心段，充分领会文章思想、把握文章脉络。
3．抓住线索，注意情节的变化，以求综观上下文，达到整体理解文意，从而避免片面性和断章取义。
解答夹叙夹议类完形填空解题技巧： (三抓、二读、一体)
1．抓首句；
2．抓中心；
3．抓线索；
4．针对叙述内容和议论内容分别进行相关阅读；
5．找出叙述、议论部分相关的命题规律与特点，分清论点、论据的习惯表达方式，找准文章的论点、论据和结论句式，使叙述与议论浑然一体。
说明文一般用简练的语言，按一定的方法介绍事物的类别、性质、特点、构造、成因、关系或事物的运动变化、发展的过程及规律。议论文由三个要素组成：论点、论据、论证。有着较强的说教目的和一定的语言深度。说明文十分讲究条理性，一般采用时间顺序、空间顺序或逻辑顺序。
说明文通常具有下列特点：
1．多用现在时态。因为说明文通常是对客观事物或事理的一种介绍与解释，而这种客观介绍与解释一般是不随时间变化而变化的。
2．采用客观描述。说明文一般是对客观存在的说明与介绍，因此，语言的表述也应该尽可能地给人以客观可信的感觉。
3．遣词用字简练、平实、确切。
说明文的主要目的是帮助读者认清事物，明白事理，故其语言通常较为浅显、通俗，比较易于读者理解。其内容也很客观真实，它的用词总是贴近事物的本来面目，不会使用华丽的词藻和夸张的写作手法，一般也不加描述和议论。
做好说明文完形填空，最主要的是抓住文章说明的中心，这要求考生做好三个方面：
1．注意文章的说明顺序，常见的说明顺序有时间、空间、逻辑(指先因后果或先果后因，先主后次的顺序)和认识顺序(指由此及彼，由浅入深，由局部到整体，由现象到本质，由具体到抽象的顺序)。把握了说明的顺序，就能准确把握文章的脉络，抓住文章中心。
2．注意段落之间的逻辑关系，说明文的首段往往是文章的主题段，每段的首句也是主题句，一定把握好主题段和主题句，这是做好这类完形填空题的前提。
3．注意文章结尾，文章结尾的段落往往对说明的问题进行总的概括，有时就是文章的点睛之处。
议论文是高考完形填空中较难的文章。议论文由三个要素组成：论点、论据、论证。有着较强的说教目的和一定的语言深度。
议论文完形填空的特点：结构清晰、脉络有序。
1．有些议论型完形填空的首句常常是文章的主旨句。作者一般在文章的首段提出论点，然后在各段的首句提出分论点。
2．还有些议论文先叙述生活中的一件具体的事情或描述生活中的现象，然后根据事情或现象所反映的问题提出自己的论点。然后再用具体的论据去说明自己的论点。
3．此外，也有些议论文一开始作者仅仅是列举生活中的现象，而不表明自己的观点，然后通过对具体现象的分析，自然得出一种结论，这种结论往往就是作者的论点。
要做好高考完形填空中的议论文，最主要的是要抓住作者议论的中心，也就是要理清文章的论点、论据和论证。抓住论点是理解议论文的关键所在。
可以从以下几个角度寻找或概括中心论点：分析论点所在的位置。①题目。有的文章题目本身就是中心论点；②开头。有的文章在开头直接提出中心论点，然后逐层论述；③中间。有的文章在论述过程中提出中心论点，这种情况较少；④结尾。有的文章通过论述，在文章结尾处归纳出全文的中心论点。
论据是论点赖以存在的根据，一般分为事实论据和道理论据。阅读议论文，要学会分析论点与论据的关系、论据在证明论点时所起的作用。事实论据，应该分析作者所提供的事实，从事实中发现道理，再验证它与作者的论点的逻辑关系。道理论据，应该从道理论据出发联系和道理对应的事实，来验证这些道理如何证明论点。(共72张PPT)
第十讲 定语从句
1．关系词的使用，特别是which，that，when，where等；
2．介词和关系代词连用时，介词的选用；
3．以as引导的定语从句；
4．只用that的情况；
5．只用which的情况；
6．关系代词与关系副词的选用；
7．定语从句与强调句型的区别。
从2011年的考题来看，定语从句主要考查引导定语从句的关系代词和关系副词、非限制性定语从句(特别是先行词是整个句子时)、“介词＋关系代词”引导的定语从句。此外，非限制性定语从句关系代词as和which的区别，是近年来的热点之一；对于表地点、时间的先行词模糊化，为近年来高考的热点和难点。
1．(2011·全国卷Ⅰ) The prize will go to the writer________story shows the most imagination.
A. that　　　　　　　B. which
C. whose D. what
解析　考查定语从句whose作定语的用法。句意：奖品将发给其故事最具想象力的作家。story与先行词writer之间为所属关系，故用whose。
答案　　C
2. (2010·山东) That’s the new machine________parts are too small to be seen.
A. that B. which
C. whose D. What
解析　本题考查定语从句的引导词。句意应为“那就是那台零部件小得几乎看不见的新机器。”空格处引导定语从句并且在从句中作定语使用，所以使用whose。
答案　　C
3. (2010·陕西)The old temple________roof was damaged in storm is now under repair.
A. where B. which
C. its D. whose
解析　考查定语从句。所填词引导定语从句，先行词是the old temple，关系词在从句中做roof的定语，用关系代词whose，选D。其余选项与题意不符。
答案　　D
4. (2010·北京) Children who are not active or________diet is high in fat will gain weight quickly.
A. what B. whose
C. which D. that
解析　本题考查定语从句关系代词的选择。句意“不爱运动或者饮食热量偏高的孩子们会很快发胖。”本定语从句不缺成分，为主系表结构，因此只能在考虑填关系代词。A中的what不能引导定语从句。选B. whose谁的，符合题意。
答案　　B
5．(2009·安徽)Many children，________parents are away working in big cities，are taken good care of in the village.
A．their B．whose
C．of them D．with whom
解析　先行词为children，将先行词还原到定语从句中：many children’s parents are away working in big cities。由此可以看出被还原部分为many children’s，用了一个’s所有格作定语修饰parents。在所有的关系词中只有whose可以在定语从句中作定语，故答案选B。
答案　　B
　whose用来指人或物，在定语从句中只作定语
I know the girl whose father is our headmaster.
我认识那个女孩，她的父亲是我们的校长。
The classroom whose door is broken will soon be repaired.
门破了的那间教室很快就会被维修。
that引导的定语从句
1．(2011·山东)The old town has narrow streets and small houses________are built close to each other.
A. they　　　　　　　　 B. where
C. what D. that
解析　此题考查定语从句的引导词。句意：“这个老城镇拥有建的彼此靠近的狭窄的街道和狭小的房屋”。定语从句中缺少主语指物，因此用 that。
答案　　D
2. (2010·全国卷Ⅱ)I refuse to accept the blame for something________was someone else’s fault.
A. who B. that
C. as D. what
解析　考查定语从句的引导词。不定代词something作先行词，用that引导定语从句。
答案　　B
3．(2011·北京) Mary was much kinder to Jack than she was to the others，________， of course, made all the others upset.
A. who B. which
C. what D. that
解析　 考查非限定性定语从句。逗号后的非限定性定语从句中缺少主语，选择which。
答案　　B
1．不用that的情况
(1)引导非限定性定语从句时
(2)介词后不能用。
2．只能用that作为定语从句的关系代词的情况
(1)在there be 句型中，只用that，不用which。
(2)在不定代词，如：anything, nothing, the one, all, much, few, any, little等作先行词时，只用that，不用which。
(3)先行词有the only, the very修饰时，只用that。
(4)先行词为序数词、数词、形容词最高级时，只用that。
(5)先行词既有人，又有物时。例如：
All that is needed is a supply of oil.
所需的只是供油问题。
Finally, the thief handed everything that he had stolen to the police.
那贼最终把偷的全部东西交给了警察。
【专家提醒】
定语从句和同位语从句的区别
定语从句与前面的名词是修饰与被修饰的关系“……的(名词)”。而同位语从句是用来说明前面名词的内容。与that从句同位的名词必须是一些表事实或概念的抽象名词，如fact, news, belief, truth, reply等。that在定语从句中作成分，可用which 或who/whom代替；而that在同位语从句中不充当任何句子成分，只起连接作用。试比较：
We all have heard the news that our team won.
我们都听到了我们球队胜利的消息。 (同位语从句，that从句表示news的内容，that 在从句中不作任何成分)
We don’t believe the news that/which he told us yesterday.
我们不相信他昨天告诉我们的那个消息。(定语从句，that 作told 的宾语)
1．(2011·江西)She showed the visitors around the museum, the construction________had taken more than three years.
A. for which　　　　　B. with which
C. of which D. to which
解析　考查定语从句。先行词为museum，在从句中充当定语，博物馆的建造工程花费了超过三年的时间，介词用of。选C。
答案　　C
2．(2011·浙江) English is a language shared by several diverse cultures, each of________uses it somewhat differently.
A. which B. what
C. them D. those
解析　 考点为高一重点非限制性定语从句，其实考生看到那标志性的逗号就应该有所觉悟。前面主句完整不缺成分，故后面部分一定为状语或定语从句，根据句意可以判断出后面是对前面cultures的解释，则确定是定语从句cultures即先行词，排除B(并非名词性从句)、C(代词，引导从句不当)、D(副词，词不达意)。
答案　　A
3．(2011·湖南)Julie was good at German, French and Russian , all of________she spoke fluently.
A. who B. whom
C. which D. that
解析　考查定语从句复合关系词的选用。介词后不能用that，由于先行词是语言，故选C。
答案　　C
4．(2010·上海)Wind power is an ancient source of energy________we may return in the near future.
A．on which B．by which
C．to which D．from which
解析　考查定语从句。句意：风力是很古老的一种能源，不久的将来我们也许会再利用它。return to“重新利用”，属于固定搭配。故排除含有介词on，by和from的A、B、D项。
答案　　C
5．(2010·浙江)The settlement is home to nearly 1,000 people，many of________left their village homes for a better life in the city.
A．whom B．which
C．them D．those
解析　考查定语从句。该从句的先行词是nearly 1,000 people，然后把先行词“代入”从句中，判断其在从句中的“地位”和“作用”，此处先行词在定语从句中作of的宾语，应该用关系代词whom，据此选A项。
答案　　A
1．介词＋关系代词中介词的宾语只能是which或whom
The gentleman about whom you told me yesterday proved to be a thief.
你昨天告诉我的那位绅士证实是小偷。
In the dark street，there wasn’t a single person to whom she could turn for help.
在漆黑的大街上没有一个人能为她提供帮助。
2．当复合介词短语＋which引导定语从句时，这种定语从句常与先行词用逗号隔开，从句用倒装语序
He lived in a big house，in front of which stood a big tall tree.
他住在一所大房子里，房前有一棵大树。
3．介词＋which/whom＋不定式结构
The poor man has no house in which to live.
那个可怜的人没有房子住。
4．of＋which/whom表示所属关系。(表所属关系也可用whose)
Recently I bought an ancient vase，the price of which(＝whose price) was very reasonable.
最近我买了个古代的花瓶，它的价钱很合理。
1．(2011·江苏)Between the two parts of the concert is an interval，________the audience can buy ice cream.
A. when　　　　　　B. where
C. that D. which
解析　这道题考查非限定性定语从句。首先解析句子结构，判断从句类型，题干说“在音乐会中间有间歇，此时你可以买冰激凌。”题干的前半部分完整无缺，后半部分补充说明这个间歇你可以干的事，所以这是一个非限定性定语从句，先行词为interval，非限定性定语从句的功能就是对先行词进行补充说明。由于从句部分不缺少主干成分，而且interval表时间，所以正确答案为A.
答案　　A
2．(2011·浙江)A bank is the place________they lend you an umbrella in fair weather and ask for it back when it begins to rain.
A. when B. that
C. where D. there
解析　 主句主系表结构俱全，后面一定是起修饰作用的定语或状语从句，看意思从句是在解释前面的place是一个怎么样的地方，确定是定语从句且先行词即place。而从句主谓宾结构俱全也不缺成分，因此用连接副词where在从句中代替place充当状语。句子的中文直译：银行，是在天晴之时借伞给你、到了下起雨来之时就催你还回去的地方。
答案　　C
3．(2011·福建)She has a gift for creating an atmosphere for her students________allows them to communicate freely with each other.
A. which B. where
C. what D. who
解析　考查限制性定语从句关系词的选用。句中atmosphere为先行词，which引导定语从句且在从句中作主语。
答案　　A
4．(2010·江西)The girl arranged to have piano lessons at the training centre with her sister________she would stay for an hour.
A．where B．who
C．which D．what
解析　考查关系词的用法。由空后句子中的stay可知，先行词应为表示地点的the training centre；同样由stay可知，先行词在定语从句中作状语。故用关系副词where引导限制性定语从句。
答案　　A
1．关系词的选择主要依据先行词在从句中所作的成分，先行词在从句中作主语、定语、宾语时，选择关系代词(who，whom，that，which，whose)；先行词在从句中作状语时，应选择关系副词(where，when，why)。
2．who，whom，that这些词代替的先行词是表示人的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等。
Is he the man who/that wants to see you
他就是想见你的那个人吗？(who/that在从句中作主语)
He is the man whom/that I am waiting for.
他就是我正在等待的那个人。(whom/that在从句中作宾语)
which，that所代替的先行词是表示事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等。
He failed in the exam，which made his father angry.
他考试不及格，这使他父亲很生气。
3．关系副词when，where，why的先行词是表示时间、地点或理由的名词，在从句中作状语。具体用法如下：when指时间，在定语从句中作时间状语；where指地点，在定语从句中作地点状语；why指原因，在定语从句中作原因状语。
The reason why I don’t trust him is that he often tells lies.
我不信任他的原因是他常常撒谎。
【专家提醒】　先行词是时间名词或地点名词时，如果在从句中不作状语，则不能用when或where引导定语从句，而要用which/that。
I still remember the day which/that we spent together in the city.
我仍然记得我们一起在那座城市度过的那一天。(这里which/that指代the day作spent的宾语)。
1．(2010·四川)After graduating from college，I took some time off to go travelling，________turned out to be a wise decision.
A．that　　　　　　　 　　B．which
C．when D．where
解析　考查非限制性定语从句。在此，which引导非限制性定语从句，指代前面句子的内容。句意：大学毕业后我抽出一部分时间去旅游，事实证明这是一个明智的选择。
答案　　B
2．(2011·全国卷Ⅱ) Ted came for the weekend wearing only some shorts and a T shirt，________is a stupid thing to do in such weather.
A. this B. that
C. what D. which
解析　which引导非限制性定语从句，其先行词是前面整个句子。
答案　　D
3．(2009·全国卷Ⅱ)My friend showed me round the town，________was very kind of him.
A. which B. that
C. where D. it
解析　 考查非限制性定语从句(这儿的which指代前面整句话内容。)
答案　 　A
1．关系代词as引导的定语从句
关系代词as既可以引导限制性定语从句，也可以引导非限制性定语从句，as在从句中作主语、宾语或表语。引导限制性定语从句常用于下列句式：
(1)such...as...像……那样的……。当先行词被such修饰或本身是such 时，as作为关系代词，引导定语从句，修饰这个先行词。如：
We hope to get such a tool as he is using.
我们希望弄到像他使用的一样的工具。
They are such warmed hearted men as I’ll never forget.他们是那样热心的，我永远不会忘记的人们。
That was such terrible weather as destroyed our whole trip plan.
那是一个那样可怕的天气，毁坏了我们的整个旅游计划。
【专家提醒】　
such...as...与such...that...的区别
as引导定语从句，as要在从句中作主语、宾语或表语。that引导结果状语从句，that在从句中不作成分。如：
He is such a good student as all the teachers like.
他是那样一个老师们都喜欢的好学生。
He is such a good student that all the teachers like him.
他是那样一个好学生，以致于老师们都喜欢他
(2)the same...as...像……一样的……。这是一个习惯句式，当先行词是the same或被the same修饰时，后面的定语从句常用as引导，这时as是关系代词，常在定语从句中作主语、宾语或表语。这样的定语从句常用省略形式。如：
I live in the same house as he(lives in).
我的房子与他的房子相同。
She got the same salary as a man(got)．
她的薪金与男的相同。
【专家提醒】　
as引导的这种从句有时用that或where引导。that表示“同一个人或物”；as表示“相同中的另一个”。如：
I lived in the same house that he lives in.我与他住在同一房子中。
I lived in the same house where he lives.
比较：the same...that...像……一样的……。that引导定语从句，表示“同一个”。如：
She gave him the same answer as before：“No”．
她回答他跟以前一样：“不。”
This is the same dictionary that I lost last week.
这部词典同我上星期丢失的那一本一样。
2．关系代词as，which的区别
(1)as引导的非限制性定语从句，既可在主句前，又可在主句后，有时还可插入主句中，而which引导的非限制性定语从句只能置于主句之后。相同的是两者都可替代主句的整个内容，而不是主句中的某一个词。
The weather turned out to be very good，which was more than we could expect.
(2)当非限制性定语从句放在主句前面时，只能用as。
As is known to everybody，the moon travels round the earth once every month.
＝The moon travels round the earth once every month，as/which is known to everybody.
＝It is known to everybody that the moon travels round the earth once every month.
＝What is known to everybody is that the moon travels round the earth once every month.
后两句属名词性从句范畴。
(3)as意为“正如……”，后面的谓语动词多是see，know，expect，say，mention，report，announce等；which意为“这一点”。
As is known to all，Bell invented the telephone.
＝Bell invented the telephone，as is known to all.
As is often the case，Mike was late again and made up an excuse to fool the boss.
1. The factory was built in a secret place, around________high mountains.
A. which was　　　　　 B. it was
C. which were D. them were
【易误分析】　容易误选A或B，将A、B中的 which 和 it 误认为是其后句子的主语。
【名师指津】　最佳答案是C，around which were high mountains 是一个由“介词＋which”引出的非限制性定语从句，而在该从句中，主语是 high mountains，around which 是表语，所以句子谓语应用复数were，而不是用单数 was。
2. A man with a bleeding hand hurried in and asked, “Is there a hospital around________I can get some medicine for my wounded hand？”
A. that B. which
C. where D. what
【易误分析】　容易误选B，认为 around 是介词，选 which 用以代替前面的名词 hospital，在此用作介词 around 的宾语。
【名师指津】　最佳答案为C。以上语法分析并不算错，但问题是，照此分析，此句的意思即为：有没有这样一个医院，我在它的附近可以买药治我的手伤？这样的语境显然有点不合情理，因为人们通常是在医院里面治伤，而不是在医院附近治伤。此题选 C 的理由是：句中的 around 不是介词，而是副词，意为“在附近”；其后的 where 引导定语从句用以修饰其前的地点名词 hospital，句意为：附近有没有一家医院，我可以去治我的手伤？
3．________is known to everybody, the moon travels round the earth once every month.
A. It B. As
C. That D. What
【易误分析】　容易误选A，认为此处应填一个形式主语。
【名师指津】　最佳答案是 B。as 引导的是一个非限制性定语从句。比较下面一题：
________is known to everybody that the moon travels round the earth once every month.
A. It B. As
C. That D. What
此题答案选A，it 为形式主语，真正的主语是后面的 that 从句。
4. David is such a good boy________all the teachers like.
A. that B. who
C. as D. whom
【易误分析】　此题容易误选A，许多同学一看到题干中的such，再联系到选项中的 that，便认为这是考查such... that...句式。况且，这样理解意思也还通顺。
【名师指津】　最佳答案为C，不是A，因为在such...that...(如此……以至……)结构中， that 引导的是结果状语从句，并且 that 在从句中不充当句子成分，若在上句填入 such...that...，句末的动词 like 缺宾语。选C的理由如下：
as 用作关系代词，用以引导定语从句，修饰其前的名词 boy，同时 as 在定语从句中用作动词 like 的宾语，句意为“所有老师都喜欢的一位好男孩”。有的同学可能还会问，假若选A，能否将其后的 that 视为引导定语从句的关系代词呢？不能，因为当先行词受到 such 的修饰时，其后的定语从句应用关系代词 as 来引导，而不用that。
5. The buses, most of________were already full, were surrounded by an angry crowd.
A. that B. it
C. them D. which
【易误分析】　容易误选 C，用 them 代指 the buses。
【名师指津】　最佳答案是D。most of which were already full 为非限制性定语从句，修饰 the buses。
6. He had thousands of students, many of________gained great success in their own field.
A. whom B. them
C. which D. who
【易误分析】　容易误选 B，用 them 代指 students。
【名师指津】　最佳答案是A，many of whom gained great success in their own field 为非限制性定语从句。假若在many of...的前面加上连词and，则选B。
7. He had a lot of friends, only a few of________invited to his wedding.
A. whom B. them
C. which D. who
【易误分析】　容易误选 A，认为这是非限制性定语从句。
【名师指津】　最佳答案是B，这不是非限制性定语从句，而是一个独立主格结构，因为空格后的动词 invited 并不是一个完整的谓语，而是一个过去分词。当然，假若在 invited 前加上助动词 were，则是一个非限制性定语从句，答案便应选A。
8. On Sundays there were a lot of children playing in the park，________parents seated together joking.
A. their B. whose
C. which D. that
【易误分析】　容易误选B，认为这是非限制性定语从句。
【名师指津】　最佳答案是A。与上面一题相似，their parents seated together joking 不是非限制性定语从句，而是一个独立主格结构，因为空格后的动词 seated 不是谓语，而是一个过去分词，因为 seat 作动词用时，是及物动词。
9. If the man is only interested in your looks，________just shows how shallow he is.
A. as B. which
C. what D. that
【易误分析】　容易误选A或B，认为这是非限制性定语从句。
【名师指津】　正确答案为D，注意逗号前是一个条件状语从句，逗号后是该状语从句的主句，that 在此代表前文所述的情况，用作主句的主语。
10. She says that she’ll never forget the time________she’s spent working as a secretary in our company.
A. which B. when
C. how D. where
【易误分析】　容易误选B，机械地认为时间名词后必须用关系副词when，地点名词后用关系副词 where。
【名师指津】　正确答案为A。在时间名词和地点名词后是否用关系副词要看它在定语从句中充当什么句子成分。一般说来，若用作主语或宾语，用关系代词；若用作状语，则用关系副词。上面一题中的动词 spent 缺宾语，故应用关系代词 which或that。
1. It is morning________we have four classes, not afternoon.
A. when　　　　　　　B. which
C. that D. why
解析　 when 引导的定语从句。
答案　　A
2. Thousands of Haitians cheered as the Chinese medical team arrived，many of________even cried with joy.
A．those B．them
C．whom D．who
解析　 考查定语从句。此处为介词前置的非限制性定语从句。
答案　　C
3. The appearance of a super skyscraper in the desert is far beyond our imagination，________throws great doubt on the height of the tall building.
A. that B. one
C. which D. it
解析　 考查非限制性定语从句。此处which代替前面整个句子的内容。
答案　　C
4．He saw her coming, and advised me to hide behind the door，________advice I took at once.
A. whose B. what
C. that D. which
解析　 考查定语从句。此处考查which修饰名词的定语从句。此题较难。
答案　　D
5. Barrack Obama’s recent visit to the Asian nations clearly sent a message to the world ________Asia is important in America’s global partnership.
A. which B. where
C. that D. as
解析　 考查名词性从句的连接词。此处message是同位语从句的抽象名词，Asia is important in America’s global partnership是同位语从句。
答案　　C
6. She’s in a hopeless situation，________we will keep a very close eye on.
A. where B. when
C. which D. that
解析　 考查定语从句。此处situation是先行词，其在定语从句中作on的宾语。
答案　　C
7. Ms. Claire is a strict but kind teacher，________I respect and appreciate most.
A. that B. what
C. one D. which
解析　 考查定语从句的连接词及代词的用法。此处one是a teacher的同位语，其后带了一个定语从句I respect and appreciate most。
答案　　C
8. It was not until graduation________I realized what high school life means to me.
A. that B. when
C. while D. as
解析　 考查强调句型。此处not until graduation为被强调的部分。
答案　　A
9. The fact has worried many scientists________the earth is becoming warmer and warmer these years.
A．what B．which
C．that D．though
解析　 考查同位语从句。此处fact是同位语从句的抽象名词，that引导的同位语从句后置。
答案　　C
10. The national Education Department says school safety has set off alarm bells with frequent serious accidents________students got injured or even killed.
A. that B. in which
C. by which D．when
解析　 考查定语从句。此处accident是先行词，其在定语从句中作状语。
答案　　B
11. —The authors of computer viruses are geniuses.
—I agree. They can apply their wisdom to other nettechnology from________human beings can benefit.
A．that B．which
C．what D．where
答案　　B
12. During World War II, he took many photos，________some captured the emotions of both the soldiers and the civilians in war torn Europe.
A．from them B.of which
C．by which D．among them
解析　 考查非限制性定语从句。此处原为some of which＝of which some。
答案　　B
13. We shouldn’t have spent our money testing so many people, most of________are healthy.
A. that B. which
C. what D. whom
答案　　D
14. That is the small house less than 20 square meters, under________roof lives a large family of three generations.
A. which B. whose
C. its D. that
解析　 考查定语从句的先行词。此处house和roof之间是所属关系，故用whose。
答案　　B
15. Tom took the police to the spot________the accident happened.
A．which B．that
C．where D．when
解析　 本题考查定语从句。因先行词是spot，且从句中的动词happen为不及物动词，后不能接宾语，故应选where来引导定语从句。
答案　　C
16. The lazy boy is expecting a way________he can get through the exams without hard work.
A. that B. in that
C. which D. where
解析　 考查定语从句的先行词。此处a way作先行词，用in which/that/省略先行词。
答案　　A
17. Since 1995, ________people call the Year of the Internet, the world has turned flat thanks to the network.
A. which B. when
C. in which D. by which time
解析　 考查定语从句的连接词。此处1995作call的宾语。
答案　　A
18. Our chemistry teacher announced that he would do the experiment in a different way________we might find interesting.
A．which B．in which
C．in that D．whom
解析　 考查定语从句的连接词。此处way在定语从句中作find的宾语，故用which。
答案　　A
19. It was after careful consideration________we decided to take action.
A．which B．that
C．why D．when
解析　 考查强调句型。此处强调after careful consideration。
答案　　B
20．(2010·福建省莆田一中高三上学期期末考试)It’s a fact________he has not received the letter.
A. that B. which
C. whether D. what
解析　 考查名词性从句的连接词。此处a fact是同位语从句的抽象名词。
答案　　A(共7张PPT)
单词拼写专练
1. A to the police, his attackers beat him with a blunt instrument.
2. I know Germany won, but I can't tell you the a score.
3. I couldn't a the rent on my own.
4. The books about Harry Potter are very popular now, both at home and a .
5. Everyone is free to engage in peaceful political a .
6. The pilot, whether by a or design (=whether it was planned or not planned) , made the plane do a sharp turn.
7. 'Make sure that you keep the documents in a safe place,' Otley a him.
8. Mr Howard has declared that he is a all forms of racism.
9. She told us her exciting a in the Himalayas.
10. We'd got halfway abefore Philip realized he'd left his money at home.
1. According to the police, his attackers beat him with a blunt instrument.
2. I know Germany won, but I can't tell you the a score.
3. I couldn't a the rent on my own.
4. The books about Harry Potter are very popular now, both at home and a .
5. Everyone is free to engage in peaceful political a .
fford
ctual
broad
ctivity
6. The pilot, whether by a or design (=whether it was planned or not planned) , made the plane do a sharp turn.
7. 'Make sure that you keep the documents in a safe place,' Otley a him.
8. Mr Howard has declared that he is a all forms of racism.
9. She told us her exciting a in the Himalayas.
10. We'd got halfway a before Philip realized he'd left his money at home.
ccident
dvised
gainst
dventures
cross
achievement (U)取得，完成
（C）成就，成绩
make a great achievement
3. Why do scientists spend so much time trying to
achieve something
（V）achieve
vt 完成 达到（目的），得到
如果他不加紧努力工作，他会一事无成。
He will never achieve anything if he doesn’t work harder.
我们成功地开发了这种产品。
We have achieved success in developing
the product.
advise doing
advise sb to do
advise sb against doing
advise that sb (should) do
His mother advised him to accept the offer.
His mother advised that he accept the offer.(共36张PPT)
虚拟语气
The Subjunctive Mood
虚拟语气
1） 概念 　　 虚拟语气用来表示说话人的主观愿望或假想，所说的是一个条件，不一定是事实，或与事实相反。
2） 在条件句中的应用 　　 条件句可分为两类，一类为真实条件句，一类为非真实条件句。非真实条件句表示的是假设的或实际可能性不大的情况，故采用虚拟语气。
虚拟语气在条件从句中的用法
If he had seen you yesterday, he would have asked you about it .
如果他昨天见到你，他会问你这件事的。
If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we will go to the park.
如果明天不下雨的话，我们就去公园。
虚拟语气
陈述语气
结论：条件句有两类，一类是真实条件句，一类是虚拟条件句。如果假设的情况是有可能发生的，就是真实条件句。在这种真实条年句中的谓语用陈述语气。
在条件状语从句和结果状语从句中,表示与事实相反的条件和结果。
1) 与现在事实相反：
If 主语 …, 主语 +V原
2)与过去事实相反：
If 主语had Ved ,主语 +have Ved
3)与将来事实相反：
If 主语 …, 主语 +V原
were
V-ed
should (would
could, might)
should (would
could, might)
should
were to
should (would
could, might)
1、表示与现在事实相反的假设和结果
eg.If I were you ,I would go at once.
我是你的话，我会马上走。
eg.If my brother were here, everything would be all right.
要是我哥在这儿，一切都没问题了。
Translation:
1、如果他有时间，他就会（可能）和你去。
eg.If he had time,he would /could/might go with you.
2、要是我是你，我就会（可能）对他说实话。
eg.If I were you ,I should/woud/could/might tell him the truth.
注：主句中should只用于第一人称，从句中的should可用于任何人称。
2.表示与过去事实相反的假设或结果
eg.If you had come a few minutes earlier, you would/could/might have met the famous singer.
如果你早来几分钟的话，你就会（可能会）见到那个著名歌唱家。
eg.if I had had the money last week, I should /would/could/might have bought a car.
如果我上星期有了这笔钱，我就会（可能）买1辆车。
Translation:
1、要是她早来五分钟，她就能赶上早班车了。
eg.If she had come five minutes earlier,she would have caught the early bus.
2、如果你昨天在这里，昨天他就能找到你了。
eg.If you had been here, he would have found you yesterday.
3、表示与将来事实可能相反的假设和结果
eg.If it were sunny tomorrow, I would come to see you.
明天要是天气好的话，我来看你。
If it should rain, the crops would be saved.
假如天下雨，庄稼就一定（有可能）得救。
如果今晚下雪，他们将不出去了。
If it were to snow this evening, they would not go out .
4、主、从句的动作发生时间不一致的情况。
有时条件从句中的动作和主句中的动作发生的时间不一致，这时动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间加以调整。
eg.If you had listened to the doctor, you would be all right now.
如果你当初听了医生的话，身体现在就好了。（从句动作指过去，主句动作指现在）。
eg.If you had practised speaking English more , you would be able to speak it fluently.
如果你多练习讲英语，现在就能讲得很流利了。
5.虚拟条件句可以转换的形式
（1）省略连词if
在书面语中，如果虚拟条件句中有were,had或should，可以把if省略，而把这几个词放到主语之前，构成主谓倒装。
Were I you (If I were you ), I would not do it
我要是你，就不做这事
Should he come(If he should come),tell him to ring me up.
他要是来了，让他给我打个电话。
( 2 )用介词短语代替条件状语从句
Without air (If there were no air), there would be no living things.
如果没有空气的话，就不会有生物了。
But for your help(If it hadn’t been for your help)I couldn’t have done it.
要不是你的帮助，我就不可能完成这件事。
Subjunctive Mood
虚拟语气在条件主从复合句中
1. I ______________ (come)too if I had time to spare.
2. I didn’t see your sister at the meeting. If she ________________ (come), she would have met my brother.
3. If the hurricane had happened during the daytime,there______________________ (be)more deaths.
should come
had come
would have been
4.If it___________________________
(rain) tomorrow,we ________________
(not go out).
5.______(be) I in good health, I __________ (go) with you tomorrow.
eg. Had you told me earlier, I could have done something.
Should anyone call, tell him to call in the afternoon.
rained/should rain/were to rain
should not go out
Were
would go
虚拟语气在主语从句中的用法
在It is important(strange, natural, necessary) that…句型里
that所引导的主语从句中的谓语动词常用
（ should ） +动词原形
It is important that every member(should) know these rules.
重要的是每个成员知道这些规则。
It is necessary that he (should) be sent there at once.
有必要马上派他到那里去。
It is very strange that she ( should) have left without saying goodbye.
她不辞而别，真让人奇怪。
( 2 ) It is said/ reported/ known/ hoped…+that clause
It is decided (has been decided)that the meeting (should)be postponed延期 till tomorrow
1. It is strange that he _____________(make)
such a mistake. That’s unexpected.
(necessary,important,impossible,natural,
surprising,a pity etc.)
2. It was required that each student ________ (bring) enough food on the trip.
(ordered,suggested,demanded,desired, etc.)
(should) make
(should) bring
虚拟语气在宾语从句中的用法：
在suggest建议, propose建议, demand要求/需要， request要求/请求, desire请求/期望，order命令, command命令, insist坚持等动词后的宾语从句中。
谓语动词用“( should )+动词原形”，表建议、要求、命令。
eg.I suggest that we ( should ) set off at once.
我建议马上动身。
另外：
wish+宾语从句：表示不能实现的愿望，表示“但愿...；… 就好了；可惜…；…多好
（1）表示现在不能实现的愿望，从句的谓语动词用过去式。
I wish (that) I were young again.
要是我能返老还童就好了。
I wish I were ten years younger.
我但愿自己能年轻10岁。
（2）表示过去不能实现的愿望，从句的谓语动词用had done / would(could)+have done
We wish we had arrived there two hours earlier.
我们要是早两个小时到达那儿就好了。
（3）表示将来不能实现的愿望，从句的谓语动词用would(could)+动原/were to +动原
I wish I could fly to the moon one day.
但愿将来某一天我能飞上月球。
He is not a pilot, but he wishes he______ (be).
I wish I ___________(meet)him yesterday.
I wish it __________(be) fine tomorrow.
He ordered the work _________________ (start) at once.
5. I’d rather you _________(stay) at home all day today.
were
had met
would be
(should ) be started
stayed
虚拟语气在同位语从句中的用法
demand ，suggestion, proposal等同位从句的谓语动词要用虚拟语气，即: ( should )
+ 动词原形
eg.The suggestion that the plan ( should ) be delayed延迟 will be discussed tomorrow.
推迟那项计划的建议将在明天讨论。
虚拟语气在状语从句中的用法
（1）由as if 或as though引导的状语从句表示比较或方式时
He treats me as if I were a stranger.
She talked about the film as if she had really seen it .
结论：从句谓语形式为动词的过去式（be用were）/“ had+过去分词”/would/could +v。
IV.在表语从句或方式状从中
1. My demand is that you_______________
(get up)at six.
2. He speaks as if he _________(be) an Englishman.
3. They talked as if they _____________(be)
good friends for years.
(should) get up
were
had been
(2)在in order that或 so that引导的目的状语从句中
谓语动词多用could/might/should+动词原形
Mr Green spoke slowly so that this students could/might hear clearly.
在in case , for fear (that),lest以免，万一等引导的从句中，谓语动词用should+动词原形
She took her raincoat with her in case/for fear that /lest he should be caught in the rain.
Remind me of it in case I should forget.
（3）在带有even if /even though引导的让步状语从句的主从复合句
Even if Lin Tao were here, I should say the same thing .
Even though he had been ill, he would have gone to his office.
结论：主句和从句都用虚拟语气，动词形式与含有非真实条件句的虚拟语气相同。
虚拟语气在定语从句中的用法
It is (about/high)time +过去式/should+动词原形
It is time that we went /should go home.
我们该回家了。
It is high time that you went/should go to bed.
你早该睡觉 了。
虚拟语气其它常见句式
(1) If only(要是…就好了）的用法：
现在：动词用过去式
过去：动词用过去完成时
将来：动词用would/could+动词原形
If only I could learn English well in one day.现在
If only I had not been late for the interview.过去
If only he would reply to my letter.将来
（2）would rather(宁愿，宁可）的用法
现在：动词用过去式
过去：动词用过去完成
I would rather she were not present.
我宁可她不在场。（事实上她在场）
I would rather he had told me the truth.
我宁可他告诉我事实真相。（事实上他没告诉我真相）
VI.在其他句型中
Even if he _______(be) here, he couldn’t solve the problem.
Without air, there __________(be) no living things.
But for your help, I __________________
(not, do) it.
If only I ____________(take) his advice,
but I didn’t.
were
would be
couldn’t have done
had taken
5. I was very busy yesterday, otherwise I _________________(come) to the meeting.
6. Look at the clock! It’s(high) time we _______________(go) home.
would have come
went/should go
1. If we _____ sooner, we might have got there.
A. started B. had started
C. would have started D. start
2. If he _____ the detective honestly, he would not have been arrested.
A. would have answered B. answered
C. should answer D. had answered
3. Why didn't you go to the dance last night If I ______ tired, I would have.
A. haven' t B. hadn't
C. haven' t been D. hadn't been
4. "I _____ worry too much if I were you," she added.
A. oughtn't B. mustn't
C. needn't D. wouldn't
5. If I _____ in this uniform, I wouldn't feel so proud.
A. wasn't dressed B. didn't dress
C. weren't dressed D. don't dress
6. If he______ on tourists for his business, he would have to close his shop.
A. depends B. will depend
C. depended D. has depended
7. If you _____ see Mr Green, give him my regards.
A. should B. would C. shall D. will
8. If you ______ to see Mary, what would you tell her
A. are B. will be going C. must D. were
Thank you. Bye-bye!(共77张PPT)
非谓语动词包括不定式(to do)、动名词(－ing)、现在分词(－ing)与过去分词(－ed)。它们不受主语人称和数的限制，在句子中不能充当谓语，但可以充当句子的其他成分，并且有时态和语态的变化。所以，要正确使用非谓语形式，一定要充分理解不同形式所表现的意义，要明确非谓语动词与逻辑主语之间是“主动”还是“被动(或状态)”，所表示的动作是“过去”、“现在”还是“将来”，以及和谓语动词所表示的动作是同步发生还是有先后之分。
一、不定式和动名词作主语
【例句观察】
Smoking is prohibited here. (抽象)
It is not very good for you to smoke so much. (具体)
【结论1】动名词作主语通常表示抽象动作， 而不定式作主语表示具体动作。
【例句观察】
Working in these conditions is not easy. (一般式)
在这样的条件下工作不容易。
Having studied computer is an important qualification for the job. (完成式)
学过电脑是获得这份工作的重要条件。
Their not being served by the waiter added to their anger. (被动式，Their不可用They和Them，not在doing前)
没有被服务增添了他们的愤怒。
【结论2】动名词和不定式作主语除了一般式和主动式，还有完成式、被动式。完成式表示该动作比谓语动词动作先发生。
【完成例句】
(1)他的到来将会是很大的帮助。
His coming here will be a great help. (不可用He和Him)
(2) Jack的突然消失使他们很担忧。
Jack's suddenly disappearing made them worried. (不可用Jack)
【结论3】当动名词带逻辑主语时，只可在其前加上物主代词或名词的所有格，不可以用人称代词主格和宾格，也不可以用名词的普通格。
【完成例句】
(3)我觉得他一个人是不可能做那份工作的。
I found it impossible for him to do the job alone.
(4)他那样做是理智的。
It was wise of him to do that.
【结论4】It's ＋adj. / n. for / of sb. to do sth.
在表示人物性格、特性等的形容词brave, courageous, careful, careless, clever, wise, foolish, silly, stupid, good, nice, kind, thoughtful, considerate, greedy, generous, honest, modest, polite, rude, cruel, selfish, wicked, wrong等后面，常用of引出不定式的逻辑主语，否则用for。
【翻译句子】
(5)哭是没有用的。
It is no use / good crying.
【结论5】It is ＋ no use, no good (fun, a great pleasure, a waste of time)＋ doing sth.
二、不定式和动名词作宾语
【例句观察】
你介意我看下你的报纸吗？
Do you mind my / me reading your paper
她不喜欢Mary那样说话。
She doesn't like Mary / Mary's talking that way.
【结论1】动名词作宾语时，可以带逻辑主语。此时，带逻辑主语既可以是物主代词或名词的所有格，也可以是人称代词宾格和名词的普通格。
【例句观察】
I regret not having taken her advice. (not须放在having前)我很后悔没有采纳她的建议。
They couldn't stand being treated like that.
他们不能忍受被那样对待。
He decided to help me but I pretended to have finished my job.
他决定帮助我但是我假装已经完成我的工作了。
【结论2】作宾语的动名词和不定式除了一般式和主动式，还有完成式、被动式。完成式表示该动作比谓语动词动作先发生。
常见的带不定式作宾语的动词如下：(利用口诀进行记忆，事实上，口诀内的动词后跟动词不定式，几乎都有将来意味。建议考生要记牢口诀。
想要干 want, wish, hope, expect, seek, attempt, aim, claim，would like / love, desire, swear
早打算 plan, prepare, mean, arrange
同意否 agree, promise, undertake, offer, choose, refuse, afford
问问看 ask, beg，(ask to do 要求做…)
决定了 decide, determine / be determined, make up one's mind
尽力干 try, manage(反义词fail), struggle, strive
别装蒜 pretend
　　 介词以及少数动词(“动词不定式口诀”以外的动词)和词组后只能用动名词作宾语： admit，dislike，appreciate，avoid，enjoy，bear(忍受)，envy，can't help(不禁)，delay，escape, can't stand(受不了)，deny，excuse(借口)，consider(考虑)，fancy，mind，miss(错过)，mention, finish，pardon，resist，forgive，imagine，risk，practise，suggest(建议)，keep，quit，put off, give up, feel like, be worth, set
about, burst out, be / get / become used to(习惯于), look forward to, pay attention to, devote…to, lead to, stick to, get close to, object to, contribute to, get down to, be equal to(能胜任), turn to(求助于)等。
例如：I appreciate having been given the opportunity to study abroad two years ago.
He used to be late for work, but now he has been used to getting up early.
【完成例句】
(6)你要听话好好待在家里。
You would be well advised to stay indoors.
(7)老师建议采取不同的方法。
The teacher advised taking a different approach.
【结论3】动词advise / allow / permit / forbid后跟doing，也可跟sb. to do。
【完成例句】
(8)路被落叶覆盖住了，它们需要被清理。
The road is covered with some fallen trees and they need removing / to be removed.
【结论4】need, require, want, deserve ＋doing / to be done表示被动意义。
【翻译句子】
(9) I forgot buying a pen for him yesterday, and returned home directly.
昨天我忘记给他买笔，而是直接回家了。
(10) Thank you for reminding me，or I forget to post my letter.
非常感谢你提醒我，否则我就会忘记去寄信的。
【结论5】①有些动词后使用动名词和动词不定式作宾语有差别：
forget to do 忘记要去做某事(此事未做)
forget doing忘记做过某事(此事已做过或已发生)
stop to do 停止、中断(某件事)，目的是去做另一
件事
stop doing 停止正在或经常做的事
remember to do 记住去做某事(未做)
remember doing记得做过某事(已做)
regret to do对要做的事遗憾(后常跟动词
say, tell, inform等)
regret doing对做过的事后悔
try to do努力、企图做某事
try doing试验、试一试某种办法
mean to do打算，有意要……
mean doing意味着
go on to do 继而(去做另外一件事情)
go on doing 继续(原先没有做完的事情)
propose to do 打算(要做某事)
propose doing建议(做某事)
②like / love / hate / prefer ＋to do表示具体行为；＋doing sth. 表示抽象、倾向概念。
如果这几个动词前有should / would，其后宾语只跟不定式，不能跟动名词。
Don't you remember seeing the man before
You must remember to leave tomorrow. 　
I should like to see him tomorrow.
【注意】不定式和动名词作宾语时还有一些固定句型：
There is no use (good / point / sense / harm)＋doing sth. 做某事没用(不好 / 没意义 / 没害处)
have difficulty / trouble / problem / a hard time / a good time / fun ＋ (in)＋doing
spend / waste / lose time (in) doing sth.
There is no ＋ doing…(there is no 表“不可能”)
【疑难1】
I think you'll grow to like him when you know him better.
　　【疑难剖析1】come / become / grow / get to like / love / realize / understand / know等表示心理活动的过程，意为“渐渐地喜欢上 / 意识到 / 懂了 / 知道了……”
【疑难2】
Last night I did nothing but watch TV.
The doctor told him nothing but to stop smoking.
【疑难剖析2】do / did / does＋nothing/anything/everything but(except)＋动词原形，如果谓语动词不是do / did / does，but(except)，所跟的不定式须带to。
【疑难3】
When I consider how talented he is as a painter, I cannot help but believe that the public will appreciate his gift.
【疑难剖析3】can not (help / choose)but do，can do nothing but do，have no choice / alternative to do表示“不得不”。
【疑难4】
Why not take a holiday
【疑难剖析4】“Why not ＋动词原形”表达向某人提出建议，翻译为：“为什么不……？”“干嘛不……？”
【疑难5】
You had better have your eyes examined.
【疑难剖析5】“would rather / had better＋(not)＋动词原形”意为“宁愿 / 最好(不)做某事”。
【疑难6】
We don't want there to be any comrades lagging behind.
I don't mind there being a chair here.
There being nobody else at hand, I had to do by myself.
【疑难剖析6】there be的非谓语形式：
作动词expect，like，mean，intend，want，prefer，hate宾语时，通常用there to be结构，在mind, object to等后面用there being。作状语多用there being结构。
【疑难7】
John didn't pass his driving test, but I expected him to.
— Hasn't he finished writing the report？　
— No, but he ought to have.
— Aren't you the headmaster
— No, and I don't want to be.
【疑难剖析7】为避免重复，在hope, expect, wish, want, like, love, decide, plan, need, mean, forget, refuse, tell, know, have to, be going to, used to, ought to等动词后面再次出现相同的不定式作宾语时，常出现单独使用的to，而把曾出现过的动词省略掉。但是，如果在省略的不定式结构中含有be, have, have been时，要保留这些词。
三、不定式、动名词和分词作表语
【完成例句】
(11)我的建议是马上开始工作。
What I would suggest is to start work at once.
(12)他的爱好是集邮。
His hobby is collecting stamps.
【结论1】不定式作表语一般表示具体动作，特别是表示将来的动作。动名词作表语，表示抽象的一般性的行为。
【完成例句】
(13)旅行很有趣但有些累。
Travelling is interesting but tiring.
(14)学生被迫学得太多会混乱的。
The pupils will get confused if they are made to learn too much.
【结论2】表心理状态的interesting, exciting, delighting, disappointing, encouraging, worrying, puzzling, satisfying, surprising, pleasing等形容词化分词作表语时，表示“令人……的”；interested, excited, delighted, disappointed, encouraged, pleased, puzzled, worried, surprised等表示“感到……”。
【完成例句】
(15)工人们被告知他们按小时计酬。
What the workers have been told is that they get paid by the hour.
【结论3】除be done外， get, become, look, seem, appear, remain等系动词都可跟done。如remain seated / hidden，get paid / dressed / changed / stuck / hurt / injured / burnt等。
【完成例句】
(16)他一直沉迷于电脑游戏，所以他得不了好成绩。
He was addicted to computer games, so he couldn't get good marks.
【结论4】下列be done表示所处的状态
be addicted to…沉迷于……
be absorbed in…全神贯注于
be aimed at…旨在 / 意图……
be armed with… 有……装备
be buried in…埋葬在……
be based on / upon…以……为基础
be born…出生于……
be burdened with…担负着
be crowded with…挤满了……
be covered with / by…覆盖着
be coated with…涂抹了……
be combined with…与……联合
be compared with…与……相比较
be caught in… 陷入……
be lost in…沉迷于……
be concerned about…关心……
be dressed in…穿着……
be devoted to…专心致志于……
be divided into分成
be engaged in…忙于……
be engaged to sb. 与……订婚
be fixed on…专注于……
be faced with…面临着……
be filled with…装满了……
be greeted with…受到了……问候
be grown up 已经长大了
be hidden in…躲在……
be linked to …与……有关
be paved with…铺着……
be loaded with…载有……
be located in…位于……
be matched 很般配
be mistaken 弄错了
be replaced with…更换为……
be related to / with…与……有关
be seated 坐着
be married(to sb. )与某人结婚了
be separated from…与……隔开
be shouldered with…肩负着……
be stationed in…驻扎在……
be surrounded with / by…四周环绕着……
be supposed to do…应该做……
be recovered from …从……中康复
be connected with…与……相连 / 有关
be made of / from / up of由……制成 / 组成
be designed / meant / intended for…专为……而设计
be known as / for / to…以……著称 / 因……著名 / 为……所知
四、不定式、动名词和分词作定语
【完成例句】
(17)我遗憾地告诉你还有东西没解决。
I regret to tell you that there is something unsolved.
(18)水被工厂污染应该受到批评。
The water polluted by the factory should be to blame.
【结论1】单个非谓语动词作定语一般在名词前，但修饰不定代词时在代词后；非谓语动词短语作定语一般要跟在名词后。
【例句观察】
The meeting to be held tomorrow is important.
明天要开的会很重要。
The meeting being held now is important.
现在正在开的这个会很重要。
The meeting held yesterday was important.
昨天开的那个会议很重要。
【结论2】不定式、动名词和分词作定语的区别如下：
to do sth. 与被修饰的名词有①主谓关系；②动宾关系；名词前有序数词或最高级；③不定式修饰一些表示方向、原因、时间、机会、权利等抽象名词
名词＋doing sth. ①正在进行的动作；②经常性动作或现在(或当时)的状态；③即将发生的动作
to be done 表示将要被做
done 表示已经完成的或表被动的动作[having (been)done不可作定语]
being done 表示正在发生的被动动作
【完成例句】
(19)我没有登山鞋。
I have no climbing shoes.
(20)那个睡觉的男孩是他弟弟。
The sleeping boy was his brother.
【结论3】动名词作定语只放在名词前，说明该名词的性能或用途，不表动作，被修饰的名词与动名词在逻辑上没有主谓关系，反之则是现在分词作定语。
【完成例句】
(21)地上有很多落叶。
There are a lot of fallen leaves on the ground.
【结论4】一些形容词化的过去分词表示已完成的动作或所处的状态，意为“已经……的”。
a fallen leaf落叶(已经落在地上)
a falling leaf 飘零的落叶(尚在空中)
a developed country发达国家
a developing country 发展中国家
a risen sun升起的太阳
a rising sun 冉冉升起的太阳
a returned student归国学生
a retired worker退休工人
an advanced worker先进工作者
boiled water开水 (boiling water 沸水)
a bent branch弯曲的树枝
determined opposition强烈的反对
a devoted soldier忠诚的士兵
a well－informed professor见多识广的教授
【疑难1】
The teacher is satisfied with our satisfying performance in class, which can be seen from her satisfied expression on her face.
老师对我们在课堂上令人满意的表现很满意，这可以从她脸上满意的表情看出来。
【疑难剖析1】表示心理状态的－ing形式，表示“令人……的”； －ed形式，表示“(人)感到……”，也可修饰体现内心感受的look, expression, tears, smile, voice等名词。
【疑难2】
①The man who came this morning is our legal adviser. (√)
The man coming this morning is our legal adviser. (× )
②Is there anyone who can answer this question (√)
Is there anyone answering this question (× )
③Those who have finished their work can go home now. (√)
Those having finished their work can go home now. (×)
【疑难剖析2】
不宜用现在分词短语作定语的情况：
①不能用doing表达过去动作(见①)；
②用answering表达can answer的意思是错的(见②)；
③完成式不能作定语(见③)。
五、不定式和分词作状语
【例句观察】
Standing on the tower, the whole city could be seen. (×前后主语不一致)
Standing on the tower, we could see the whole city. (√前后主语一致)
站在塔上，我们可以看见整个城市。
We found the room too small to hold so many people.
我们发现房间太小，容不下这么多人。
He made a long speech only to show his ignorance of the subject. (出乎意料的结果)
他作了很长的演说，结果却是偏离主题的。
Being watched by the audience, the young speaker felt very nervous. (因为正在被……)
被观众一直看着，年轻的演说者感到有些紧张。
Encouraged by these successes, they decided to expand the business. (被动，先发生但不强调)
被这些成功鼓舞，他们决定拓展他们的贸易。
When leaving the airport, they waved again and again to us.(主动，同步)
当离开机场的时候，他们一次又一次地向我们挥手。
Not having received an answer, he decided to write another letter to them. (主动，先发生且强调)
没有收到来信，他决定再写一封信给他们。
Having been criticized by the teacher, Li Ming gave up smoking. (被动，先发生)
被老师批评后，李明戒了烟。
【结论1】
①only＋ to do 表示意想不到的结果。
②doing sth. 与谓语动词同时发生的动作(主动关系)
③being ＋p.p. 强调与谓语动词同时发生的被动动作(“因为正在被……”)
④done已经发生的被动动作
⑤having done先于谓语动词发生的动作(主动关系)
⑥having been done　先于谓语动词发生的动作(被动关系)
【翻译句子】
(22) He worked deep into the night, preparing a speech for the president. (worked与preparing同时发生)
他为总统准备演说，工作到深夜。　
(23) I got up very early this morning to prepare breakfast for my family. (got up先，prepare breakfast后)
我今天早上起床很早给我的家人准备早餐。
【结论2】不定式“to do sth. ”作目的和结果状语时总是在谓语动词后发生，而分词一般式 “doing sth.”作状语时总是与谓语动词同时或几乎同时发生。
【翻译句子】
(24) She is so kind as to help me. ＝ She is so kind that she helps me.
她和善地来帮我。
(25) She is such a kind girl as to help me. ＝ She is such a kind girl that she helps me.
她是一个和善的女孩，常来帮我。
【结论3】so ＋ adj. / adv.＋ as to do或such＋(a / an)＋adj. ＋ n. ＋ as to do, 可以转化为so …that 或such… that 引导的结果状语从句。
【疑难1】
too…to do表示肯定的情况
I'm only too pleased to help you.
我很高兴能帮助你。
One is never too old to learn. 活到老，学到老。 【疑难剖析1】①当only too和 all too与动词不定式连用时，表示肯定意义。
②too ready (anxious，eager, glad, willing)＋to do，其后的动词不定式具有肯定意义。
③never (not)＋too…to…句型为“不会太……所以能……”之意。
【疑难2】
Seating himself / Seated / Sitting in the room, he is absorbed in reading.
Have you noticed the student losing himself / lost in thought
【疑难剖析2】devote，absorb，lose，seat，dress，hide等动词作状语和定语时可以用它们的－ed形式(devoted, absorbed，lost，seated，dressed，hidden)或－ing＋oneself形式(devoting / absorbing / losing / seating / dressing / hiding oneself)。
【疑难3】
Generally speaking，the more expensive the camera, the better its quality .
【疑难剖析3】有些to do 短语，doing短语和done 短语已经当作插入语使用，此时，句子的主语在逻辑上与它们不存在主动或被动关系：
① to tell you the truth(实话说)，needless to say(不用说)，to be honest / frank(老实说，坦白说)，to be more exact(更确切地说)，to make things worse (更糟的是)，not to mention…(更不用说)
② Generally / Frankly / Roughly speaking (一般说来 / 坦白说 / 粗略地说)，considering…(鉴于 / 考虑到……)，judging by / from…(从……来看，依据……来判断)，supposing that…(假定……)，providing that… (假定……)，according to…(依据……)，including…(包括……)，owing to…(由于……)，talking / speaking of…(谈及……)
③given…(考虑到……), provided that…(如果……)
疑难4】
It being Sunday, we needn't go to school.
→ Because it is Sunday, we needn't go to school.
All the work done, you can have a rest.
→ If all the work is done, you can have a rest.
【疑难剖析4】独立主格结构：n. / pron. ＋doing / done / to do / adv. / adj. / prep. 短语
前后主语不一致时，分词作状语需有自己的逻辑主语，且分词与逻辑主语之间存在着逻辑上的主动或被动关系，此时，视为独立主格结构。若把独立主格结构还原为状语从句，则主句的主语与从句的主语是不同的。
【疑难5】
连词＋分词(短语)
While waiting there, he saw two pretty girls come out of the building.
He will not attend the party unless invited.
【疑难剖析5】
　　有时为使分词短语与主句关系更清楚，可在分词前加连词。连词有when，while，if，unless，though，after, before, as等。但分词的主语和主句的主语必须为同一个。
六、不定式和分词作宾语补足语
【完成例句】
(26)我爸爸允许我周末上网。
My father permits me to surf the Internet at the weekend.
【结论1】like, hate, encourage, wish, warn, tell, want, desire, expect, get, permit, order, allow, invite, force, ask, cause, advise, request, prefer, beg, persuade, teach, lead等动词＋宾语＋to do sth. ，宾语与to do 为主动关系。
do sth. (用于let, make, have
以及感官动词后)
to do sth. (主动) / to be done
(被动)
doing sth. (主动，正在进行或
持续进行)
done (被动，状态或完成)
being done(被动，正在进行)
动词＋宾语＋宾补
究竟用何种形式，取决于带复合宾语的动词的特征。
【特别提醒】hope, welcome, agree, suggest, demand不能跟sb. to do。
(╳)hope sb. to do sth.应改为→ wish / expect sb. to do sth.
(╳)welcome sb. to do sth.应改为→ sb. be welcome to do sth.
(╳)agree sb. to do sth.应改为→ allow / permit sb. to do sth.
(╳)suggest sb. to do sth.应改为→advise sb. to do sth. / suggest sb. (should)do sth.
(╳)demand sb. to do sth.应改为→require sb. to do / demand sb. (should )do sth.
【完成例句】
(27)他看见老人过马路。
He saw the old man cross the road.
→ The old man was seen to cross the road.
(28)小孩子最后被看见在河边玩。
The children were last seen playing by the river.
【结论2】感官动词see, observe＋宾语＋do sth.(主动，全过程或经常性动作)
hear, notice, watch, feel＋ 宾语＋doing(主动，正在进行)
feel，look at, listen＋宾语＋to be done(与宾语是被动关系)
【注意】若感官动词在被动语态中，则to 要还原。
【翻译句子】
(29) His words sent me thinking.
他的话令我深思。
(30) The teacher often gets us to recite texts.
老师经常叫我们背课文。
(31) I'd like to get my car repaired before the New Year.
我想新年前把车修好。
(32) To our surprise, he was sent to work abroad.
令我们惊讶的是他被送往国外工作了。
【结论3】get / send / set ＋宾语＋doing表示“使……起来”，动作由静止到运动并持续下去
get＋宾语＋to do＝let / have sb. to do表示“让某人做某事”
get＋宾语＋done＝have sth. done表示“使某事被做”
send＋宾语＋to do表示“派某人去做某事”
【翻译句子】
(33) I made my little brother cry. / My little brother was made to cry.
我把弟弟弄哭了。
(34) I spoke clearly and slowly to make myself heard and understood.
我说得又慢又清楚好让自己被听明白。
【结论4】使役动词make＋宾语＋do / done；宾语与do 为主动关系，与done是被动关系；如make 在被动语态中，to要还原。
【例句观察】
The teacher often has us debate in class.
老师经常叫我们在课堂上辩论。
They had the lights burning while working.
他们工作的时候把灯亮着。
Nancy will have her house painted.
Nancy要漆房子。
I am going to the supermarket and have many things to buy. Do you have anything to be bought
我要去超市买点东西，你有东西要买吗？
do sth. (主动，让某人做某事)
doing sth. (主动，让某人或某
物一直做某事)
done(被动，①叫人做某事
②遭遇某事)
使役动词have
＋ 宾语＋
have表示“有”时，用have＋宾语＋to do，表示“有某事要做(主语本人做)”；
用have＋宾语＋to be done，表示“有某事被做(不是主语本人做)”。
【结论5】
【例句观察】
Sorry to have kept you waiting for me for such a long time.
不好意思让你等了这么久。
They went home, leaving much work unfinished.
他们回家了，留下很多事情都没做。
I have once seen the child caught stealing money.
我曾经看到一个小孩偷钱被抓。
I found the little boy lying under the tree when I passed by.
我路过的时候发现那个小男孩躺在树底下。
She found a small boy seated at the back of the classroom.
她发现一个小男孩坐在教室后面。
The teacher wanted the paper (to be)finished in an hour.
老师想让试卷在一个小时内完成。
【结论6】
① keep / leave＋宾语＋doing(主动，且持续进行) / done(被动)
② catch＋宾语＋doing表示“发现某人正在做某事”，宾语与doing为主动，且正在进行。
③find＋宾语＋doing(主动，正在进行) / done(被动、状态或完成)
④ want / order / ask / wish ＋宾语＋(to be )done (宾语与done之间为被动关系)
七、with复合结构
【完成例句】
(35)小孩跟着他，他不得不回到公园。
With the children following him, he had to go back to the park.
(36)工作完成了，他可以回家了。
With the work finished, he could go home.
(37)这么多书要看，我不能外出。
With so many books to read, I could not go out.
(38)天气这么热，他们入室休息了。
With the weather so hot, they went in to have a rest.
(39)随着彩电价格降了50%，公司处境艰难。
With the prices of color TV down by 50%, the company has a very hard time.
(40)他妻子走下楼梯，手里拿着一本书。
His wife came down the stairs, with a book in her hand / a book in her hand / a book in hand.
(41)升国旗的时候学生们站成一线。
The students stood in line with the national flag being raised.
【结论】with复合结构是独立主格结构的一种，常在句中充当状语和定语，是英语中的一种常见结构。它由“with＋宾语＋补语”组成，其中，宾语和宾补之间必须有逻辑一致关系。
其结构为：
adv. / prep.
adj.
＋to do(表示将要发生的动作)
doing(主动，同时) / being done(正在被)
done(被动或完成)
with ＋
宾语＋(共28张PPT)
wish引导的虚拟句
I wish I remembered the address.
我要是记得地址就好了。（真可惜我忘了）
I wish he had not left.
要是他没有离开这里就好了。（他已离开）
I wish it would rain tomorrow.
要是明天下雨就好了。（说话人以预料明天不会下雨）
wish + that clause
did/were
had done
would / might /would do
wish后面的宾语从句要用虚拟语气
Exercises:
“ Have you visited the Science Museum ”
“ No, but I really wish I _______.”
A. had B. did C. have D. will
A
I didn’t go to the party, but I do wish I _____there.
A. was B. were C. had been D. went
C
I wish I _________ you yesterday.
A. see B. did see C. had seen D. were to see
C
The picture exhibition bored me to death. I wish I
___________to it.
A. hadn’t gone B. haven’t gone
C. didn’t go D. could not have gone
A
How I wish I __________that! Everybody present
was angry with me.
A. didn’t go B. hadn’t done
C. wouldn’t do D. wasn’t doing
B
-----He is a brave man.
-----Yes, I wish I _________his courage.
A. Have B. had C. will have D. would have
B
Tom can take his car apart and put it back together again. I certainly wish he _____me how.
A. teaches B. will teach
C. has taught D. would teach
D
When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it
looks as if it __________.
A. breaks B. has broken
C. were broken D. had been broken
C
The actor is 58 years old. But he acts as if he _______ a young man.
A. is B. will be C. am D. were
D
The clouds are getting darker and darker. It looks as if it _______rain.
A. is going to B. will
C. was going to D. would
A
She sings as if she _________a boy.
A. is B. was C. were D. are
C
We felt as if we _________each other for years.
A. knew B. were knowing
C. had known D. have knowing
C
if引导的虚拟条件句
http://www./res-457-7777700011416.html
If + 主 + did(were), 主+would/should/could/might
+动词原形
If I were you, I would try it again.
If he were free, he would go with you.
1. 如果我是你，我会再试一次。
2.如果他有空，他会与你一起去的。
3.如果我有一百万美元，我会买下这架飞机。
If I had one million dollars, I would buy the plane.
与现在事实相反的虚拟条件句
If +主 +had done sth, 主+would/should/could/might
+动词完成式（have done）
If he had worked hard, he would have passed the examination.
1.如果他努力学的话，他就通过这次考试。
If he had been there, he could have seen the film
If I had married her, I would have been unhappy.
3.要是当时我和她结了婚的话，那我是很不幸的。
2.如果他那时在那儿的话，他就能看到那部电影了。
与过去事实相反的虚拟条件句
与将来事实相反的虚拟条件句(通常有时间状语)
If he came here tomorrow, I would tell him about it.
If he were to come here tomorrow, I would tell him.
1.如果他明天来的话,我会告诉他这件事.
2.如果他明天来的话,我会告诉他.
If + 主 + did(were to /should do), 主+would/should/
could/might +动词原形
条件状语的倒装：
如果条件状语中有were, had, should时, 可以倒装成：Were / Should / Had +主+其他
Were I you, I would try it again.
Had he been there yesterday, he would have seen the film.
Should it snow tomorrow, we wouldn’t go out.
If I were you, I would try it again.
If he had been there yesterday, he would have seen the film.
If it should snow tomorrow, we wouldn’t go out.
If you __________tomorrow, you _________
find the new manager working in the office.
A. should come; would B. would come; would
C. will come; should D. comes; might
A
If the parents ______at the hospital earlier after
the accident, the child would have been saved.
A. arrives B. arrive
C. had arrived D. has arrived
C
I didn’t see your sister at the meeting. If she
__________, she would have met my brother.
A. has come B. did come C. came D. had come
D
If my lawyer _______here last Sunday, he _______
me from going .
A. had been; would have prevented
B. had been; would prevent
C. were; would prevent
D. were; would have prevented
A
If he _________he ___________that food.
Luckily he was sent to the hospital
immediately.
A. was warned; would not have taken
B. had been warned; would not have taken
C. would be warned; had not taken
D. would have been warned; had not taken
B
If the doctor had come earlier, the poor child
__________.
A. wouldn’t be lying there for two hours
B. wouldn’t have laid there for two hours
C. wouldn’t have lied there for two hours
D. wouldn’t have lain there for two hours
D
If you had told me in advance, I __________him
at the airport.
A. would meet B. would had meet
C. would have met D. would have meet
C
If there were nor subjunctive mood, English _____
much easier.
A. Will be B. would have been
C. could have been D. would be
D
_________the exam, he would have attend a college.
A. If he passed B. Had he passed
C. Were he passed D. If he should pass
B
_______five minutes earlier, you could have seen
them off.
A. If you should arrive B. If you arrive
C. Had you arrived D. Should you arrive
C
________it rain tomorrow, we should have to put
off the visit to the Science Museum.
A. Were B. should C. would D. will
B
1. The boy who went swimming in the Non-
swimming Zone drowned in the river.
If the boy hadn’t gone swimming in
the No-swimming Zone, he wouldn’t have
drowned in the river.
Had the boy not gone swimming in the
No-swimming Zone, he wouldn’t have
drowned in the river.
2. Billy was badly bitten by mosquitoes
because he forgot to use the mosquito net
last night.
If Billy had remembered to use the mosquito
net last night, he would not have been bitten by…
Had Billy remembered to use the mosquito
net last night, he would not have been bitten by…
3. The mother carelessly put the knife within
the baby’s reach, and the baby cut herself
while playing it.
If the mother had carefully put the knife
out of the baby’s reach, the baby wouldn’t
have cut herself.
Had the mother carefully put the knife
out of the baby’s reach, the baby wouldn’t
have cut herself.
4.The students got food-poisoning after eating
the potatoes in the dining-room.
If the students had not eaten the potatoes
in the dinning-room, they wouldn’t have got
food-poisoning.
Had the students not eaten the potatoes
in the dinning-room, they wouldn’t have got
food-poisoning.
5. The parents put the thermos on the ground.
Their son kicked it and got burnt.
If the parents had put the thermos in a
safe place, their son wouldn’t have kicked it
and got burnt.
Had the parents put the thermos in a safe
place, their son wouldn’t have kicked it and
got burnt.
名词性从句中要求用虚拟语气的动词
suggest, order, demand, propose, command,
request, desire, insist, require etc.引导的宾
语从句要用虚拟语气，以(should) + v原的形
式出现。
We all suggest that he ( should ) finish his
homework first.
The captain commanded that all the sailors
( should ) get down to work at once.
It’s suggested ( ordered, demanded, proposed,
commanded, requested, desired, insisted,
required ) that … 后面的主语从句中要使用
虚拟语气，也以 ( should )+ v原.的形式出
现。
It’s ordered that only German ( should ) be
taught at schools in Alsas and Lorin.
It’s requested that all the students ( should )
wear school uniforms at school.
以上这些动词的名词形式后面的表语从句
和同位语从句中也要用虚拟语气，也应以
(should) + v原. 的形式出现。
My suggestion is that you ( should ) go home
first before coming here.
His request that his cost ( should ) be paid
by the hour is completely reasonable.(共15张PPT)
虚拟语气
Ｉ.概念:　虚拟语气是动词的一种特殊形式， 用来表达说话人的愿望，意图，建议，惊奇，设想等未能实现以及在说话人看来实现可能性很小的情况。
II.虚拟语气的特点：
虚拟语气表达的是与客观现实相反的观念。
III.虚拟语气的形式
１．非真实条件句
　２．“should”类
　３．“过去时及过去完成时态”类
By Ivan Fang
非真实条件句
If 条件从句 主 句
1.与现在事实相反
2.与过去事实相反
3.与将来事实相反
注: 虚拟语气中助动词be一律用were，不用was
would do sth
should/could/might
would have done sth
should/could/might
would do sth
should/could/might
If sb did sth
If sb had done sth
If sb did sth
should do sth
were to do sth
1.I don’t have a car and I’m not happy.
2.I’m not a bird. I can’t fly.
3.He doesn’t take his teacher’s advice. He doesn’t pass the exam.
4.It is raining. We won’t go for a picnic.
表示与现在
事实相反
条 件 从 句 主 句
动词过去式（be的过去式一般用were） would (should, could, might)＋动词原形
a) If I had a car, I would be very happy
b) I would be very happy if I had a car, but I don’t have one.
a) If I were a bird, I could fly
b) I could fly if I were a bird, but I am not a bird, so I can’t fly.
a) If he took his teacher’s advice, he might pass the exam.
b) He might pass the exam but he doesn’t take his teacher’s
advice and he doesn't pass the exam
a) If it weren’t raining, we would go for a picnic.
b) We would go for a picnic but it is raining.
( )1.If my father ______ here now, he _____tell me what to do.
A. were, would B were, will C is, would D is , will
( )2. If I ________ a bee, I __________ work much harder.
A were, would B were, shall C had, will D have, should
( )3. If I _______ much money, I _________ buy a house.
A have, will B had, should C had, will D have, should
( )4. He ______ learn more quickly if he _______harder.
A will, work B would, worked
C would, work D will ,worked
( )5. If I __________ you, I _________ do that.
A was, wouldn’t B were, wouldn’t
C am , won’t D were, won’t
A
A
B
B
B
Ex
1.I didn’t know her telephone number and I didn’t call her.
2.He didn’t come ten minutes earlier. So he didn’t see the famous film star.
3.I didn’t take a taxi, for it is five minutes’ walk.
2.表示与过去
事实相反
条 件 从 句 主 句
had ＋过去分词 would (should, could, might)＋have＋过去分词
a) If I had known her telephone number, I would have called her.
b)I would have called her but I__________ her telephone number.
a) If he had come ten minutes earlier, he could have met that
famous film star.
b) He could have met that famous film star but he __________
ten minutes earlier.
c) I didn’t know her telephone number, otherwise I
_____________________ her.
c) He didn’t come ten minutes earlier otherwise he ____________
that famous film star.
didn’t know
would have telephoned
didn’t come
could have met
If it_________ five minutes’ walk, I ________________ a taxi.
weren’t
would have taken
( )1.If you _________ the doctor’s advice, you would have recognized already.
A. followed B would follow C follow D had followed
( )2. If my lawyer_____ _here last Saturday, he _________me from going.
A had been , would have prevented
B had been, would prevent
C were, would prevent D were, would have prevented
( )3.I ________ if she ________ me.
A would have overslept , didn’t call
B would have overslept, hadn’t called
C overslept, hadn't called D would overslept, didn’t call
( )4.---- If he ______, he _______that food.
-----Luckily he was sent to the hospital immediately.
A was warned, would not take
B had been warned, would not have taken
C would be warned, had not taken
D would have been warned, had not taken
( )5. She _______ to the party if she _______ invited.
A would have gone, had been B would go , was
C would have gone, was D has gone
D
A
B
B
A
1.I’m not twenty years old, so I won’t take the computer course.
2.I won’t do so. Of course he won’t feel surprised.
3----.He says he will not come.
-----If he ____________, what _______we ___ (do)
3.表示与将来
事实相反
条 件 从 句 主 句
动词过去式或should ＋ 动词原形
或were to ＋ 动词原形 would (should, could, might)＋动词原形
If I were twenty years old, I would take the course of computer science.
I would take the computer course but I am not twenty years old.
If I did so, she would feel very surprised
should do
were to do
She would feel very surprised if I did/should do/were to do that, but I won’t do that, so she will not feel surprised.
should come
would do
Ex.
( )1) It’s probable that it won’t rain tomorrow. But if it
_________, I would still go to the park.
A should rain B would rain C rains D had rained
( )2.I don’t think that I shall fail. But if I _______, I would
try again.
A should fail B would fail C failed D had failed
( )3. ________ tomorrow, what should we do
A If it rains B. Should it rain
C. Would it rain D. Were it raining
注：书面语中“if”虚拟语气倒装形式的使用：
如果“if”从句中含有 “were, had ”或“should ”时, 则可省
略连词“if ”，而把“were, had ” 或“should” 移至主语之前。
eg：1) Were I you (=If I were you ), I would ….
2) Had they not come last time (=If they had not come
last time), we would have done….
3) Should it rain tomorrow (= If it should rain tomorrow),
she would …
A
A
B
A) suggest (建议) that sb (should )do sth
insist
order
command
require
request
demand
prefer
1)The teacher suggested we (should )finish the
work at the end of next week.
3) The officer ordered that the enemy (should ) be
surrounded in the village before daylight.
2) His uncle insists that he (should ) go to the best-
known university instead of some common ones.
B) It’s suggested that sb (should) do sth
ordered
required
demanded
decided
C) It is necessary / strange that sb (should) do sth
important
“should”类
The teacher suggested that the work ___________(finish) …….
be finished
Cf. The expression on his face suggested that
he ______(be) unhappy.
She insisted that her answer was right.
was
It’s (high) time that sb did sth
should do sth
wish that sb did sth
had done sth
could/would do
would rather that sb did sth now/ tomorrow
had done sth ( in the past)
what if
If only
as if
“过去时及过去完成时态”类
It’s about time that you ____ your store.
A close B. closed
C have closed D .had closed
It’s high time that he ____ to think how to deal with the money.
A. would begin B. began
C. begin D. will begin
--- He would go to see you.
--- _________ he did not come
A. What if B. Where if
C. What come D. why whether
B
B
A
-----Do you have a type writer
-----No, but I wish I ________.
A. have B. had C. do D. had had
B
Exercises:
( ) 1.I advised that sister ________ at her desk all day.
mustn’t B not read C doesn’t read D needn’t read
( )2. The situation required that China __________ its
door to the outside world.
A must open B should open
C have to open D has to open
( )3. I ________ you a more valuable present for your
birthday ,but I was short of money at that time.
A must have brought B would have bought
C had bought D would buy
( )4----Do you want him to lend you some money
-----I wish he __________.
A had B did C would D should
B
B
B
C
( )5. _______he come , the problem would be settled.
A Would B Should C. Shall D. If
( )6. It was required that each student _________ enough
food on the trip.
A. had better bring B would bring C brought D bring
( )7.You __________ the meeting held yesterday. Why are
you absent
A had watched B might have watched
C were to watch D would watch
( )8.She didn’t come yesterday, or you _________him.
A had seen B might have seen
C were to see D would see
B
D
D
B
( )9.___________ you ________last Wednesday, you might
know it well now.
A Were , to come B. If, came
C. Had, come D. Did , come
( )10.I was ill that day, otherwise I _________the sports
meet.
A. would have taken part in B took part in
C had taken part in D would take part in
( )11.She couldn’t have answered the question if she
_________ a few books on world history.
A didn’t read B wouldn’t read
C haven’t read D hadn’t read
C
A
D
( )12.When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it
looks as if it __________.
A breaks B has broken
C were broken D had been broken
C
( )13.We should have arrived sooner except we ___ a flat tyre.
A had B would C has not D has
( )14.----Why didn’t you help him
----I would have_______ I didn’t have the money.
A still B but C otherwise D or
( )15. I would rather she _____________ with her friends that alone.
A travel on train B traveled by train
C travels by train D traveling by the train
( )16.I would have invited her to the party but I ______ her .
A. hadn’t met B. met
C. didn’t meet D. would meet
A
B
B
C
Cf. But for his great help, we ______________________
(finish) the task in time.
couldn’t have finished
要不是
( )17.It was ordered that no smoking __________ in
the library.
A was allowed B be allowed
C would be allowed D had been allowed
( )18. Would you have stayed with her________
A had she asked B if she asked
C if she should ask D should she ask
( )19. ________ here, he would attend the lecture.
A. Had he been B If he was
C Were he D Was he
( )20.Without electricity, what __________ A will the world be like
B. would the world be like
C. the world would be like
D. the world will be like
B
A
C
B(共32张PPT)
第 8 讲 情态动词与虚拟语气
1. — How's your new babysitter
— We ______ask for a better one. All our kids love her so much. (2011浙江卷)
A. should B. might
C. mustn't D. couldn't 　
【答案及解析】1. D　考查情态动词的用法。句意为“——你的新保姆怎么样？”“——找不到更好的了。我们的孩子们都很喜欢她。”should应该；might可能，可以；mustn't禁止；couldn't不可能。
2. Had I known about this computer program, a huge amount of time and energy ______.(2010浙江卷)
A. would have been saved B. had been saved
C. will be saved D. was saved　
【答案及解析】2. A　考查虚拟语气。根据句子的倒装特征判断此处是省略了if的虚拟语气，原形是：If I had known about this computer program, a huge amount of time and energy ______. 句意为：如果我早知道这个电脑程序，就可以节省大量的时间和精力了。
　3. “You ______ have a wrong number，” she said. “There's no one of that name here.”(2010浙江卷)
A. need B. can
C. must D. would
【答案及解析】3. C　考查情态动词。情态动词如果表示非常肯定的推测要用must。句意为：“你肯定打错电话了，”她说，“我们这里没有一个叫那个名字的人。”
　4. The doctor recommended that you ______ swim after eating a large meal.(2009浙江卷)
A. wouldn't B. couldn't
C. needn't D. shouldn't
【答案及解析】4. D　考查虚拟语气。根据句子中的recommended(推荐)可知，从句应用“should ＋ 动词原形” 表示虚拟，且此句为否定句。
1. 情态动词不能独立作谓语，其后接动词原形。
2. 情态动词没有人称和数的变化。
3. 情态动词一般没有时态的变化。
4. 情态动词接动词原形表描述现在或将来发生的动作或状态(modal verb＋ be / do, modal verb ＋ be doing)，情态动词接动词不定式的完成式表描述过去发生的动作或状态(modal verb ＋ have done)。
情态动词的基本用法
情态动词
　　　　　　　　　
1．准确把握情态动词表允许、推测、判断等用法。
2．准确把握情态动词在虚拟语气句子结构中的使用。
3．wish，as if/though，if only，would rather＋从句，It’s time＋从句等句型中的虚拟语气。
4．表示“坚持、命令、建议、要求”的词语后及各类从句中的虚拟语气。
5．虚拟语气在条件状语从句中的倒装。
2012年高考将重点考查情态动词表“推测和可能性、必要性、请求、允许、允诺”，非真实条件虚拟语气和名词性从句的虚拟语气的运用。
1. can, could
(1)表能力(＝be able to)。注意区别？
(2)表许可＝may。请求允许时，用can或may,在给予别人许可时，常用can，但有时也用may。不能用might。
——May I play basketball this afternoon
——No，you may/can not.
(3)表客气的请求，could比can更委婉。
(4)表推测，仅用于否定句和问句。肯定句中用什么？
How could you do such a silly thing
Whose hand could it be (5)(表示可能、许可)能够……；
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(6)can't / couldn't ＋v. ＋ too ＋adj. / adv.
can’t/couldn’t+v.+adj./adv+enough 再怎么……也不过分
You can’t be too careful while driving .
can't / couldn't but do.
Can’t help but do 只好，不得不,不能不…
can't help doing禁不住做……
2. may, might
(1)表允许，许可＝can如：You may go home now, Susan.
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(2)表可能性，may比might可能性更大。
(3)may / might as well ＋ v. 最好，满可以，倒不如
You may as well wait till Tuesday and go on a fast train.
(4)表祝愿，祈求。
May you succeed！ (5)(用于让步状语从句中)即使；无论。
Whatever he may say，I don't believe him.
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
注意：may作“可以”讲时，其否定式常用“mustn’t”表示“禁止”；must作“必须”讲时，其否定式是“needn’t”，表示“不必”。
—May I use your car
—No，you mustn’t.(委婉的拒绝可用：Sorry，but I am using it now.或You’d better not.等)
—Must I work out the problem tonight
—No，you needn’t.
3. must
(1)(表示义务、必要性、命令)必须，得，要。
You must do as you are told.
你必须按照吩咐去做。
(2)表强烈的劝告。
(3)表把握性很大的推测。
(4)must not表禁止，不允许。表示禁止(用于否定句)
You must not speak ill of others.
Cars mustn't be parked here.
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
(5)must的一般疑问句的否定回答用needn't或don't have to。
(6)(表固执，不满等)偏偏，硬要，偏要表示与说话人愿望相反及不耐烦。
Our three year old boy must do the opposite to what we ordered.
Must you make so much noise
(7)(表必然性)必定。
Everyone must die.
每个人都必定会死。
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
4. shall
(1)用于第一、三人称表征求意见，请求指示。
Shall I get some chalk
Shall she go to the concert with us this evening
He has come. Shall he wait outside or come in
(2)用于第二、三人称， 表示说话人的命令、强制、允诺、威胁或决心等， 多见于法律条文等文件中。
Don't worry. You shall get the answer this very afternoon. (允诺) He shall be sorry one day. I tell you. (警告)
Every driver shall be punished if he drives after drinking.
常考情态动词的用法
情态动词
5. should
. should 作为情态动词，通常用来表示现在或将来的责任或义务，译作“应该”、“应当”，这时它可以和 ought to， be supposed to 互换使用。
You should （= are supposed to ） complete your test in time.
You should （= ought to ） tell your mother about it at once. In sum， theory should be combined with practice
(2)(表惊讶、遗憾)竟然；居然。
It's a pity that he should resign.
常考情态动词的用法
（4）表示可能性、推测、推论或期待)可能,该
表示对现在情况、将来情况的推测。
They should be home by now.
The book you need should be in our library.
It’s nearly seven o’clock. Jack should be here at any moment.
-When can I come for the photos I need them tomorrow afternoon.
- They ___ be ready by 12:00.
A. may B. can C. should D. would
常考情态动词的用法
6. will /would
(1)表请求，would用疑问句多与you连用比will更委婉，客气。
Would you please tell me the way to Hongxing School
(2)表习惯性或反复性的动作，will指现在，would指过去的习惯＝used to。
When I was young, I ’d listen to the radio
(3)表意愿或固执坚持，事情作主语表固有的性质
I told him to come,but he wouldn’t come.
The door won’t open.
7.used to ,need, dare 的用法
— Who is knocking at the door
— It ______ be Tom.He said he would come at this time.
— It ____ be him. He has gone abroad.
— It ____ be John, but I am not sure.
— Who ___ it be
— Got it It is Mary.
must
may
can
can’t
肯定句： must, may
否定句,疑问句：can’t , couldn’t, may not
1. 情态动词表推测：
对肯定,把握性很大情况的推测：
must be /do(现在或将来)
must be doing(说话时正在进行)
must have p．p. (已发生的或状态)
对否定情况的推测：
can /could not be /do(现在或将来)
can't /couldn't be doing(正在发生的动作)
can /could not have p．p. (过去的动作或状态)
情态动词的特殊用法
对不太肯定,把握性不大情况的推测：
may （not） be/do(现在或将来)
may （not） be doing(说话时正在发生动作)
may （not） have p．p. (已发生的动作或状态)
might （not） be/do(现在或将来)
might （not） be doing(说话时正在发生动作)
might （not） have p．p. (已发生的动作或状态)
情态动词的特殊用法
2. 情态动词的完成式：
(1) could have done 本来能够做而实际上未做
(2) might have done 本来可以做而实际上未做
(3) should / ought to have done 本来应该做而实际上未做
(4) ought not to have done /shouldn't have done 本来不应该做而实际上做了
(5) needn't have done 本来不必要做而实际上做了
情态动词的特殊用法
情态动词
if 虚拟条件句的形式
虚拟语气
if 虚拟条件句的形式
虚拟语气
注意：有时条件从句中的动作和主句中的动作发生的时间不一致(表示错综时间的虚拟语气)，这时动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间加以调整。如：
If you had_listened_to the doctor, you would_be_all right now.
如果你当初听了医生的话，身体现在就好了。(从句动作指过去，主句动作指现在)
1. 省略连词if，将were, had或should提至主语前。如：
Were I you (If I were you), I would not do it.
我要是你，就不做这事。
2. 用介词短语代替条件状语从句。如：
Without_air,_there would be no living things.
如果没有空气的话，就不会有生物了。
But_for_your_help，I couldn't have done it.
要是没有你的帮助，我就不可能完成这件事。
if 虚拟条件句的转化
虚拟语气
3. 假设的情况有时可以通过上下文或其他方式表现出来。如：
I was busy that day. Otherwise I would have gone there with them.
我那天很忙，否则，我就和他们一起去那儿了。(如果我那天不忙的话，我就……)
I would_have_finished the work, but I have been ill.
我本来该完成这项工作的，但我生病了。(如果我没生病的话，我就会完成……)　　
if 虚拟条件句的转化
虚拟语气
　4. 省去条件从句成主句。如：
You could have washed your clothes yourself.
你本可以自己洗衣服的。
If my grandmother were with me!
如果我的祖母与我在一起多好啊！
if 虚拟条件句的转化
虚拟语气
1. can可以作“有时候会……”解，意思是平时或大部分时间不是这样子，只是偶尔发生的事情。如：
The climates of East China can_be pretty cold in winter. 华东地区冬天的气候有时会相当冷。
2. 在“It is important (strange，natural，necessary)that…”这类句型里，that所引导的主语从句中的谓语动词常用 “should＋动词原形”结构，表示某事是“重要”、“奇怪”、“自然”、“必要”等意义。如：
It is important that every member (should)_inform himself of these rules.
重要的是每个成员知道这些规则。
易错易混点
5. 在动词wish后的宾语从句中：
(1)表示对现在情况的虚拟：从句动词用过去式或过去进行式(be动词一般用were)。如：
I wish I knew the answer to the question.
我希望知道这个问题的答案。(可惜不知道)
(2)表示对过去情况的虚拟：从句动词常用“had＋过去分词”。如：
I wish (wished) I hadn't_spent so much money.
我后悔不该花那么多钱。
易错易混点
(3)表示对将来的主观愿望：谓语动词形式为“would＋动词原形”。如：
I wish it would_stop raining.
但愿雨能停止。
6. 在suggest，demand，order，propose，insist，command，request，desire等动词后的宾语从句中，谓语动词用“should ＋ 动词原形”，表示建议、要求、命令等。如：
I demand that he (should)_answer me immediately.
我要求他立刻答复我。
易错易混点
7. 在“It is time (that)…”句型中，定语从句的谓语动词常用虚拟语气表示将来，动词形式一般用过去式，意思是“是该干某事的时候了”。如：
It's (high) time we did our homework.
是我们该做作业的时候了。
8. if only 要是……就好了。相当于I wish…(与wish 后的虚拟语气类似)，如：
If only you hadn't_told him the news.
易错易混点(共27张PPT)
2012备考二轮复习语法专项
知 识 要 点
定语从句三要素（表格）。
只能用who, that或which的情况。
Which和as的区别。
The same as和the same that的区别。
Such/so…as…和such/so…that…的区别。
“介词+关系代词”中介词的选择问题(介词短语和动词短语)。
是否缺先行词。
定语从句的主谓一致。
定语从句与同位语从句、状语从句、强调句、并列句的区别。
定 语 从 句
1. 定义： 在句中起定语的作用、修饰句子中的名词或代词的从句。因其功能类似形容词，故又称为形容词性从句。
We visited a factory which makes toys for children.
2. 三要素：
关系代词（who, whom, whose,
which，that, as)
或关系副词（when ,where, why)
关系词在定语从句中充当成分
先行词
先行词 关 系 词 在 从 句 中 充 当 成 分
主 语 宾 语
（可省） 定 语 状 语
地 点 时 间 原 因 方 式
指 人
指 物
who,
that
which ,
that ,
as
whom ,
that ,
who
which ,
that ,
as
whose ,
of whom
whose ,
( prep.
+) which
where /
prep.
+ which
when /
prep.
+ which
why /
prep.
+ which
that /
prep.
+ which
1. Those ______ willing to attend the party, sign here please.
A. who are B. that are C. which are
2. This is the place _____ worth visiting.
A. who are B. that are C. which is
3. _____ known, the earth is round, not flat.
A. That is B. As is C. Which are
A
C
B
Ｉ.　关系代词（who, whom, whose, which，that, as)
先行词为指人的不定代词，关系词只能用who。
6. In our school there is a foreign teacher; ______ parents are living in America.
5. That’s the man the house of _____ has burnt down.
A. which B. whose C. whom D. his
4. That’s the man _____ house has burned down.
B
C
D
；
并列句
7. It may rain, _____ case the match will be put off.
A. of which B. for that
C. in which D. whose
C
1. This is the book ______ I told you about. *
2. She described in her compositions the people and places ______ impressed her most.
①当先行词为指人和指物的两个并列名词词组时，先行词只能用that。
3. Who is the girl _____ drove the car
②当主句是以who或 which 开头的特殊疑问句时。
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
** The differences between “that” and “which” .
D
B
B
4. He’s the only boy in our city ____ enters the Beijing University.
③当先行词被 the very, the only, the next, the last等所修饰时，关系词只能用 that。
5. The third place _____ we are going to visit is Hangzhou.
6. Is that the best _____ you can do
④当先行词是序数词、形容词最高级或被序数词、形容词最高级修饰时，关系词只能用 that。
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
B
B、C
B、C
7. All ____ is needed is money and hands.
8. We heard clearly every word ______ he said.
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
⑤当先行词是指物的 all, one, a lot, (a) little, few, much, none, anything, something, everything, nothing 等词时，或先行词被 all, any, no, much, little, few, every 等限定词所修饰时，关系词只能用that。
B
B、C
9. This is the great moment to _____ I look forward.
10. We suggested he go to see a doctor, ____ advise has been taken by him.
A. which B. that C. \
D. all above E. who
当先行词是物，且关系词位于介词后时，或引导非限定性定语从句时，只能用which。换言之，that不能直接位于介词后，也不能引导非限定性定语从句。
A
A
1. The sun heats the earth, ______ is very important to us.
2. He failed in the exam, _____ was expected.
A. that B. as C. which
D. it E. B & C
当先行词为主句时，关系词用which或as，它们的区别在于，as含有“正如”的意思。
**The Attributive clauses caused by “as"
C
B
3. I want to buy the same pen _____ you are using.
4. This is the same bicycle ____ I have lost.
A. that B. as C. which
D. it E. A & B
“the same…as…” 引导的定语从句表示从句所指的物品与先行词所指的物品为同一类事物，即同一个款式的，或同一个牌子等。
“the same…that…”引导的定语从句表示从句所指的物品与先行词所指的物品为同一事物。
B
E
5. This is _____ stone _____ no one can lift it.
6. This is _____ stone _____ no one can lift.
A. so heavy a, that B. so a heavy, as
C. such a heavy, as D. such heavy a, that
“so\such…that….”引导的是结果状语从句，从句的成分是完整的，也就是说that只起连接作用。
“so\such… as…”引导的是定语从句，从句的成分是不完整的，也就是说as代替先行词在从句中充当成分。
A
C
1.We visited a factory ____ makes toys for children.
2.We visited a factory _____ toys are made for children.
3. You can go ______ you want.
A. where B. to which
C. \ D. that
A
D
II.关系副词（ when, where, why）
A
地点状语从句
定从，关系词做主语
定从，关系词做地点状语
= in which
4. Is this the school ______ Tom once studied at
5. Is this school _____ Tom once studied
6. Is this the school at _____Tom once studied
7. Is this school ____ Tom once studied at
8. Is this the school _____Tom once studied
A. the one that B. where
C. the one where D. which
A
D
C
D
B
缺先行词
9.Summer is the season ______ my favorite season is.
10.Summer is the season _____ I like to travel.
11. I will visit you ______ it’s convenient for you.
A. which B. when
C. on which D. that
D
B
定从，关系词做时间状语
定从，关系词做表语，一般用“that”
B
时间状语从句
12. She doesn’t see the reason ______ he would like to join them.
13. She doesn’t see _____ he would like to join them.
14. Do you forget the reason _____ I have told you
A. why B. \ C. that D. for which
E. all above F. which
E
A
B C F
(宾语从句)
(定语从句，关系词做原因状语)
(定语从句，关系词做宾语)
15. Treat others in the way _____ you want to be treated.
16. This is the way _____ I want to treat you.
17. I don’t like the way ______ you speak to her. A. in which B. \
C. that D. all above
D
D
D
**Forces on agreement
He is the only one of the students _____ got very good marks in the match.
He is one of the students ____ got good marks in the match.
A. that have B. that has
C. who have D. who has
E. A & C F. B &D
B
E
the only one
the students
1. Word came ______ their army was defeated.
2. We expressed to them our wish _____ was the same as their.
3. It is the hotel _____ we stayed in last night.
4. It was in the hotel _____ we stayed last night.
A. that B. which C. who D. A&B
(同位语从句)
(定语从句)
（强调句）
A
D
D
A
**Tell the difference among the following sentences
Fulfill the following Grammatical blanks and explain the reasons.
The very film 1 is called Titanic is such a beautiful and sad love story 2 is popular with the public, 3 hero and heroine are Jack and Lucy. Lucy is a young beautiful woman with 4 her mother went to America. Jack, 5 won a ship ticket by playing cards, is a poor painter. They met and felt in love with each other on Titanic 6 they had a happy time. Sadly, the nice journey was destroyed by an unexpected storm, 7 Jack lost his life for saving Lucy (everyone will be moved by the selfless way in 8 most people can’t behave in real life ). Before Jack left Lucy forever, he encouraged Lucy to live well for him. 9 is known to all, love is the strongest strength. And that’s the reason 10 Lucy could live alone and told us the moving story.
that
as
whose
whom
who
where
when
which
As
why
～～～～～
～～
～～～～～～
～～
～
～～～～
～～～～～～～～
～
= on which
= during which
～～～～
= for which
正如
所属的关系
Combine the following sentences, using attributive clause and some conjunctions.
Zhang Zhenwei , who is a famous Chinese actor from ZhanJiang, acted many films, one of which is Breakpoint.
Zhang Zhenwei is a Chinese.
He is an actor.
He is famous.
He is from ZhanJiang.
He acted many films.
Breakpoint is one of the films.
Liu Jie is a student.
She is a girl.
She is 16.
Her dad is a teacher.
Her mother is a teacher, too.
She is our monitor.
She is very beautiful.
We all like her.
Liu Jie, a girl student of 16, whose parents are both teachers , is our monitor. She is very beautiful and we all like her.
Homework
Write an article with the title “My English Teacher” in 5 sentences, using attributive clause.(共38张PPT)
第 4 讲 介词
1. I always wanted to do the job which I'd been trained ______. (2011浙江卷)
A. on B. for
C. by D. of
【答案及解析】1. B　本题考点为介词与动词的搭配。句意为“我总想从事我一直以来为此被训练的工作。”还原定语从句部分，应该是“I'd been trained for the job”。 train作动词意为“训练”，介词for表目的。
2. I guess we've already talked about this before but I'll ask you again just ______. (2010浙江卷)
A. by nature B. in return
C. in case D. by chance
【答案及解析】2. C　考查介词短语的辨析。句意为“我觉得我们以前已经谈论过这件事情了，但是以防万一，我还是再问你一次吧。”by nature天生地，天然地；in return作为回报；in case以防万一；by chance偶然地，碰巧。
介词又叫前置词，是一种虚词。介词分为三种：
简单介词，如at, in, on, beside, to, for等；
短语介词，即由两个以上的词组成的短语，如in front of, because of, instead of等；
二重介词，如until after, from behind等。
介词的种类
介词不能独立在句中作成分，介词后必须与名词、代词或动名词构成介词短语在句中充当一个成分，表示人、物、事件等与其他人、物、事件等之间的关系。
1．作定语：The book _on_the_table is mine.
2．作状语：We have breakfast at_seven._(表时间)
They were late for meeting because_of the heavy rain. (表原因)
They started the machine by_pressing the button. (表方式)
介词的句法功能
3．作表语：My dictionary is in_the_bag.
4．作宾语补足语：I found him in_the_office.
介词的句法功能
1．表示时间的at, in, on, by
at表示片刻的时间，如：at 8 o'clock，常用词组有：at noon, at night, at midnight, at the end of, at that time, at the beginning of, at the age of, at Christmas等。
in表示一段时间，如：in the morning/ afternoon/ evening, in October, in 1998, in summer, in the past, in the future等。
on总是跟日子有关，如： on Monday, on Christmas morning, on May Day, on a warm morning等。
主要介词区别
1. ___ the morning of June 27, the
team reached the top of the mountain.
A. by B. At C. in D. On
2.We need to pay this electricity bill ____ January 31st.
A. In B. by C. during D. within
2．表示时间的since和from
since表示从过去到现在的一段时间的过程，常与现在完成时连用。from表示从时间的某一点开始，一般多与现在时、过去时、将来时连用。如：
I hope to do morning exercises from_today.
We have not seen each other since_1995.
主要介词区别
3. between和 among
一般说来，between表示两者之间，among用于三者或三者以上的中间。如：
You are to sit between your father and me.
He is always happy among his classmate
主要介词区别
4．表示“用”的in, by,with和 on
with用于有形的工具，或身体某些器官等的方面，其后的名词多被冠词或物主代词等修饰。而in常用于表示材料、方式、方法、度量、单位、语言、声音等。by后接名词且名词前常没有修饰词，名词用原形。如：
He is writing a letter with_a_pen.
He wrote the letter in_pencil._
We measured it in_pounds / by the pound. (按磅计算)
Tell me the story in_English / with the English language.
by hand靠手工　by ship乘船　by air乘飞机
主要介词区别
by hand靠手工= with our hands 　
by ship乘船 =on a ship　
by air乘飞机=on this/a plane
by radio = on the radio
“用这种方式”：
in this way/manner ,
by means of /by this means
with this method
5．as和 like
as作“作为”、“以……地位或身份”解。如：Let me speak to you as a father. (事实是父亲)
like作“像……一样”解。如：Let me speak to you like a father. (事实上不是父亲)。
6．in front of 和in the front of
in front of ＝ before，是“在……前面”的意思(不在某物内)；in the front of则是“在……前部”的意思(在某物内)。如：There is a desk in front of the blackboard.
The boy sat in the front of the car.
主要介词区别
1. 表示时间的in和after
两者都表示“在(某个时间)之后”，区别在于in表示“在(一段时间)之后”，而after则表示“在(某一具体时间点)之后”，in短语和将来时态连用，after短语和过去时态或将来时态连用。如：
We'll be back in three days.
After seven the rain began to fall.
注意：after有时也可以表示在一段时间之后(常用在过去时里)。如：
After two months he returned.
易错易混点
2. 表示地理位置的in, on, to
in表示在某范围内，on指与什么毗邻，to指在某环境范围之外。如：
Changchun is in the northeast of China.
Mongolia is on_the north of China.
Japan is to the east of China.
3. 表示“穿过……”的through和across
through表示从内部通过；across则表示从一端至另一端在表面上的通过。如：
Water flows through the pipe.
The old man walked across the street.
易错易混点
4. besides, except, but, except for
besides指“除了……还有，再加上”。如：All went out besides me.
except指“除了，减去什么”。如：All went out except me.
but与except意思近似，表示“除了……外”，经常用在no, all, nobody, anywhere, everything等和其他疑问词后面。如：
I never saw him reading anything_but the newspaper.
易错易混点
except for表示“除……以外”，跟except的区别在于其后跟的词与前面所提到的不是同一类别。如：
His diary is good except_for a few spelling mistakes.
易错易混点
5. for与of用于不定式复合结构
(1) It is＋adj. ＋of sb. to do sth. ＝ sb. ＋be＋adj. ＋to do sth.
当形容词说明不定式逻辑主语的性质、特征时，用of。常见的此类形容词有：kind, good, nice, clever, stupid, foolish, considerate, polite, impolite, cruel等。
(2) It is＋adj. ＋for sb. to do sth.
当形容词说明不定式的性质时用for。常见的此类形容词有：possible, impossible, important, necessary等。如：
It is quite important for us to protect our environment.
易错易混点
Beyond用法精讲

beyond一词用法和含义较为复杂，很容易产生理解上的障碍，造成写作翻译上的失误或影响阅读理解。以下是关于beyond的一些用法：
一、beyond作介词用时，使用最广，常用于下列几种情况： 1.表示位置，意思是“在……的那一边；在……之外；在更远处”。例如： Beyond the river stood a power station
The sea is beyond that hill．
What lies beyond the mountains
2.表示时间，其意为“迟于； 晚于；超过”。例如： Some shops keep open beyond midnight.
He never sees beyond the present．他从未看到将来。
This work is beyond my grasp.
Don‘t stay there beyond midnight.


3.表示范围、水平、限度、能力等，意思是“超出；多于；为……所不能及”。在句中常作表语、定语或状语。 Your work is beyond all praise．
The fruit is beyond my reach.
His bad behavior is beyond a joke.
Understanding this article is beyond my capacity.
She was really touched beyond words．
Men can travel to the moon and beyond.
Is there life beyond the grave (喻)在阴间还有生命吗
4.用在否定和疑问句中，意思是“除……之外”。例如： I know nothing beyond what he told me． Is there anything more you can say beyond that？
5.beyond有时还可表示年龄或数量，意思是“超过 .
He didn't believe in people living beyond 100.
At the meeting there were not beyond 20 people．
二、beyond也常作副词用，主要有下面两种用法： 1.指时空或正在进行中的活动，意思是“在远处；向远处；更远处”。例如： If we cross the mountains we may find people
living in the valley beyond．I’ll go with you to the bridge,but not a step beyond．
2.表示外加，意思是“此外；以外”。例如： He told me nothing beyond．
三、习惯用语：
It is beyond me.[口]我能力所不及; 我不能理解。
beyond sb.为某人所不能理解
beyond oneself精神错乱; 忘形; 失态
四、Beyond构成的常见短语
beyond one’s power 超出某人的能力
beyond one’s reach 在某人够不着的地方
beyond praise 夸不胜夸
beyond example 没有先例
beyond compare 无与伦比
beyongd midnight 过了半夜
beyond belief 难以置信
beyond recognition 难以识别
beyond (the) sea(s) 在/往海外
beyond one’s wildest dreams 大大出乎某人的预料
beyond 15% 超出15%
from beyond the seas 来自海外
peak beyond peak (of) 重重
beyond the mountain 在山的那一边,远方, 彼方
B
D
C
D
A
at
beyond
via
In
on
by
for
against
D
A
C
C
B
D
D
D
A
A
返回(共62张PPT)
专题六
正反解读动词和动词短语
对动词词义、动词短语的辨析以及动词搭配的考查一直是高考的热点。因此在一轮的复习中要注重对动词及短语的含义及引申义进行归纳总结；突出对其在具体的语境中意义选择的把握。
专题六 │ 考点荟萃
考点荟萃
一、常考的十类动词及词组
1． 连系动词
特点：后面常接形容词或名词，此时动词没有进行时和被动语态。连系动词按其所表示的意义可分为以下四种：
(1) 变化类，表事物发展变化的过程，如become, go, turn, grow, get, fall, come等。
(2) 感官类，表人体部位的感受，如feel, smell, taste, look，sound等。
专题六 │ 正面解读
正面解读
(3) 状态类，表事物所处的状态，如keep, remain, stand, lie, stay, prove, turn out等。
(4) 外表特征类，表外表给人的印象，如appear, look, seem等。
2． 感官动词和使役动词
常考的感官动词有see, watch, notice, observe, hear, feel, find, catch等。感官动词的主要考点是后接非谓语动词的不同形式作补足语，表达不同的含义。
常考的使役动词有make, have, let, keep等。使役动词的主要考点是后接非谓语动词的不同形式作补足语，表达不同的含义。如：
专题六 │ 正面解读
He looked around and caught a man __________ his hand into the pocket of a passenger.
A．put B．to be putting
C．to put D．putting
【解析】 D　
catch sb doing sth“发现、发觉某人做某事”，doing sth为现在分词短语作宾语补足语。
可接现在分词作宾语补足语的动词还有：
feel, hear, have, get, see, watch, notice, observe, find, keep, leave等。
专题六 │ 正面解读
3． 不用被动语态的动词及动词短语
英语中有些动词及短语可用其主动形式表达被动含义。
(1) 某些实义动词的主动形式后跟副词表示主语的某种属性特征，不用被动。
这类动词有：sell, wash, write, last, read, wear等。如：
This new product sells well. 这种新厂品很畅销。
This kind of cloth washes well and lasts long.
这种布耐洗而且耐用。
The pen my father gave me as a birthday gift writes smoothly. 父亲送给我作为生日礼物的钢笔书写很流畅。
Written in simple English, this article reads easily.
因为这篇文章是用简单的英语写的，所以读起来很容易。
专题六 │ 正面解读
(2) 某些及物动词转为不及物动词后，其主动形式表示被动意义。
这类动词有：open(打开，营业)，close(关门)，
shut(关闭)，cut(切割)，weigh(重)，act(上演)等。如：
This shop opens much earlier than it used to.
这家商店比过去开门更早了。
Each stone weighs two tons. 每块石头重达两吨。
专题六 │ 正面解读
(3) 某些不及物动词及词组，本身表被动含义，所以它们常用主动形式。
这类动词及词组有：
happen(发生), occur (发生), cost， take place (发生)
come out(出版)， turn up(被找到)，
come into being(产生)，
come to one‘s mind(想起)，
come into use(开始使用), turn out(证明是)，
come about(发生)，break out(爆发)，
belong to(属于)，come up(被提出),
be worth(值得做), be to blame(受责备)等。如：
专题六 │ 正面解读
The first textbooks written for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 18th century. 第一批用作英语教学的外语教材出版于18世纪。
Suddenly an idea came to his mind.
他突然想到一个主意。
Who is to blame for breaking the vase
打碎花瓶应由谁负责？
The problem finally came up at the meeting.
这个问题终于在会议上被提出来了。
Even the best theory can turn out (to be) wrong.
即使最好的理论都可能被证明是错误的。
专题六 │ 正面解读
(4) “主语＋系动词＋形容词＋不定式”句式中。
当形容词说明主语具有某种特征，主语又充当不定式的逻辑宾语时，其中不定式要用主动形式表达被动意义。常用于这一结构的形容词有：easy, hard, difficult, heavy, fit, expensive等。如：
The physics problem is easy to work out.
这道物理题很容易算出来。
A guide is expensive to employ.
雇用向导花钱很多。
This kind of fish is not fit to eat.
这种鱼不适合吃。
专题六 │ 正面解读
4． 接动名词作宾语的动词或词组
常见的有：avoid, can't help, can't stand, consider, enjoy, escape, finish, give up, imagine, fancy, keep, mind, miss, practise/practice, put off, resist, risk, suggest, admit, appreciate, deny, forbid等。如：
The bird was lucky to escape being caught.
这只鸟幸运地逃离了被捕抓的命运。
He is always practising/practicing playing the piano after school.他经常放学后练习弹钢琴。
专题六 │ 正面解读
5． 接不定式作宾语的动词
常见的有：afford, agree, aim, arrange, ask, choose, decide, demand, determine, expect, hope, learn, long, manage, offer, pretend, promise, refuse，want等。如：
He can't afford to buy such an expensive car.
他买不起这么贵的车。
Tom managed to cut down dozens of trees.
汤姆成功地砍倒数十棵数。
专题六 │ 正面解读
6． 表示 “需要”意义的动词
这类词既可直接接动名词，也可接不定式的被动语态，但两者均可表示被动含义。它们是：need, want, require等。如：Your sick mother needs looking after.＝Your sick mother needs to be looked after.你病弱的母亲需要照顾。
7． 接虚拟语气的动词
有些动词表示“应该(或命令、建议、要求等)”时，其后的宾语从句用should加动词原形，其中should常可省略。 它们是：order, suggest, insist, advise, demand, request, require, propose等。如：
Peter suggested that Tom go there at once.
彼得建议汤姆立刻去那。
专题六 │ 正面解读
Our teacher requires this be done in no time.
我们老师要求这个立刻完成。
8． 表示“计划未能实现”的动词
此类动词常用过去完成式加不定式，或用过去式接不定式的完成式表虚拟语气，表达原来的计划未能实现。它们是：intend, mean, plan, hope, expect, think, want, suppose等。如：
I had meant to tell you about it yesterday, but the snowstorm prevented me.
They hoped to have stayed there a week, but they couldn't because of another important meeting.
专题六 │ 正面解读
9．现在表将来类
这类动词(词组)常用一般现在时或现在进行时表将来。它们是：come, go, leave, start, arrive, move, begin, fall, see, stay, take off等。如：
Your plane takes off at a quarter past two in the afternoon.
你的飞机是下午二点一刻起飞。
I am coming to that.
The National Day is drawing near.
10．带介词to的动词短语
带介词to的动词短语有：be (get) used to, lead to, devote…to, look forward to, stick to, object to, get down to, adapt to等。当它们后面出现动词时，要用v. ing形式。
专题六 │ 正面解读
二、以动词为词源形成的常用动词短语
1.以break为中心 break away from 脱离，逃离
break down 出故障，崩溃，粉碎，瓦解
break in 闯进，打断
break into 闯入；强行进入
break out 爆发，发生
break off 打断，断绝，折断； 突然终止
break through 突破；克服
break up 破碎；解散，分解；结束
The plan ____ just because people were unwilling to cooperate.
A. turned down B. pulled down
C. broke down D. put down
专题六 │ 正面解读
2. 以bring为中心
bring about 导致，引起，促使
bring back 带回，使回忆，使恢复
bring down 使下降，打垮，击落
bring forward 提出；提前
bring in 把……带进来；引进；挣得(收入)
bring on 导致，引起，使发展
bring out 使显现；出版
bring up 抚养，养育，培养
*Now I’d like to _____ the question of funds.
A. bring about B. bring down
C. bring forward D. bring in
专题六 │ 正面解读
3. 以call为中心
call at 访问(某地)；停泊在
call away 叫走；把(注意力)转移开
call for 需要，要求；接(某人)，迎
call in 召集，收集；下令收回
call off 取消，下令停止
call on 要求，恭请；号召；拜访(某人)
call out 下令罢工；召唤出动
call up 打电话给……；召集；使想起
--- Can I do the job
--- I’m afraid not, because it ____________ skill and patience.
A. calls for B. asks for C. sends for D. cares for
专题六 │ 正面解读
4. 以carry为中心
carry away 冲走，带走；冲昏某人头脑
carry back 拿回，运回；使想起
carry off 成功地对付；获得(奖品)
carry on 坚持，继续，进行
carry out 贯彻，执行，实施
carry through 坚持到底，进行到底；履行(承诺)
The audience were ______ by her beautiful song.
A. carried away B. carried on
C. carried out D. carried through
专题六 │ 正面解读
5. 以come为中心
come about 发生
come across 偶尔发现；偶然遇到
come back 回来；恢复，复原
come off (头发、牙齿、纽扣)脱落，离开
come on 上演；开始；赶快；发展
come out 出来；发芽；出版；结果是；说出
come over 访问；突然感到
come round/around 苏醒；拜访；再次发生
come to an end 终止，结束
come to life 苏醒
come to light 明朗化，出现，显露出来
come to oneself 恢复常态
专题六 │ 正面解读
when it comes to… 就……而论，谈到
come true 实现，成为现实
come up 走近；发生；发芽；(问题)被提出
*******************************************************
*When it ______ tennis, you can’t beat her.
A. come about B. come across C. come out D. come to
*I simply couldn’t understand how it ______ that you did so much work within such a short time.
A. came across B. came about
C. came up D. came back
*The truth will sooner or later ______.
A. come about B. turn out C. come out D. give out
专题六 │ 正面解读
6.以cut为中心
cut away 切去，砍掉
cut down 砍倒，削减，缩短
cut off 切断，中断；阻碍，阻挡
cut out 切下，剪下，裁下；删去
cut through 开辟(出路等)
cut up 切碎，切掉；使悲伤
*******************************************************
*Eager to get thin, Ruth has decided to _____ meat entirely for three years at least.
A. cut off B. cut up C. cut out D. cut down
*Jimmy was really __ when all his friends refused to help him.
A. cut away B. cut off C. cut out D. cut up
专题六 │ 正面解读
7.以fall为中心
fall back 撤退，后退
fall behind 落后，落伍，落在后面
fall down 不够好
fall in love with… 爱上……
fall into 陷入；养成
fall off 衰退，减少
fall over 被……绊倒
*****************************************************
*Don't walk too near the edge of the cliff (悬岩), you might ______ .
A．blow over B．fall over C．carry off D．cut off
专题六 │ 正面解读
8.以get为中心
get about 徘徊，走动；流传
get across 使被理解
get along 前进，进步；离去，相处
get around 走动；传播
get away 离开，逃脱
get back 取回，回来；报复
get down to 认真对待，静下心来
get out of 由……出来，从……得出；避免；放弃
get over 越过；恢复，痊愈；克服；完成
get rid of 除去，去掉；免除，摆脱
get through 拨通；到达；完成；通过；及格
get up 起床，起立；忙于，从事
专题六 │ 正面解读
9.以give为中心
give away 赠送；失去；泄露/透露(秘密等)；
背弃；颁发，分发
give back 归还；还给；归还；使恢复
give in 屈服，让步，投降
give sth in (to sb) 呈上；交上
give in to sb/sth 向某人/某物让步；屈服于……
give out 分发；公布；发出；用完，耗尽
give off 发出(光、烟、气味等)
give out 用完，消耗尽；分发
give way (to) 屈服于；给……让路，为……所代替
give up 放弃；停止
专题六 │ 正面解读
【活学活用】
(1) Believe in yourself and never _______(屈服)．
(2) The authorities have shown no signs of __________(向……屈服) the kidnappers' demands.
(3) The room is _________(发出) a musty smell.
(4) They are ___________(赠送) prizes at the new store.
(5) What shall we use for power when all the oil in the world has ___________(用完)
(6) The doctors did everything to ____________(使我恢复) the use of legs, but in vain.
We will never ________(放弃) working, whatever happens.
The news of the mayor's coming to our school for a visit was ______the radio yesterday. [ Give out the news意为“播报新闻”.]
give in
giving in to
giving off
giving away
given out
give me back
give up
given out
10.以go为中心
go about 开始做某事；忙于某事
go across 度过，越过
go after 追逐，追求，跟随
go against 反对，不利于
go ahead 前进，进展，继续
go along with… 陪伴，和……一道走
go away 离开，走掉
go by 经过，过去
go for 支持，赞成；适用于，去(取、拿)
go off 走开；爆炸
专题六 │ 正面解读
go on 继续，接下去
go out 出去；熄灭；送出；播出
go over 温习，检查
go round 拜访；参观
go through 审查，履行；通过；经历，忍受
go too far 走得太远，做/说得太过火
go up 上升，上涨；攀登
go without 没有……也行
专题六 │ 正面解读
11.以hold为中心
hold back 隐瞒；阻止；克制
hold down 压制；压低
hold on 坚持；等一等，别挂断
hold on to 抓住不放；不卖
hold out 伸出；提供机会
hold up 举起，竖起；支持住；延误，使耽搁
*The story was so moving that I could hardly_____ my tears.
A. hold up B. hold on C. hold on to D. hold back
*The mail was _____ for two days because of the snow storm.
A. held out B. held off C. held up D. held down
*The teacher__ excellent models of compositions for her class.
A. held up B. held back C. got through D. got up
专题六 │ 正面解读
12.以keep为中心
keep away (from) 不接近，避开，远离
keep back 阻止，扣留，隐瞒
keep in mind 记住
keep off 不接近，远离；避免吃(或喝、吸)某物
keep out 使……不入内；不卷入
keep pace with… 跟上，同……步调一致
keep to 坚持；固守，遵守
keep up 继续；(天气)持续不变；保持，维持
keep up with… 赶上，跟上，与……并肩前进
专题六 │ 正面解读
13.以lay为中心
lay aside 把……放在一边；留存备用
lay down 放下；规定
lay off (暂时)解雇；停止
lay out 铺开，展开
14.以leave为中心
leave behind 留下，忘记携带； 超过；永久离开
leave out 省去，遗漏，不把……计算在内
leave off 停止；中断
leave over 留下，剩下
leave alone 不干涉，不打扰
专题六 │ 正面解读
15. 以look为中心
look about 四下环顾；查看
look after 照顾，看管
look around 东张西望
look back 回顾，回头看
look back on/upon 回顾
look for 寻找；期待，期望
look down on/upon 俯视；轻视
look forward to 盼望，期待
look into 窥视；调查；浏览
look on/upon …as… 把……看作
专题六 │ 正面解读
look out 向外看；注意；当心，提防
look out for 当心，寻找，搜寻
look through 透过……看去；看穿；浏览
look up 查阅；仰视
look up to 仰慕，尊敬
16. 以pick为中心
pick off 去除；选择(目标)射击
pick out 精心挑出，辨别出
pick up 接(某人)，搭载；捡起；学会；(偶然)得到
专题六 │ 正面解读
17. 以pull为中心
pull apart 拉开，分开
pull away 开动
pull down 拉下，拉倒；拆毁；使(价格)下降；使扫兴
pull in （车船）抵达
pull off 短暂停车；获得成功
pull on （匆匆）穿上，戴上
pull out 驶出，离开
pull through 克服困难；恢复
pull up 停止；训斥
专题六 │ 正面解读
18. 以put为中心
put aside 把……放在一边；搁置；积蓄，攒钱
put away 把……放好，把……收拾；储藏
put back 把……放回原处
put down 放下；镇压；记下
put an end to 结束，终止，废除
put forward 提出；拨快；建议，推荐；提倡
put in 安装；添上；打断
put off 推迟，延期；消除；推脱，脱下
put on 上演；穿上；增加；开动
专题六 │ 正面解读
put one's heart into 全神贯注，专心致志
put out 熄灭，伸出，拿出
put through 完成；(电话用语)拨通；使穿过
put up 举起，挂起；提名，推荐；安排住宿
put up with 忍受，容忍
19. 以send为中心
send away 解雇；赶走，把……送往远处
send for 派人去叫(请、拿)
send off 发出，寄出；邮购，函购
send out 发出，散发
send up 发射；使上升；取笑
专题六 │ 正面解读
20. 以set为中心
set about (doing) 着手，开始
set an example to sb. 给某人树立榜样
set aside 留出；放在一边；暂不考虑
set back 使推迟；使花费
set down 放下，卸下；登记，记载
set free 释放(某人)
set off 出发；使爆炸；引起
set out 出发；发表；着手做某事
set up 建立，设立，开办；引发，产生
专题六 │ 正面解读
21. 以take为中心
take after 仿效，与……相似
take away 拿走，减去；消除
take back 收回，取消
take care of 当心，注意；照顾；提防；谨慎
take charge of 负责，主管
take down 取下；记下；拆毁; 拆掉，拆除
take in 留宿；欺骗；吸收；理解
take…into account/consideration 考虑，重视
take off 开始有成就(成名)；脱掉(衣服等)；
(飞机)起飞；起程 ; (价格)打折； 请假，休息
take on 呈现；雇佣；承担，担任
take one's place 代替
专题六 │ 正面解读
take out 拿出，取出；去除
take over 接管，接任；占上风
take part in 参与，参加 take place 发生；举行
take pride in 以……为荣，对……感到骄傲
take up 拿起；从事 (某项活动)； 继续做
占用 (时间或空间)；
take apart 把 (小型机器、钟表等) 拆开、拆散；
(在体育运动或比赛中)轻易击败某人
* Our son doesn’t know what to ___________ at the university；he can’t make up his mind about his future. A．take in　 B．take up C．take over D．take after
解析：选B。take in接受，吸收，理解，欺骗；take up从事，参加，占据，继续； take over接管；take after像。根据句意选B。
专题六 │ 正面解读
专题六 │ 正面解读
【活学活用】
(1) I'm sorry I was rude; I __________ (收回) everything I said.
(2) We find it difficult to ________ (理解) what he has taught.
(3) The company decided to ________ (聘用) a new secretary.
(4) When the picture was ____________ (取下来), the wall looked very bare.
(5) Would you like me to _________ (接手) the driving for a while
(6) Bill Gates is really a great man, whose career ___________ (大获成功) in his early thirties.
take back
take in
take on
take down
take over
take off
专题六 │ 正面解读
(7) England was really ____________ (彻底打败) by Italy in last night's match.
I'll __________ (继续讲) the story where I finished yesterday.
(9) We tried to find a table for seven，but they were all ____________ (占据;占用) .
They decided to kick him upstairs and appoint a younger man to ______________ (取代他)．
Nowadays plastics ____________________ (取代了) many conventional materials.
My study of biology has ________ (占据;占用) much of my spare time, but it has given me a great deal of enjoyment.
taken apart
take up
taken up
take his place
have taken the place of
taken up
22. 以think为中心
think about 考虑
think of …as… 把……看作
think out 仔细考虑，想通
think over 仔细考虑
think through 想通；充分考虑
think up 想出；发明
think highly (well/a lot/a great deal/much…)of　 对……评价很高
think poorly (little/badly/ill…) of 对……评价不高;轻视，看不起
sing high praise for 对……评价很高
speak highly of 对……评价很高
have a high opinion of 对……评价很高
专题六 │ 正面解读
专题六 │ 正面解读
【活学活用】
(1) We ____________________ (对……评价很高) their research in this field.
(2) I ____________________________ (对……评价不高) her idea.
We ________________________________ (高度评价) his contributions to his country.
*I can’t _____ his name at the moment.
A. think over B. think about C. think D. think of
think/speak highly of
don't think much of/think little of
sing high praise for/speak highly of
23. 以throw为中心
throw at　 把……投向
throw away 丢弃，浪费；错失(机会)
throw oneself into 投身于，积极从事
throw out 逐出；否决；散发
throw up 呕吐；使显眼；匆匆建造
*Every day, people _____ a lot of rubbish.
A. give away B. throw away
C. clean away D. wash away
*What a pity! He ____________ the only chance of success.
A. gave in B. put down
C. threw away D. broke off
专题六 │ 正面解读
24. 以turn为中心
turn away 把……打发走，转脸不理睬
turn down 调小；驳回，拒绝考虑
turn off 关上；拐弯；使厌烦
turn on 打开；依靠，取决于；突然攻击
turn out 出席；证明是；向外；出现
turn over 翻转；转动
turn round/around 旋转，转过身来
turn in 上交(=hand in)
turn to 转向，求助于
turn upside down 颠倒过来，翻过来
*The mobile phone you lost yesterday has　______.
A. turned in B. turned out C. turned to D. turned up　　
专题六 │ 正面解读
1． 【误】 He is listening the teacher carefully.
【正】 He is listening carefully.
【正】 He is listening to the teacher carefully.
【解析】 学习实义动词，一定要分清楚这个动词属于及物动词还是不及物动词，然后再根据不同的使用规则使用不同的动词。
专题六 │ 反面解读
反面解读
2． 【误】 The mixture is tasted terrible.
【正】 The mixture tastes terrible.
【解析】 连系动词后接形容词或相当于形容词的结构作表语。除了少数几个(如get, become, grow等)外，系动词不用于进行时态和被动结构。
专题六 │ 反面解读
3． After studying in a medical college for five years, Jane ________ her job as a doctor in the countryside.
A．set out　B．took over　C．took up　D．set up
【误】 B
【正】 C
【解析】 对高频短语take up的意思掌握不全面，不知道该短语除了表示“占用”之意外，还可以表示“开始从事……”。句意：简在医学院学了五年后，在乡村从事医生工作。
set out“出发， 开始”；
take over“接收， 接管”；
take up“拿起， 开始从事”；
set up“设立， 竖立”。 根据题意选C。
专题六 │ 反面解读
1． [2010·全国卷Ⅰ] The workers __________ the glasses and marked on each box “This Side Up”.
A．carried B．delivered C．pressed D．packed
【解析】 D　考查动词词义辨析。
句意为：工人们把眼镜打包，然后在每个箱子上贴上“此端朝上”。pack打包。
专题六 │ 实战演练
实战演练
2． [2010·辽宁卷] The new movie____________ to be one of the biggest money makers of all time.
A．promises B．agrees
C．pretends D．declines
【解析】 A　考查动词词义辨析。
promise表示“允诺，答应”， “有……的希望”的意思；
agree意为“同意，赞同”；pretend意为“假装”；decline意为“减少，衰退”。只有promise符合题意。句意为：这部新电影有望成为电影票房史上票房最高的影片之一。又如：
The girl ______ to be a good teacher if she is well trained in an art school.
A. expects B. promises C. allows D. wishes
专题六 │ 实战演练
3． What the young man can't ________ is that his mum always treats him like a baby.
A．support B．undertake C．hold D．bear
【解析】 D　考查动词辨析。 A意为“支持”； B意为“承担，担任，着手做”；C意为“握住，容纳”；D意为“容忍，忍受”。句意为：这个年轻人无法忍受的是他的母亲总是把他当个小孩来对待。根据题意可知应选D。
4． We want to rent a bus which can ________ 40 people for our trip to Beijing.
A．load B．hold C．fill D．support
【解析】 B　根据句意，此处需用表示“容纳，包含”的动词，只有B项符合。
专题六 │ 实战演练
5. The film Avatar ( 阿凡达 ) will be on tonight but it's at 1：30 am. I don't want to ________ that late.
A．stay up B．show off
C．put up D．get off
【解析】 A　考查动词短语辨析。
根据题干意思选A。
stay up熬夜；
show off炫耀，卖弄；
put up举起，建起，张贴；
get off下车，出发，脱掉。
专题六 │ 实战演练
6． — How are you managing to do your business without a secretary
— Well, I ________ somehow.
A．get along B．care about C．watch out D．set off
【解析】 A　考查动词短语辨析。
get along(勉强)生活，工作下去； care about关注；
watch out小心； set off出发。
7． I've ________ my umbrella in the office and I'll have to fetch it.
A．forgot B．left C．remained D．lost
【解析】 B　根据句意，此处需用表示“遗漏，遗落”的动词，B项符合题意。
专题六 │ 实战演练
8． Don't let yourself be ________ into doing anything you don't want to do.
A．told B．made C．talked D．asked
【答案】 C
9． The designs of the few tools should be __________ carefully, so that we can pick out the one that best suits our job.
A．tried B．examined
C．experimented D．experienced
【答案】 B
专题六 │ 实战演练
10．He can't be at home now, for I saw him ___________ in the gym just now.
A．giving out B．working out
C．carrying out D．bringing out
【解析】 B　本题考查短语辨析。give out用完，分发；work out解决，锻炼；carry out实现，执行；bring out出版，生产。句意为：他现在不可能在家，刚才我还看到他在健身房锻炼。故B项正确。
专题六 │ 实战演练
11．— So Helen, are we going for that Chinese meal you promised me
— Well，I kind of forgot to ________， so we'll have to do French.
A．consult B．order C．reserve D．confirm
【解析】 C　
由答语的“so we‘ll have to do French”可以看出， 这次吃不上上次承诺给对方的中国饭菜了， 只有 “我” 忘了预定(reserve)可以讲得通。
consult商讨，向……请教；
order点餐(菜或饮料)；
confirm证实；确定。
专题六 │ 实战演练
12．One primary goal of UNESCO is to ____________ modern knowledge societies in which all people can participate in information and knowledge.
A．make up B．polish up
C．build up D．take up
【解析】 C　考查动词短语辨析。
build up（逐渐）建立；增强
take up 从事；占据
polish up 改善，润色；
make up 弥补，虚构，整理，和解，化妆。
句意为：建立现代化的知识社会，让所有的人都能参与信息与知识，是联合国教科文组织的一个基本目标。
专题六 │ 实战演练
13．It's extremely dangerous for the drivers to ________　　 speed as the traffic lights are changing.
A．pull up B．put up C．rise up D．pick up
【解析】 D　考查动词短语辨析。
句意为： 对于司机来说在红绿灯变换时，
加速是非常危险的。
pull up 停下来；
put up 建造，举起，提供……住宿；
rise up 起义，上升，为不及物动词词组。
pick up “加速”，符合题意。
专题六 │ 实战演练
14．His guilty expression ________ my suspicion（猜疑）.
A．considered B．committed
C．confirmed D．convinced
【解析】 C　confirm 证实，确认。句意为：他内疚的表情证实了我的猜疑。consider认为；考虑；commit犯罪；做……承诺；convince说服，使信服。
15．We complained to the travel agency about the horrible service during our trip, but no one has ________ by now.
A．responded B．advocated
C．recovered D．survived
【解析】 A　respond答复，回应；advocate主张；拥护；recover恢复，找回；survive幸存，生还。
专题六 │ 实战演练
16．Thank you for the trouble you have ______ to help me.
A. paid B. taken
C. had D. asked
【解析】 B　考查动词短语。
此题考查固定短语：take the trouble to do sth，表示“不辞辛劳地去做某事”。所以答案为B项。
专题六 │ 实战演练
17．Time should be made good use of ______ our lessons well.
A. learning 　　　　　B. learned
C. to learn 　　　　　D. having learned
【解析】 C　考查动词短语make (good) use of …。
此题选C项，考查的是不定式作目的状语。此句是利用被动结构设置陷阱。本句转化为主动形式是：(We) should make good use of time to learn our lessons well．
专题六 │ 实战演练
18．In New Zealand， I made lots of friends _____ a very practical knowledge of the English language.
A. get 　　B. to get 　　C. getting 　　D. got
【解析】 B　
该题中不可把made理解为使役动词，而误选A项。实际上made lots friends意为“交了很多朋友”，答案为B项，不定式to get在句中作目的状语。
专题六 │ 实战演练(共77张PPT)
专题五
※下列以 ly结尾的词是形容词，不是副词：lively活泼的；lonely孤独的；lovely可爱的；deadly致命的；friendly友好的；ugly丑陋的；silly傻的；motherly慈母般的；brotherly兄弟般的；sickly多病的；likely可能的；weekly每周的： yearly每年的；daily每天的。
如：a sickly child一个多病的孩子；be likely of success有可能成功；an ugly wound一个丑陋的伤口；a friendly match一场友谊赛。(共31张PPT)
高中英语时态讲座
英语的时态
Tenses
This lecture is about the contents of tenses.
Put the following sentences into English
(1)我正在看书.
(2)他将来.
(3)你作业做完了吗？
(1)I’m reading a book.
(2)He will come.
(3)Have you finished your homework
I am reading a book.
（由助动词am+动词现在分词reading构成，表示动作正在进行，构成现在进行时。）
He will come.
（由助动词will+动词原形come构成，表示动作将要发生，构成一般将来时。）
Have you finished your homework
(由助动词have+动词过去分词finished构成，表示动作的完成与否，构成现在完成时。）
一般现在时 ( The Present Indefinite Tense)
现在进行时 (The Present Continuous Tense)
一般将来时 (The Future Indefinite Tense)
现在完成时 (The Present Perfect Tense)
一般过去时 (The Past Indefinite Tense)
过去进行时 (The Past Continuous Tense)
过去将来时 (The Past Future Tense)
过去完成时 (The Past Perfect Tense)
Now let’s analyze each tense.
一、一般现在时 ( The Present Indefinite Tense)
1、用法:
（1）表示经常反复发生的动作
Father often _______( go) to work on foot.
goes
（2）表示现在的状态或主语的特征
He _____(be) busy at the moment.
is
（3）表示客观真理、谚语等
Trains _____(run) faster than cars.
run
（4）用于时间或条件状语从句中，一般现在时代替一般将来时。
● We will go to the park if it _____________(not rain) tomorrow.
● We will leave for home as soon as the meeting _____(be) over tomorrow.
doesn’t rain
is
3、常与下列时间状语连用:
通常与表示频度（即动作发生的次数多少）
意义的副词或词组连用.
For example:
always, often, usually, seldom, never, every day,
from time to time, now and then（偶而）,
once a month, twice a year, at the moment,
generally, etc
二、现在进行时 (The Present Continuous Tense)
1、用法：
（1）表示说话时正在进行的动作。
The dog _________(run) after a cat now.
is running
（2）表示一阶段正在进行的动作（但说话时不一定进行）
They____________(build) the restaurant these days.
are building
2、常用时间状语：
now, at the moment, these years, etc.
3、须注意的问题：
1)表示赞扬或厌恶、埋怨的语气时常用现在进行时
Eg. He is always telling lies.
The young man is always helping the poor.
You are always making fun of me.
2) 某些表示感官知觉与心理状态的动词一般不用现在进行 时，而用一般现在时。
For example: see ,hear, smell, taste,think, like,hate,
want, know, have, wish, etc.
He wants to visit his grandfather now.
The dishes taste delicious.
Do you know where he is from
三、一般将来时 (The Future Indefinite Tense)
1.表示将来某个时刻将要发生的
动作或存在的状态。
They ________(fly) to Japan the day after tomorrow.
There _____( be )a lecture in the music hall next week.
will fly
2、常与下列时间状语连用：
tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week,
next year,this week, this coming Saturday,
tonight, in an hour, soon, etc.
will be
3. 口语中大量使用be going to 结构表示
事先打算，有意图要发生的动作或客观情况
下即将要发生的动作。Will表示对将来情况
的预测
For example:
Look at the clouds. It is going to rain.
In the future,there are going to be many “Englishes”.
I am going to see a film today.
You will succeed if you work hard.
Will British English disappear one day
Miss Green ___________(come) to the party
next Sunday.
is coming
(2) Look! The old man ________(die).
We must send him to the hospital at once.
is dying
4、须注意的问题：
有些表示位置移动或状态改变的动词
（go, come, leave, arrive, die 等等）,用它
们的进行时来表示按计划安排将要发生
的动作。
四、现在完成时 (The Present Perfect Tense)
1、用法：
1)表示过去发生的动作对现在造成的影响或结果
(1)They________________(buy) a new house.
（影响是他们有新房子住了）
have bought
(2) She___________ (lose) her ring.
（影响是她现在没有戒指）
has lost
2)表示过去开始并持续到现在的动作或状态,
常与“for+时间段”或“since+时间点或从句”连用。
have learned
(2) They___________ (stay) in this hotel since
last Tuesday.
have stayed
(1) We____________ (learn) English for seven years.
2、常与这些时间状语连用:
already, never, ever, yet, before, twice,this month, so far, up to now, in the past/last few years,since
,for,etc.
for ten years,for a centry等时间短语，
即for+一段时间，所在的句子常用现在完成时。
since 1980s, since I graduated, since ten years
ago等since+过去的时间，主句用现在完成时，
since从句用一般过去时
★
★
4、注意的问题:
1）have/has been to 与have/has gone to 区别:
have/has been to
表示“曾到过某地”，说明有过某种经历。
Have/has gone to
表示“已去某地”，在途中或已到目的地。
(1) She ______________Qindao（她已去青岛了）
has gone to
(2) I ____________Canada（我去过加拿大）
have been to
2）瞬间动词与延续性动词的区别：
瞬问动词表示短暂不能持续一段时间的动作。
如come, go, leave, start, begin, buy, become, die等
而持续性动词表示能持续一段时间的动作。
如work, stay, live, learn 等
Tell the following sentences true or false.
I have bought the calculator for a week.
( )
(2)I have had the calculator for a week.
( )
F
T
第一句动词buy 属于瞬间动词，瞬间动词不能
与“for + 时间段”、“since + 时间点或从句”连用，
如果要用，必须将瞬间动词改成持续性动词。
leave die buy put on borrow become
be away be dead have wear keep be a
join the army fall ill catch a cold go out
be in the army be ill have a cold be out
finish/end arrive here begin/start
be over be here be on
3）since引导的时间状语从句中谓语动词通常
用一般过去时，主句用现在完成时。
We____________(stay) in this school since we
_________ (come) to the city.
have stayed
came
4）句型：It is +时间段+ since +……瞬间动词过去式，自从……
It is six weeks since they came here.
It is ten years since he smoked.
一、 Fill in the blanks with the verbs in their
proper forms.
1.We___________ (solve) the problems soon.
2.You__________(get) wet if you________ (go) out
without an umbrella.
3.__________(not throw) paper on the ground.
4. A: What________you_______(do) at the moment
B: I__________(go) over my lessons.
A: When________ you__________( start)
going over your lessons
B: An hour ago.
5._____ you ever_______(hear) about the Egyptian Mummy Exhibition at Shanghai Museum
Complete the following exercises .
will solve
will get
go
Don’t throw
are
doing
am going
did
start
Have
heard
6.Your story_________ (sound) interesting.
You read a lot, don’t you
7.We __________ (build) ten factories in this small
town since 1990.
8.As we all know, a lot of changes _____________
(take place)in our city in the past ten years. 9.It____(be) three months since I posted the
letter .
10.Englishmen seldom ____(talk) in the
underground.
11.They ___________(not get) off the bus until
the rain stops.
sounds
have built
have taken place
is
talk
won’t get
二、Choose the best answer
1.He’s never been to England,_______
A.is he B.isn’t he C.has he D.hasn’t he
2.The poor man_____in bed up to now. He has no money to see a doctor.
A.had laid B.had lain C.has lain D.has laid
3.Neither he nor I_____ interested in playing video games.
A.am B.is C.are D./
4.You______worry about your son. He will be well soon.
A.needn’t to B.need to C.don’t need D.don’t need to
5.Internet bars mustn’t let people under 18 in or let
anybody_______bad things.
A.watch B.to watch C.watching D.watches
C
C
A
D
A
6.Some passengers were walking through one of the
big halls at Paris’ Charles De Gaulle Airport________
the whole roof fell down.
A.while B.as soon as C.when D.after
7.A:Would you mind telling me_______recently
B:Of course not.
A.where did he live B.where does he live
C.where he lives D.where he lived
8.I wonder if you_______( go) there by bus or by train
tomorrow.
A.would go B.will go C.goes D.go
C
C
B
三、Correct the mistakes. (There is only one mistake in each sentence)
1.Mr Smith doesn’t be in now. He has gone to New York.
2.The teacher said that the earth went around the sun.
3.The boy is very sad now because he had just lost his new bike.
4.By the time she was fifteen, She started to teach herself computer science.
doesn’t be _______isn’t
went_________ goes
had_________has
started__________ had started
5.You should apologized to him.
6.Plastics are used to making many things.
7.The old man has died for several years.
8. I said I would show him the picture when I finish it.
9. His job at the moment is organize the school sports meeting
died________been dead
finish_______finished
organize_______to organize
apologized___________ apologize
to making_________to make
10.Bob as well as his friends do some reading every morning.
11. They invited to take part in Miss Li’s birthday party last Sunday.
12.Jessica prefered milk to tea three years ago.
13.I’m sorry I didn’t hear you because I am listening to music.
prefered________preferred
invited_________were invited
do_______does
am__________was
14.While they had supper, all the lights went out.
15. Scientists has studied the global warming for several years. They are working hard to find a solution.
16.The professor usually goes to see a film on Sundays when he was young.
17.I’m looking forward to receive your letter.
18.Yesterday afternoon I happened to meet my old friend.We have been away from each other for about ten years.
goes________went
have_________had
had________were having
has_________have
to receive_________receiving
四、Fill in the blanks with the verbs in the box in their proper forms.
( not smoke, hold, remember, see, operate, watch)
1.He didn’t go to the cinema because he _________
the film twice.
2.Jack was asked ____________cigarettes on the bus.
3.He still_____________ riding a bicycle in the street
for the first time now.
4.The hall is big enough ____________2,000 people.
5.The doctor said that the old woman had to _________
on immediately.
6.You had better finish your homework before
____________TV.
had seen
not to smoke
remembers
to hold
be operated
watching
(Kid, not meet, help, hear, not see, go)
Mr.Baker and Mr.Smith work in the same university. They are good teachers and their students like them very much. They often __________ each other when either of them gets in trouble.
One day Mr.Smith was very tired, so when he went home he told his new servant,“I’m busy this afternoon.
I ____________ anybody.”
Just then Mr.Baker went to his friend for help. He knocked at the door. The servant went to answer the door. She didn’t know Mr. Baker and told him that Mr.Smith _______________ anyone that afternoon.
help
won’t see
would not meet
Several days later Mr.Smith went to Mr.Baker to ask for advice. But his friend said inside the door, “Sorry, Mr.Baker ___________just _______out.” “______ you_________, Mr. Baker ”
said Mr.Smith . “I _____________ it’s you speaking there.”
Mr.Baker opened the door and said, “I could believe your servant, Mr.Smith. Why don’t you believe me ”
has
gone
Are
kidding
have heard
“用所给动词的适当形式填空”一直是中考英语试卷中的一个专设项目，05年学业考试的试题虽然较以往有新的变化，时态填空这大题将被取消，但是它被安排在新增的选择题中进行测试，所以仍然是同学们必须重点掌握的知识。测试的内容主要在于检测学生对初中英语八种时态、被动语态、情态动词以及动词不定式等的综合掌握情况。测试的重点在于“具备明确的时间状语”或“给予情景” 状态下学生正确使用动词形式的能力。本项目是双基部分的一个重要内容。本讲座侧重讲了时态方面的内容，在做这方面练
习时，除了掌握八种时态的基本结构外，我们应掌握以下的解题要点：
总结
1、关注时间状语、频度副词等关键词，不同时态往往带有一定的时间状语，根据不同的时间可确定相应的时态。
2、关注复合句中基本解 题要点。
3、在确定时态的前提下，根据主语与谓语的关系确定动词的主动或被动形式。
4、注意各种时态的联系和区别。
5、情态动词、动词不定式（to）后的动词使用原形；在部分动词后要用v-ing形式；非谓语动词的用法。
6、把握能力题的解题技巧。解题中学生必须做到综合分析，通盘考虑，才能落笔无误。
1）情景题：试题没有明显的时间状语，学生必须仔细研读题句，弄清情景意思，找出上下句各个动作之间在时间上的关系。
2）段落题：注意事件发生的总体时间，然后根据时间的推移，对段落进行整体理解，在作出准确判断的基础上落笔解题，否则容易产生差错。因为这是对动词形式的综合考核。
7、加强易错题的辨析和专项训练，提高解题得分率。(共12张PPT)
1.强调句
(1) 强调人时可用who，强调其他任何部分都用that。所强调的可以是单词、短语，也可以是句子，但结构必须完整。被强调的成分可以是主语、宾语和状语，但不能是定语或谓语。
It is not only blind men who make such stupid mistakes.
不仅是盲人才会犯这种愚蠢的错误。
It is American movies that he likes to watch.
他喜欢看的是美国电影。
强调句、省略句、倒装句
(2) 强调句型的一般疑问句只需把is/was提前。
Was it in 1933 that the Second World War broke out
第二次世界大战是在1933年爆发的吗
Is it American films that he likes to watch most
他最喜欢看的是美国电影吗？
(3) 强调句型的特殊疑问句结构是“疑问词+ is/was+it+that从句”。
Why is it that smoking is not allowed here
为什么不允许在这儿抽烟
(4) 原因状语从句中只有because引导的从句可以被强调。
It was because her mother was ill that she didn’t come to school yesterday.
是因为她妈妈病了她昨天才没来上学的。
(5) 在not ...until ...结构中，对until引导的短语或从句进行强调时，需用It isn?t/wasn?t until ...that ...这一固定句型。that从句中谓语动词用肯定形式。
It was not until she took off her dark glasses that I recognized she was a famous film star.
直到她摘下墨镜我才认出她是一位著名的影星。
注意：It is/was ...that ...结构不能强调谓语，如果需要强调谓语时，用助动词do，did或does+动词原形，且只限于祈使句和肯定的陈述句。
Do be careful when crossing the street.
过马路时一定要当心。
Mike does enjoy playing football.
迈克确实喜欢踢足球。
2.省略句
(1) 在when, while, whenever, till, as soon as, if， unless， as if， though， as等引导的状语从句中，若从句中的谓语有be动词，而从句的主语又与主句主语相同或主语是it时，从句的主语和be常被省略。
Unless (I am) invited, I won?t go to the party.
如果没被邀请，我是不会去参加那个聚会的。
When (you are) working，you must pay attention.
工作时，你必须全神贯注。
(2) 在as， than， however， whatever， no matter what等引导的从句中常省略某些成分。
I must get it done whatever the cost (may be).
无论代价多大，我都要把这件事情办好。
I can only do it the way as was told to(do it that way).
我只能按照吩咐去做。
(3)虚拟条件句常省略if，将were，had，should提前构成倒装。
Should there be a flood(=If there should be a flood)，what should we do
如果发洪水，我们该怎么办
(4)有些状语从句置于句末，可以作句尾省略，有时也可以省略整个从句。
John will go there if my brother will(go).
如果我哥哥去那儿，约翰也去。
I would have come yesterday (If I had wanted to).
我昨天本来可以来的。
3.倒装句
(1) 表示否定意义或半否定意义的词置于句首时，常用部分倒装。常见的词有:seldom， never， hardly， no， not， little等。
Little did he know that the police were around.
他一点儿也不知道警察就在旁边。
Never before has our country been as united as it is.
现在我们的国家空前团结。
(2) 由only，not until引导的状语置于句首时,常用部分倒装。
Only by working hard can we succeed.
只有努力工作,我们才能取得成功。
(3) no sooner ...than， hardly ...when等结构中，no sooner和hardly置于句首时，主句用倒装形式。
No sooner had he arrived home, he began to prepare the supper.他一到家就开始准备晚饭。
Hardly had he entered the room, it began to rain.
他一进屋就开始下雨了。
(4) 在so/such ...that引导的结果状语从句中，so或such引导的部分置于句首时主句用倒装。
So shallow is the lake that no fish can live in it.
湖水那么浅，以致于没有鱼能在里面生存。
Such a good boy is he that we all love him.
他是那么好的一个孩子，我们都喜欢他。
另外，“so/neither/nor+be/助动词/情态动词+主语”so与前面的肯定句呼应，neither/nor与前面的否定句呼应。其中动词的形式取决于前一句的动词。表示前者的情况也（不）适用于后者或一者(不)具备两种情况。
After that we never saw her again，nor did we hear from her.
从那以后我们再也没见过她，也没有收到过她的信件。
I saw the film last week.So did she.
上周我看了这部电影，她也看了。
(5) 省略if的虚拟条件句以had/were/should开头引起的倒装。
Were she my friend, I would ask her for help.
如果她是我的朋友，我就会请她帮忙。
例1:The computer was used in teaching. As a result, not only , but students became more interested in the lessons.(2009 全国Ⅰ)
A. saved was teachers; energy
B. was teachers;energy saved
C. teachers;energy was saved
D. was saved teachers;energy
解析:选B。考查倒装句。否定副词not only, little, never 等位于句首时，它后面的句子用部分倒装。
例2:Every evening after dinner, if not from work, I will spend some time walking my dog. （2009 湖南）
A. being tired B. tiring C. tired D. to be tired
解析:选C。考查特殊句式的省略形式。if not tired = if I am not tired。
例3:Little about her own safety, though she was in great danger herself.(2009 陕西)
A. did Rose care B. Rose did care
C. Rose does care D. does Rose care
解析:选A。little是具有否定意义的副词，位于句首时句子用部分倒装且根据从句时态可知用一般过去时，所以选A项。
例4:So sudden that the enemy had no time to escape. (2009 山东)
A. did the attack B. the attack did
C. was the attack D. the attack was
解析:选C。考查句子倒装。在so ...that ..., such ...that...的句子结构中，若so, such 和与其所修饰的词置于句首时，用部分倒装，又因为sudden是形容词，作表语，所以选项C正确。
例5:—What‘s the matter with Della
—Well, her parents wouldn’t allow her to go to the party, but she still .(2009 江苏)
A. hopes to B. hopes so C. hopes not D. hopes for
解析:选A。考查省略句。答句句意为：噢，她的父母不让她参加这个聚会，但是她仍然希望能去参加这个聚会。根据but这个并列连词以及hope的用法可知此处应该用hopes to。
例6:Bill wasn‘t happy about the delay of the report by Jason, and .（2008 辽宁）
A. I was neither B. neither was I
C. I was either D. either was I
解析:选B。考查倒装句。表示一种情况同时适合两者的“……也不”，否定句式用“neither/nor+助动词+主语”。either用于否定句句末，如果A项为“I was not， either”也正确。
例7:It was not until midnight they reached the camp site.(2008 重庆)
A. That B. when C. while D. as
解析:选A。考查强调句。强调句型为:It is/was ... that，句中强调的是not until所引导的时间状语，故选项A正确。
例8:It was along the Mississippi River Mark Twain spent much of his childhood. (2008 天津)
A. how B. which C. that D. where
解析:选C。考查强调句。强调句式:It is/was ...that强调的是句中的地点状语，若强调的成分是指人的名词时，句式中的that可以换成who，其他情况一律用that。
例9:It was announced that only when the fire was under control to return to their homes. (2008 江西)
A. the residents would be permitted
B. had the residents been permitted
C. would the residents be permitted
D. the residents had been permitted
解析:选C。考查句子倒装。在that引导的主语从句中，only修饰的状语位于句首时，主句用倒装语序，故排除A、D两项；主句的动作发生在从句的动作之后，故不用过去完成时，正确选项为C。
例10:—Would you like to join me for a quick lunch before class
— , but l promised Nancy to go out with her.(2008 全国Ⅰ)
A. I’d like to B. I like it C. I don’t D. I will
解析:选A。考查省略句。句意为：——你愿意课前跟我一起吃顿简单的午饭吗 ——我愿意,可是我已经答应南希跟她一起出去了。口语中，如果不定式中的动词在上下文中相同可以将该动词省略，只保留to，所以选项A正确。(共19张PPT)
B
D
C
D
A
at
beyond
via
In
on
by
for
against
D
A
C
C
B
D
D
D
A
A
返回